HomeMy WebLinkAboutB12-0029 Project Manual East approved Received By David Rhoades at 4:41 pm, Mar 28, 2012 Reviewed for Code Compliance Code: 2009 International Building Code (IBC) MH 4/09/2012
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Va il, Co l o r a do TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 T ABLE OF C ONTENTS - V OLUME I Project Directory Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Geotechnical Report DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 0110 0 Su mm a ry 0121 0 A ll owances 0123 0 A lte rna t es 0125 0 Con t rac t M od i f i ca ti o n Procedures 0127 0 Un it Pr i ces 0129 0 Pa y m en t Procedures 0131 0 Projec t Ma nage m e n t an d Coord i na ti on 0132 0 Cons t ruc ti o n Progres s Docu m e n t a ti o n 0132 2 Pho t ograph ic Docu m e n t a ti on 01330 Sub m ittal Procedures 01400 Quality Require m ents 01420 References 01500 Te m porary Facilities and Controls 0152 4 Cons t ruc ti o n W a s te Ma nage m e nt 0160 0 Produc t Requ i re m e n ts 0170 0 Execu ti o n Requ i re m e n ts 01731 Cutting and Patching 01732 Selective De m o lition 01770 Closeout Procedures 01781 Project Record Docu m ents 0178 2 Opera ti o n an d Mai n te nanc e Da ta DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02080 Utility Materials 02230 Site Clearing 02240 Dewatering 02260 Excavation Support and Protection 02300 Earthwork 02370 Erosion Control 02510 Water Distribution 02620 Subdrainage 02630 Storm Drainage 02732 Roadway Base 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 02768 Decorati v e Ce m ent Concrete Pave m ent 0278 0 Un it Pavers 0290 0 Landscap i n g DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03542 Ce m ent -Based Underlay m ent DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 0481 0 Un it Ma sonr y Asse m b lies 0486 0 S t on e Ma sonry DIVISION 5 – M ETALS 05120 Structural Steel 05310 Steel Deck
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Va il, Co l o r a do TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 0540 0 Co l d -For m ed Metal Fra m i ng 0550 0 Metal Fabr i ca ti ons 0551 1 Metal S t a i rs 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings 0553 0 Gra ti ngs 05721 Orna m ental Railings DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 0610 0 Roug h Carpen t r y 06108 Exterior Rough Carpentry 0613 0 Heav y T i m be r Cons t ruc ti on 0616 0 Shea t h i ng 0620 1 Ex te r i o r F i n i s h Carpen t r y 0620 2 In te r i o r F i n i s h Carpen t r y DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 0714 1 Co ld F l u i d -App lied W ate rproof i ng 0721 0 Bu il d i n g Insu lati on 0731 1 Aspha lt Sh i ng l es 07531 Ethylene -Propylene -Diene -Monomer (EPDM) Roofing 07551 APP -Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 0762 0 Shee t Metal F l ash i n g an d Tr im 07650 Pedestal Paver System 0772 0 Sno w Re te n ti o n S y s t em 07841 Through -Penet r ation Firestop Syste m s 07842 Fire -Resisti v e Joi n t Syste m s 07920 Joi n t Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Fra m es 08212 Stile and Rail W ood Doors 0821 3 A l u m i nu m C l a d W oo d Doors 08305 Access Doors and Fra m es 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 0855 0 A l u m i nu m C l a d W oo d W i ndows 0871 0 Doo r Hardware 0880 0 G l az i ng DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 0922 0 Por tla n d Ce m e n t P l as ter (Stucco) 0925 0 G y psu m Board 0926 5 G y psu m Boar d Shaf t -W all Asse m b lies 09653 Resilient W all Base and Accessories 0968 0 Carpet 0990 0 Pa i n ti ng DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10200 Louvers and Vents 10300 Prefabricated Fireplaces 10520 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT : None DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS : None DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION : None DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 1424 0 H y drau lic E l eva t ors
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Va il, Co l o r a do TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 T ABLE OF C ONTENTS - V OLUME I I Project Directory DIVISION S 15/16 – FIRE PROTECTION 15300 Fire Protection Systems 16721 Addressable Fire Alarm Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results For Plumbing 220523 General Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping 220533 Heat Tracing For Plumbing Piping 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221316 Sanitary Waste & Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221329 Sanitary Sewerage Pumps 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties DIVISION 23 -- HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 Common Work Results For HVAC 230519 Meters And Gauges For HVAC Piping 230523 General Duty Valves For HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping 230548 Vibration Isolation For HVAC Piping 230593 Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing For HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 230900 Instrumentation And Control For HVAC 230993 Sequence Of Operations For HVAC Controls 231123 Natural Gas Piping 232113 Hydronic Piping 232123 Hydronic Pumps 23 2500 HVAC Water Treatment 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Duct Accessories 235216 Condensing Boilers 238219 Fan Coil Units 238239 Unit Heaters 238316 Snowmelt DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 Basic Electrical Requirements 260526 Grounding 260529 Supporting Devices 260533 Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets 260923 Lighting Control Devices 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 263500 Solar Photovoltaic Devices 265100 Interior Lighting 265600 Exterior Lighting 265800 Rim Roof Heating System EN D OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PROJECT DIRECTORY 1 PROJECT DIRECTORY PROJECT Lion Square Lodge East 660 W. Lionshead Place Vail, Colorado OWNER Lion Square Lodge East 660 W. Lionshead Place Vail, CO 81657 (970) 477-4432 Fax (970) DEVELOPER Viele Development, LLC 1000 S. Frontage Road Vail, CO 81657 GENERAL CONTRACTOR Viele Construction, LLC 1000 S. Frontage Road Vail, CO 81657 ARCHITECT Melick Associates, Inc. 355 S. Teller Street, Suite 370 Lakewood, Colorado 80226 (303) 534-1930 Fax (303) 534-1931 CIVIL ENGINEER Peak Land Consulting North Frontage Road Vail, Colorado 81657 (970) STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Monroe & Newell 1701 Wynkoop, Suite 200 Denver, Colorado 80202 (303) 623-4927 Fax (303) 623-6602 SOILS INVESTIGATION Koechlein Consulting Lakewood, CO MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL Architectural Engineering Consultants (AEC) ENGINEER P.O. Box 8489 Avon, Colorado 81620 970-748-8520 FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER Shaner Life Safety LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE Neils Lunceford Silverthorne, Colorado
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1 SUPPLEMENTA R Y CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The Supplementary Conditions change and amend the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition, of the American Institute of Architects. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified by these Supplementary Conditions or by Division 1 requirements, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS At the end of this clause add the following sentences and subclauses: 1.2.3.1 Addenda and Architect’s Supplemental Instructions take precedence over original construction documents. 1.2.3.2 Should there be conflict within Specifications, on Drawings or between the Specifications and Drawings, Developer/Contractor shall notify Architect before proceeding and Architect shall decide which stipulation will provide best installation and his decision shall be final. 1.2.3.3 In drawings, the precedence shall be drawings of larger scale over those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR Revise the following Subparagraph(s) as indicated: 3.3.1 The contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for providing and main taining a safe place to work, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract and (1) to review any specified construction or installation procedure, including those recommended by th e manufacturers; (2) to advise the Architect (a) if the specified procedure deviates from good construction practice, (b) if following the procedure will affect any warranties, including the Contractor’s general warranty, or (c) of any objections the Contractor may have to the procedure; and (3) to propose any alternative procedure which the Contractor will warrant. 3.4 Labor and materials: Add the following Subparagraph 3.4.3 to 3.4 3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for substitution of products in place of those specified with full disclosure by the Contractor of functional, material, cost, and other differences between the products. Paragraph 3.18 Revise Subparagraph 3.18.1 to read: 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Architect’s consultants, and agents an d employees of any of them arising out of (1) The preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) The giving of or failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage, and is required under the terms of this Agreement.
2 SUPPLEMENTA R Y CONDITIONS L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ARTICLE 4 – ADMINISTRATION Paragraph 4.1 Revise Subparagraph 4.1.2 to read: 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withhe ld. In the event the Architect is not contractually obligated to provide some or all services during the construction phase, and unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall be responsible, and hold the Architect harmless, for those construction related services stipulated throughout this document or as may otherwise be required. Paragraph 4.2 Revise Subparagraph 4.2.2 to read: 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work as permanent improvements and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on-site observations as an Architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work for the existing building. Revise Subparagraph 4.2.8 to read: 4.2.8 The Architect may prepare ASI’s and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. ARTICLE 5 – SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3.1 Add the following Clause: 5.3.2 Before doing any work, each subcontractor shall verify measurements at the job-site pertaining to his work and shall be responsible for correctness of same. Any variations in actual and drawn dimensions shall be submitted to Architect for consideration before proceeding with work. ARTICLE 7 – CHANGES IN THE WORK The Owner and General Contractor shall agree to pro cedures for changes, and the Owner may make such changes without invalidating the Contract. Reasonable charges for Contractor’s overhead and profit and subcontractor markup shall be agreed to by the Owner and General Contractor prior to execution of a Change Order. ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1.1 In the 2 nd line after the words “in a company or companies” DELETE the words “lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located” and in that place INSERT the words “licensed to do business in the State of Colorado , with the Owner, Architect and his Consultants as named insureds;” Revise Subparagraph 11.1.2 to read:
3 SUPPLEMENTA R Y CONDITIONS L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11 .1.1 of AIA A201 shall be written for not less than limits of liability stipulated by the Owner or requ ired by law, whichever coverage is greater. ARTICLE 12 – UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.2 ADD: “General Contractor shall, in case of work performed by his subcontractors and where guarantees are required, secure warranties from subcon tractors and deliver same to Owner upon completion of work. Should any defects develop in aforesaid work within specified periods due to faults in materials or workmanship, contractor(s) shall make repairs and do necessary work to correct defective work in accordance with the Contract Documents . Repairs and corrective work, including costs of making good other work damaged by or otherwise affected by making of repairs or corrective work, shall be accomplished without cost to Owner and at entire cost an d expense of contractor(s) within mutually agreed upon time frame and after written notice from Owner. No thing herein intends to imply that guaranty shall apply to work which has been abused or ne glected by Owner of successor(s) in interest. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SUMMA R Y 01100 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of selective demolition, addition and renovation to the existing hotel condominium units at Lion Sq uare Lodge South, in Vail, Colorado. Full description of project scope below. B. Owner and Lot Location: Lion Square Lodge East HOA, 600 West Lionshead Place, Vail, Colorado. C. General Contractor: Viele Construction, LLC, 1000 South Frontage Road, Vail, Colorado. D. Architect: Melick Associates, Inc., 355 Teller Street, Suite 370, Lakewood, Colorado. F. Geotechnical Report: See repo rt included in this manual. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work contemplated by this description consists of the construction of additions to the east and west sides of the existing building for living and bedroom expansions. The scope of work is intended to be a core and shell package and not include the interiors of the existing units. B. The construction type is Type V-A at the existing building and the anticipated construction type of the building is III-B. C. The occupancy type is R-2. D. The structural frame is wood with open web steel joists at the existing building. E. The major systems in the building include architectural, structural, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical systems. F. The scope of the project is further defined by the following expansions and amenities to be provided: 1. Bedroom additions 2. Living / Dining room additions 3. New elevators and egress stairs 4. Existing unit fireplace replacements 5. Deck additions including adjacent living room and loft expansions 6. Replace north and south decks/balconies 7. Remove existing parapet roof waterproofing and install new roofing membrane on entire parapet roof. 8. Developer responsible for unforeseen conditions 9. Developer to protect existing units and use during construction 10. Remove, store and reinstall all Owner furnishings 11. One hour rated egress stair enclosures 12. New two hour rated exterior walls consisting of 6” metal studs @ 16” o.c with 2 layers 5/8” type ‘x’ gypsum board each side
SUMMA R Y 01100 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 13. Add one hour rated shaft wall assembly to ex isting exterior walls to remain and add new exterior finishes per architectural drawings 14. Provide fire proofing between units as required by state and local codes 15. Construction type 3B for occupancy and height building code requirements 16. Construction conforming to applicable building codes 17. Sprinkler and fire alarm design by Shaner Life Safety G. Scope of work not included: 1. Existing unit interior design remodel H. Summary of Code Restrictions: All codes and regulations in effect at the site as of March 1, 2007 shall apply. I. Summary of fees: 1. The Developer will pay for all permits and utility construction fees, including development fees. 2. If required, the Developer will pay for utility service company capital cost development fees and/or plant investment fees and relocation of public utilities. 3. The Developer is to provide Builder’s Risk Insurance coverage including deductibles. J. Summary of items not covered by the Project Manual: The following list covers items of work not provided for under the specification manual. This is not a complete list and is intended only to indicate some of the major items that will not be included. These costs should be covered by the Developer under a separate budget for soft or indirect costs for the project. 1. Architect fees 2. Special consulting fees 3. Land survey 4. Utility development fees - tap fees 5. Testing and inspections 6. Builders Risk Insurance 7. Dewatering 8. Soils report 9. Telephone 10. Payment and performance bond (available if requested) 11. Models or renderings 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime GMP contract between Developer and General Contractor. General Conditions of th e Contract for Construction to be AIA Document A201 except as amended or supplemented by the Supplementary Cond itions. These General and Supplementary Conditions shall apply to all work of the Project and all sections of these specifications. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractor s so work on those co ntracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work perfor med under separate contracts.
SUMMA R Y 01100 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written permission. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 gove rn the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
SUMMA R Y 01100 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONTRACTOR A. General Contractor to perform the fo llowing with regards to the project execution and in coordination with the installation requirements in the Architect’s Drawings and this Project Manual. 1.GC to field verify bond of stucco to gypsum board sheathing and notify Architect of broken bond between these materials. 2.GC to provide mockup of all exterior colo rs and finishes for review and approval by Architect and Town of Vail Design Review Board. 3.GC to notify the Architect immediately once conflict s with the contract do cuments and/or unforeseen issues are discovered during the course of construction for the purpose of resolving design issues with the Architect. 4.GC to assist in resolving any conflicts, coordination issues and unforeseen issues in a timely fashion during construction. 5.GC to cooperate with the Architect who is to document and interpret the design. 6.GC to cooperate with the Ow ner who is to inte rpret the functional and operational requirements. 7.GC to communicate with the design team consultants through the Architect. 8.GC to work with the design team during the pre-construction process to resolve issues with means and methods of construction, sequencing, as well as cost and schedule impacts. 9.GC to perform the following construction project management tasks from preconstruction services through the duration of the project: a.GC to plan the subcontractor activities ahead of schedule so that there is time to resolve issues and properly sequence trades prior to the trades working in the field. b.GC to provide a regularly updated project schedule. c.GC to track updated construction costs of the project. d.GC to issue and track PCOs and COs. e.GC to submit shop drawin gs as required by the contract documents to the Architect in a timely fashion so that there is adequate time to do a thorough review and re-submittal(s) as necessary for proper corrections and coordination prior to construction of that activity. f.GC to identify conflicts and needs for clar ification with the Arch itect through the RFI process and plan ahead in such a way that it does not cause a delay to the project. g.GC to follow the RFI process for questions and clarifications to the drawings. h.GC to follow the ASI process for supplemen tal instructions provid ed by the Architect, with GC providing timely input regarding cost, constructability, and schedule impact. i.GC to issue weekly meeting minutes during construction that reflect and track all issues to be resolved, action items, and the responsible party(s). END OF SECTION 01100
ALLOWANCES 01210 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and pro cedural requirements governing the following: 1. Unit-cost allowances. 2. Testing and inspecting allowances. B. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or syst ems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs rel ated to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
ALLOWANCES 01210 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insura nce, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the co ntingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaini ng in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of Contractor engaging tes ting agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum. C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaini ng in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.8 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased und er an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwis e, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
ALLOWANCES 01210 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Unit-Cost Allowances as detailed by Allowance number below: 1. Unit-Cost Allowance #1: a. 45.00 per square yard for new floor fi nish installed in each resi dential unit. Allowance is for the complete installed system. 6. Unit-Cost Allowance #6: a. Add one (1) Layer of 5/8"gypsum wallboard to existing ceiling of each unit. Include necessary abatement and/or resilient channel installation. 7. Unit-Cost Allowance #7: a. Add Mechanical room housekeeping pad(s). END OF SECTION 01210
ALTERNATES 01230 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or ded ucted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete descripti on of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for mate rials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1: Acoustical Partition Upgrades 1. Base: Wall types as scheduled with no acoustical modifications. 2. Alternate: Addition of various acoustical elements per Drawings A0.3 as selected by unit owners.
ALTERNATES 01230 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Alternate #2: Unit Pavers 1. Base: Colored concrete with medium broom finish, as specified in Section 02768 Decorative Cement Concrete Pavement 2. Alternate: Unit Pavers removed, cleaned and rein stalled in exterior areas as indicated on Civil Drawings and specified in Section 02780. C. Alternate #3: Exterior Wood Siding 1. Base: Cedar per Section 06201. 2. Alternate: Douglas Fir per Section 06201. D. Alternate #4: Asphalt Shingles (Section 07311) 1. Base: CertainTeed Corporation; Independence. 2. Alternate: Owens Corning Co.; Oakridge Pro with 30-year warranty. E. Alternate #5: Interior Wood Soffits 1. Base: Wood soffits per Drawings and section 06201. 2. Alternate: High density polyurethane architectural custom soffits by Spectis Moulders, as detailed in Section 10520. END OF SECTION 01230
CONT R ACT MODIFICATION P R OCEDURES01250 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handlin g and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections: Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery char ges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unfo reseen conditions require m odifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eli minated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, e quipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
CONT R ACT MODIFICATION P R OCEDURES01250 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or forms provided by Owner. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directiv e instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine ch ange in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250
UNIT PRICES 01270 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices related to future unit build-out not under the scope of this contract. B. See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedur es for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appr opriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, in surance, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Install the following drywall: 1. New 8’ high drywall partition including wood studs at 16” on center including finish, texture and 2 coats latex paint. a. $ per lf. 2. Upgrade skip trowel finish to heavy mission style texture. a. $ per sf.
UNIT PRICES 01270 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Install the following fireplace finishes: 1. Stone surround for fireplace (18”w x 5’-0” on both sides and over top of fireplace to underside of mantel): Robinson Brick, thin stone ve neer, Oldmill to mantel height of five feet, per each fireplace; Robinson Brick, thin stone veneer, Kiamichi to mantel height of five feet. a. $ per each fireplace. 2. Fireplace mantel, 8” x 8” x 8’-0” long, stained oak or alder. a. $ per each. 3. Fireplace replacement including flue per specifications. a. $ per each. C. Install the following carpet options with pad: 1. Shaw/Queen, natural Boucle, Rattan (007700), Jute (00701). a. $ per sy. 2. Beaulieu, Ultimate Twist, Beach Pebbles. a. $ per sy. 3. Carpet Pad: Mohawk, 1/2" thick, 8 lb., Rebond. a. $ per sy. D. Install new porcelain tile at entry per the following options: 1. Tivoli Beige, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, #122 Linen grout, set on 45 degree angle for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf 2. Tivoli Noce, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Touchstone Walnut, (4) 2”x2” tiles, #380 Haystack grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf 3. Fusion Amber Red Glazed, Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Perla Queen Red Matte 6” x 6”, #105 Earth grout, set on 45 degree angle for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf 4. Fusion Sandalwood, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Fusion Sandalwood, 2” x 2” on mesh, #135 Mushroom grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional, set square for contemporary. a. $ per sf E. Install the following cabinets and wood trim: 1. Contemporary Cabinets – Select Poplar or similar species, wood finish option 1 AFV (medium honey brown), wood finish option 2 Chateau (med ium/dark brown), flat panel with flat stiles with rails and eased cut edges, wire pull, brushed nickel. a. $ per lf 2. Traditional Cabinets – Knotty Cherry, square raised panel, wood finish option 1 medium cherry, wood finish option 2 dark cherry, hammered knob, finish option 1 oil rubbed bronze, finish option 2 brushed nickel.a. $ per lf
UNIT PRICES 01270 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Contemporary Interior Wood Tri m – Select Poplar or similar species, flat with square edges, wood finish option 1 AFV (medium honey brown), wood finish option 2 Chateau (medium/dark brown). a. Base ½” x 6” - $_ per lf b. Case 5/8” x 3” - $ per lf c. Door Header 1” x 4” (header to extend beyond case by ½”) – d. $ per lf 4. Traditional Interior Wood Trim – Knotty Cherry, base style 623, case style 346, wood finish option 1 medium cherry, wood finish option 2 dark cherry. a. Base ½” x 6 - $ per lf b. Case 5/8” x 3” - $ per lf c. Door Header 1” x 4” (header to extend beyond case by ½”) – d. $ per lf 5. Contemporary Interior Doors – Select Poplar or similar series, 2 panel 2/stile and rail construction, square eased edges, interior flat panel, wood finish option 1 AFV (medium honey brown), wood finish option 2 Chateau (medium/dark brown). a. $ per each 6. Traditional Interior Doors – Knotty Cherry, 2 panel w/ stile and rail construction, traditional raised panel square, wood finish option 1 medium cherry, wood finish option 2 dark cherry. a. $ per each 7. Contemporary Interior Door Lever Handles – Schlage, Avanti, 613 finish a. Privacy $ per each F. Install the following kitchen appliances: 1. Install new range, Whirlpool, GY396LXPB, Slide In, 30 11/16”w x 27”d x 35 5/8” h, black or stainless.a. $ per each 2. Install new microwave, Whirlpool, MH2175XS, 29 7/8”w x 15 7/16”d x 17 ¼”h, black or stainless.a. $ per each 3. Install new dishwasher, Whirlpool, DU1100XTP, 24 1/2”d x 23 7/8”w x 34 1/2”h, black or stainless.a. $ per each G. Install kitchen slab granite per the following options: 1. New Venetian Gold, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $ per sf
UNIT PRICES 01270 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Sucuri, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $ per sf 3. Copper Brown, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $ per sf 4. Golden Fantasy, 3cm thick, eased edge top and bottom, with full height or 6” granite backsplash, upgrade option of ogee edge. a. $_ per sf H. Install bathroom granite vanity counter tops with matching 4” high granite backsplash with eased top and bottom edge: 1. New Venetian Gold, 3cm thick. a. $ per sf 2. Sucuri, 3cm thick. a. $ per sf 3. Copper Brown, 3cm thick a. $ per sf 4. Golden Fantasy, 3cm thick. a. $ per sf I. Install bath floors, tub/shower walls per the following options: 1. Tivoli Beige, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Touchstone Gold, (4) 2” x 2” tiles, #122 Linen grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf 2. Tivoli Noce, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Touchstone Walnut, (4) 2” x 2” tiles, #380 Haystack grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf 3. Fusion Amber Red Glazed, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Perla Queen Red Matte, 6” x 6” tiles, #105 Earth grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf 4. Fusion Sandalwood, Glazed Porcelain Tile, 12.25” x 12.25”, Mosaic Fusi on Sandalwood, 2” x 2” on mesh, #135 Mushroom grout, set on 45 degrees for traditional on floors, set square for contemporary on floors, set square on wall, tile baseboard. a. $ per sf
UNIT PRICES 01270 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado J. Install shower/tub tile wall accent 1. Shabui Mosaic white/autumn, 6” x 12” tiles on mesh backing, #122 Linen grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf 2. Tumbled Natural Stone, Sand/Walnut, 4” x 12” listelle mosaic on mesh backing, #122 Linen grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf 3. Botanical Foliage, 2 rows at eye level for a total of 4” height, 4” x 12”, #380 Haystack grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf 4. Tumbled Natural Stone, Antalya Dark/Sienna Gold/Mediterranean Ivory, 4” x 12” on mesh backing, #380 Haystack grout, install one row of listelle at eye level. a. $ per lf 5. Sandgate Traditional Liner, metallic/Mosaic Perla Red Queen, 1” x 2”, 1” x 12 ½” x 12”, #105 Earth grout, install on mesh backing at eye level Sandgate Traditional Liner on top and bottom of 2 rows Mosaic Perla Red Queen (1” x 2”). a. $ per lf 6. Mosaic Fusion Red Amber/Floral, 2” x 2” metal inset, 2” x 2” on diagonal to 4.5” height, #105 Earth grout, 4.5” row of mosaic on diagonal with 2” x 2” metal inset randomly every 5”. a. $ per lf 7. Tumbled Chevron Deco, 5” x 12” tiles on mesh backing, #135 Mushroom grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf. 8. Dorset Fiddlehead Metal, 3” x 12”, #135 Mushroom grout, install on mesh backing at eye level. a. $ per lf. K. Install shower floor per the following options: 1. Mosaic Touchstone Gold, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. 2. Mosaic Touchstone Walnut, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. 3. Mosaic Fusion Red Amber, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. 4. Mosaic Fusion Sandalwood, 2” x 2” on mesh, #122 Linen grout, set square. a. $ per sf. L. Install undermount kitchen sink and faucet: 1. Sink - Kohler, Undertones – 2 basins, 16 gauge stainless steel. a. $ per each.
UNIT PRICES 01270 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Faucet – Kohler, Forte Single Control Pullout, K-10433. a. $ per each M. Install the following bathroom fixtures: 1. Lavatory – Kohler, Caxton (undermount in slab granite installations), K-2209, vitreous china, white, interior size 15” x 12”. a. $ per each. 2. Bathtub – Kohler, Villager, K-715, K-716, cast iron, white. a. $ per each. 3. Comfort Height Toilet – Kohler, Cimmarron Comfort height, Round, K-3497, toilet seat cachet K- 4689 plastic, material vitreous china, white. a. $ per each. 4. Toilet for use with Banjo Top – Kohler, Rialto, K-3386, toilet seat french curve white K-4663 plastic, vitreous china, white. a. $ per each. N. Install the following bathroom accessories: 1. Robe Hook, Kohler, Forte, K-11275, option 1 brushed nickel, option 2 polished chrome. a. $ per each. 2. Towel Bar, Kohler, Forte, K-11270 or K-11271, option 1 brushed nickel, option 2 polished chrome. a. $ per each. 3. Amenity Glass Shelf, Kohler, Forte, K-11283, option 1 brushed nickel, option 2 polished chrome. a. $ per each. 4. Toilet Tissue Holder, Franklin Brass, Recessed Ti ssue Holder, option 1 stainless steel – Century Collection #5567SF, option 2 polished chrome – Futura Collection #D2497PC. a. $ per each. 5. Mirror, beveled glued on mirror. a. $ per sf. O. Install the following electrical: 1. One duplex outlet including wiring and connection to adjacent outlet. a. $ per each. 2. Replace existing electrical panel with new unit at maximum capacity of existing primary wiring and meter size. a. $ per each. 3. One recessed ceiling can including connection to existing adjacent ceiling power source. a. $ per each.
UNIT PRICES 01270 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Move existing chandelier in dining room up to 4 feet from existing location and cover existing box.a. $ per each. 5. Duplex outlets in above wall, each, at six foot on center. a. $ per lf. 6. Telephone/cable/data port including wiring from closest existing source. a. $ per each. 7. Frame box and provide power and cable access for 60” or less plasma or LCD TV over new fireplace and to side of fireplace on backside of east stair wall, per over fireplace and to side of fireplace. a. $ per each. 8. Hardware for new unit interiors: Schlage F-series, Avanti lever, 613 finish. a. $ per each. END OF SECTION 01270
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES01290 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for adminis trative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basi s for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for subm ittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES01290 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in en ough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Co ordinate with the Pr oject Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under requ ired principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and App lications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Owner’s Representative and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progre ss payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES01290 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets or forms provided by the Owner’s Representative as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original co pies of each Application fo r Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: Refer to Exhib it of Agreement between Owner and Contractor. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from autho rities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment show ing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Subs tantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designat ed portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment w ith releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
PAYMENT PROCEDU R ES01290 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpreta tion or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations in cluded in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required noti ces, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installa tion of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Do cuments or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Cont ract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect, through will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses , and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others invo lved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner an d Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstru ction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner , Architect, and their cons ultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that co uld affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of autho rities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minut es of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the confere nce cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of th e Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly or regular intervals as indicated in Agreement. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve mi nutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minut es of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule ha ve been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regul ar intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to speci fic meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minut es of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined C ontractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined C ontractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to th e schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribu te copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contract or's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contract or shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A or approved Contractor standard Form. 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, de termine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals.
P R OJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION01310 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information alrea dy indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for addition al information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work , Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction log. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedur es" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of pl anning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. H. Major Area: A story of constructi on, a separate building, or a simila r significant construction element. I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpowe r and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect 's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. 1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaq ue copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule , submit three copies of each of the following computer- generated reports. Format for each activity in repo rts shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeed ing activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. G. Daily Construction Log: Submit upon request. H. Material Location Reports: Submit upon request. I. Field Condition Reports: Submit upon request or at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit upon request at time of unusual event. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with req uirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Cons truction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified pe rsonnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, and interim milestones.. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedule s and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each constru ction activity in the network with ot her activities and sch edule them in proper sequence.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arrang ed in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule or network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifica lly authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordina te submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not le ss than seven days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity fo r each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of cons truction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. 8. Other Constraints: <Insert additional constraints not indicated elsewhere.> E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provid e a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedur es" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and dem onstration and training (if ap plicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. 4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizo ntal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Ou tline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensi ve, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 day s of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of constructi on. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duratio n, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. G. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.6 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Logs: Prepare a daily construction logs recording the following information concerning events at Project site, but not limited to: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a stateme nt of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discove ry of a difference betwe en field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed repo rt. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION PROG R ESS DOCUMENTATION01320 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requiremen t to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each m eeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approv ed schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeti ng rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated sche dules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION01322 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative a nd procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Photographs: 1. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image re solution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, commencement of demolition or starting construction, take digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take digital photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and prog ress since last photographs were taken.END OF SECTION 01322
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requir ements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of subm ittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with require ments in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time req uirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submi ttal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit subm ittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 working days for initial rev iew of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is re quired. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 working days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 20 working days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 working days for
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked approved from Architect's action stamp. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of fi nal submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approval from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining c onstruction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of profe ssional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and si milar full-size drawings, sub mit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm ) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed si de of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approve d Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer's colo r charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to , the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of prod uct schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Owner's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements speci fied in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specifi ed in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written su mmary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informationa l Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and cer tifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Compl y with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and ot her information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS form s. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Docu ments and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requ irements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreti ng results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qu alified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Co mply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written in formation documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests an d a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written in formation indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where profes sional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Cont ractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S / ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01330 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. “No Exception Taken”: When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. “Make Corrections Noted”: When the Arch itect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. “Rejected”: When the Architect marks this action, do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, deliv ery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Revise and Resubmit”: When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 5. “Submit Specific Item”: For unspecified subm ittals the Architect will return submittals to the sender and request specific submittals as specified or ma rk this action with one of the two actions above.C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and proc edures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or a nother entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not impl y that requirements specified app ly exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparen tly equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in th e form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual ex perienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experi enced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indi cated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede bu ilding codes and regulations governing the Work.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized represen tative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to insp ect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and exten t to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performa nce and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicate d or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups befo re starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction th at replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified an d those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsib ility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples wi ll be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contra ct Document require ments or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies perform ing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for tes ting and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work or the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to pe rform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of i rregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
QUALITY REQUI R EMENTS01400 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend rest oration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400
REFE R ENCES 01420 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Arch itect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unlo ading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the sam e force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copi es of applicable standards ar e not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
REFE R ENCES 01420 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov (800) 872-2253 (202) 272-0080 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html (888) 293-6498 (202) 512-1530 CRDHandbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil (601) 634-2355 DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 Available from General Services Administration www.fss.gsa.gov (202) 501-1021 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800 FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org (800) 423-6587 (562) 699-0543 MIL(See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 NES (Formerly: National Evaluation Service) (See ICC-ES)
REFE R ENCES 01420 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available fro m Access Boa r d (202) 272-0080 www.access-b oard.gov 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifica tions or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifica tions or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org (202) 862-5100 AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com (216) 241-7333 AABCAssociated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com (202) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org (847) 303-5664 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.transp ortation.org (202) 624-5800 AATCCAmerican Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org (919) 549-8141 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org (202) 367-1155 ACIACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org (248) 848-3700 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org (972) 506-7216 AEICAssociation of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org (205) 257-2530 AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org (800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association www.aga.org (202) 824-7000
REFE R ENCES 01420 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org (703) 548-3118 AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org (202) 872-5955 AIAsphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org (859) 288-4960 AIA American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org (800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org (202) 452-7100 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org (303) 792-9559 ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org (800) 395-2522 (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org (847) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org (202) 293-8020 AOSA Association of Offici al Seed Analysts www.aosaseed.com (505) 522-1437 APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org (253) 565-6600 APA Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org (239) 454-6989 API American Petroleum Institute www.api.org (202) 682-8000 ARIAir-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org (703) 524-8800 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofing.org (202) 207-0917 ASCEAmerican Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300
REFE R ENCES 01420 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org (800) 843-2763 (212) 591-7722 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org (440) 835-3040 ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org (610) 832-9585 AWCI AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org (703) 534-8300 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org (800) 449-8811 (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Prese rvers' Association www.awpa.com (334) 874-9800 AWS American Welding Society www.aws.org (800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association www.awwa.org (800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com (212) 297-2122 BIABrick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org (703) 620-0010 BICSIBICSI www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com (616) 285-3963 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee www.bissc.org (773) 761-4100 Cast Stone Institute www.caststone.org (770) 972-3011 CCCCarpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312
REFE R ENCES 01420 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado CDA www.carpetcushion.org Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEACanadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca/connections_online/home.htm (613) 230-9263 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com (216) 241-7333 CGACompressed Gas Association www.cganet.com (703) 788-2700 CGSB Canadian General Standards Board w3.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (800) 665-2472 (819) 956-0425 CIMACellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org (888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462 CISCACeilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org (630) 584-1919 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (423) 892-0137 CLFMIChain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org (301) 596-2583 CPAComposite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com (301) 670-0604 CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org (800) 510-2772 (202) 462-9607 CRICarpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com (800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200 CSACSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org (800) 689-2900 (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org (604) 820-7700 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org (281) 583-4087 DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010
REFE R ENCES 01420 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Intern ationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Factory Mutual System (Now FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com (407) 671-3772 FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org
REFE R ENCES 01420 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GSI Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org (610) 522-8440 HIHydraulic Institute www.pumps.org (888) 786-7744 (973) 267-9700 HIHydronics Institute www.gamanet.org (908) 464-8200 HMMA Hollow Metal Manufac turers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org (703) 435-2900 HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com (410) 838-6550 IASInternational Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation www.intbadfed.org 441-24 223-4904 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369 ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch 41 22 919 02 11 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org (212) 419-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org (212) 248-5000 IGCCInsulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org (315) 646-2234 IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510 ILIIndiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426 ISO International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch 41 22 749 01 11 ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITSIntertek www.intertek.com (800) 345-3851 (607) 753-6711
REFE R ENCES 01420 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ITU International Telecommunication Union www.itu.int/home 41 22 730 51 11 KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org (703) 264-1690 LMALaminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org (800) 488-6864 (847) 577-7200 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com (216) 241-7333 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org (847) 480-9138 MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org (312) 644-6610 MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org (800) 345-1815 (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com (440) 250-9222 MPI Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com (888) 674-8937 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com (703) 281-6613 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org (312) 332-0405 NACENACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org (281) 228-6200 NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com (202) 737-2926 NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) www.naima.org (703) 684-0084 NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 ext. 453
REFE R ENCES 01420 -10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado NCAA www.nbgqa.com National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org (703) 713-1900 NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org (262) 248-9094 NCTANational Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com (202) 775-3550 NEBBNational Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org (301) 977-3698 NECANational Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org (301) 657-3110 NeLMANortheastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org (207) 829-6901 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org (703) 841-3200 NETAInterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations www.nfhs.org (317) 972-6900 NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) www.nfpa.org (800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org (301) 589-1776 NGA National Glass Association www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org (800) 933-0318 (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association www.nofma.org (901) 526-5016 NRCANational Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net (800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org (888) 846-7622 (301) 587-1400
REFE R ENCES 01420 -11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org (800) 673-6275 (734) 769-8010 NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association www.nssga.org (800) 342-1415 (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com (800) 323-9736 (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPLOmega Point Laboratories, Inc. www.opl.com (800) 966-5253 (210) 635-8100 PCIPrecast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org (312) 786-0300 PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com (800) 332-7322 (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org (800) 589-8956 (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu (217) 333-3929 PTI Post-Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org (602) 870-7540 RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com (301) 340-8580 RIS Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org (888) 225-7339 (415) 382-0662 RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) (Now TRI) SAE SAE International www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org (847) 462-1930 SDI Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org (440) 899-0010
REFE R ENCES 01420 -12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI Structural Engineering Institute www.seinstitute.com (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6195 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org (315) 646-2234 SIA Security Industry Association www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org (843) 626-1995 SMA Screen Manufacturers Association www.smacentral.org (561) 533-0991 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org (703) 803-2980 SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers www.smpte.org (914) 761-1100 SPFA Spray Polyuret hane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org (800) 523-6154 SPIBSouthern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org (850) 434-2611 SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (Now SPFA) SPRI SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org (781) 647-7026 SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com (800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org (877) 281-7772 (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com (847) 438-8265 SWI Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com (216) 241-7333
REFE R ENCES 01420 -13 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org (816) 472-7974 TCATile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com (864) 646-8453 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org (703) 907-7700 TMS The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org (303) 939-9700 TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. www.tpinst.org (608) 833-5900 TPI Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org (800) 405-8873 (847) 705-9898 TRITile Roofing Institute (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org (312) 670-4177 ULUnderwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com (800) 285-4476 (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org (972) 243-3902 USAV USA Volleyball www.usavolleyball.org (888) 786-5539 (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org (202) 828-7422 USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.usitt.org (800) 938-7488 (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org (800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org (800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org (800) 506-4636 (212) 661-4261 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com (800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200
REFE R ENCES 01420 -14 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acrony ms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) CABOCouncil of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org (909) 472-4100 ICBOInternational Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org (800) 423-6587 (562) 699-0543 NES National Evaluation Service (See ICC-ES) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC)D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil
REFE R ENCES 01420 -15 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov (800) 638-2772 (301) 504-6816 DOC Department of Commerce www.commerce.gov (202) 482-2000 DOD Department of Defense www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 DOE Department of Energy www.eren.doe.gov (202) 586-9220 EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov (202) 272-0167 FAA Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov (202) 366-4000 FCC Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov (888) 225-5322 FDA Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov (888) 463-6332 GSA General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (800) 488-3111 (202) 501-1888 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112 LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www.lbl.gov (510) 486-4000 NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov (301) 975-6478 OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321-6742 (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science http://phs.os.dhhs.gov (202) 690-7694 RUSRural Utilities Service (See USDA) (202) 720-9540 SD State Department www.state.gov (202) 647-4000 TRBTransportation Research Board (202) 334-2934
REFE R ENCES 01420 -16 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov (202) 720-2791 USPS Postal Service www.usps.com (202) 268-2000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirem ents" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect , permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agen cies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connec tions and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections. B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148 -inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain- link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-in ch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requiremen ts in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry." E. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. G. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individual s. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall.Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds si zed, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are repl aced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C.Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of co mpleted installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of co mpleted installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with lo cal switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 1. Provide DSL in primary field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following:
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits as approved. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs fo r construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requiremen ts" for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stai rs: Cover finished, permanent st airs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environment al regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and se dimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent fl ooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recom mend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their resi dues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before const ruction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As requir ed to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequat e, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provid e temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.
TEMPO R ARY FACILITIES AND CONT R OLS01500 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a perm anent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical co mpounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT01524 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site impr ovement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award. B. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whethe r organization is tax exempt. C. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whethe r organization is tax exempt. D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT01524 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordinatio n." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials sepa ration and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approv ed by Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a wast e management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT01524 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Ow ner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS01600 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; ma nufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "References" for appli cable industry standard s for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" fo r submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manu facturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in prod ucts, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Document s and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "Basis-of-Design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of ev aluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS01600 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be estab lished early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of co mmencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will incl ude a list of unacceptab le product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requ irements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of prop osed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for complete d projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Constructio n Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS01600 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each re quest for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.a. Form of Approval: As specified in Di vision 1 Section "Sub mittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Ar chitect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that w ill prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamag ed condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure complia nce with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS01600 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elev ated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content re quirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, th at are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS01600 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term “Basis-of-Design” or "or equal" or "or approved equal" or “or approved similar” or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicat e that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or syst em, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Subs titutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product na med. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
P R ODUCT REQUI R EMENTS01600 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work, the Notice to Proceed, or the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensatio n to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other constructio n by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Co ntract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with th ose named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS01700 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coor dination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performa nce of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for subm itting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS01700 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for wo rk related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with require ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing cond itions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by fiel d measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items sh own diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Co ntract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together w ith recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS01700 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor lev els, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviati ons from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties in volved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS01700 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements st rictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, usi ng only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and prot ect construction in prog ress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS01700 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operabi lity without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized serv ice representative is requ ired to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions th at ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective constructio n. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700
CUTTING AND PATCHING01731 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requi rements for cutting and patching. B. The requirements of this section are to govern the removal and reinstallation of any and all finish materials within the course and scope of work as outlined in the Drawings and Section 01100 Summary of Work. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-P enetration Firestop Syst ems" for patching fire-rated construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place const ruction necessary to permit installati on or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations sho wing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
CUTTING AND PATCHING01731 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural element s in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1. Primary operational sy stems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special constr uction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manne r that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, an d repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
CUTTING AND PATCHING01731 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portion s of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as po ssible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diam ond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation re quirements specified in other Sections.
CUTTING AND PATCHING01731 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas a nd extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION01732 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Ma nagement" for disposal of demolished materials. C. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing con struction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and sal vaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. B. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1. Comply with submittal requirements in Di vision 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION01732 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Ce rtified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, an d repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION01732 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings preconstruction photographs preconstruction videotapes and templates. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Di vision 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION01732 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to rem ain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame- cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indi cated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Di vision 1 Section "Constr uction Waste Management."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION01732 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials o ff Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust , dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES01770 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirem ents" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, work manship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES01770 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marre d exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items iden tified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, an d building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES01770 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than dat e of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly seque nce based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-cove red tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local en vironmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
CLOSEOUT P R OCEDURES01770 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770
P R OJECT RECO R D DOCUMENTS01781 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and proce dural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Proced ures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Mainte nance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one co py of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operat ion and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual in stead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar en tity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
P R OJECT RECO R D DOCUMENTS01781 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawin gs, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Dr awings are marked, show cross- reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Transparencies: not required. In lieu of transparencies, provide two copies of full PDF scans of record prints on CD to Architect. 3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD info rmation into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
P R OJECT RECO R D DOCUMENTS01781 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. For each principal product, in dicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by othe r Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each su bmittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Docume nts in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01782 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Emergency manuals. 2. Operation manuals for system s, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and mainte nance of products, material s, and finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for su bmitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" fo r submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific ope ration and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble a nd coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01782 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwis e indicated, organize each manual in to a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of managea ble size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equi pment. If possible, assemble in structions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ri ng, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf bi nders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-cove red tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01782 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawi ngs to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe an d explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in th is Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01782 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-cod ing where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each prod uct, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and method s of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01782 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond informati on, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier an d maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions requir ed for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, an d checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for pr eventive and routine main tenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
OPE R ATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA01782 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emerg ency information indica ting procedur es for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assembl e a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain ma nufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component insta lled. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Pr ocedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782
DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK SPECIFICATIONS FOR LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION VAIL, EAGLE COUNTY, COLORADO February 6, 2012 ENGINEER: Peak Civil Engineering, Inc. 1000 Lions Ridge Loop Vail, Colorado 81657 (970) 476-8644
TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02080 Utility Materials 02230 Site Clearing 02240 Dewatering 02260 Excavation Support and Protection 02300 Earthwork 02370 Erosion Control 02510 Water Distribution 02620 Subdrainage 02630 Storm Drainage 02732 Roadway Base 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02080 - UTILITY MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes the followi ng utility materials and methods to complement other Division 2 Sections: 1.Piping materials and installation instru ctions common to most piping systems. 2.Concrete base construction requirements. 3.Equipment nameplat e data requirements. 4.Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 5.Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 6.Utility piping demolition. 7.Cutting and patching. 8.Touchup painting and finishing. B.Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 2 piping Sections. 1.2PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Materials used should meet or exceed the requirements of the individual utility provider and the Town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, th e most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. B.Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. C.The following are indu stry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1.ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene. 2.CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. 3.PE: Polyethylene. 4.PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For identification materials and devices. B.Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C.Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for me tal and wood supports, and anchorage for utility piping materials and equipment. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado D.Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of utility equipment and materials in relation to other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate whether sequence and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following: 1.Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement. 2.Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. 3.Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance. 4.Equipment and accessory service connections and support details. 5.Building, exterior wall, an d foundation penetrations. 6.Sizes and location of required concrete bases. 7.Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioni ng of large equipment during construction. 8.Floor plans, eleva tions, and details to indicate penetra tions in floors and walls, and their relationship to other penet rations and installations. E.Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating compliance of welding procedures and personnel with requirements specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article of this Section. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B.Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1.Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2.Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualifi cation tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C.Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, lengt h of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. D.Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided su ch proposed equipment is approved in writing and conn ecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. If larger equipment is approved, no additional costs will be approved for these increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-e nd damage and entrance of di rt, debris, and moisture. B.Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside. C.Protect flanges, fittings, and pipin g specialties from moisture and dirt. D.Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.7SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.Coordinate equipment insta llation with other components. B.Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C.Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installa tions of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. D.Coordinate connection of piping systems with ot her exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of authorities ha ving jurisdiction, franch ised service companies, and controlling agencies. E.Coordinate installation of identif ying devices after completing coveri ng and painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A.Refer to individual Division 2 Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B.Pipe Threads: ASME B1.2 0.1 for factory-threaded pi pe and pipe fittings. 2.2JOINING MATERIALS A.Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for special jo ining materials not listed below. B.Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal cond itions of piping system contents. 1.ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a.Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b.Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2.AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless ot herwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C.Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D.Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Ty pe and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E.Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1.Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead content. 2.Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 3.Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc , with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 3
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 4.Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 5.Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content. F.Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1.BCuP Series: Copp er-phosphorus alloys. 2.BAg1: Silver alloy. G.Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H.Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standa rd solvent cements for the following: 1.ABS Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2.CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493. 3.PVC Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4.ABS to PVC Plastic Piping Tran sition: ASTM D 3138. I.Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket. J.Flanged, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts. K.Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricat ed to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes. 1.Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2.Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3.Gaskets: Rubber. 4.Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. 5.Finish: Enamel paint. 2.3PIPING SPECIALTIES A.Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insu lating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion. 1.Description: Combination of copper alloy and fer rous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types; and matching pipi ng system materials. 2.Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3.Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 4.Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 5.Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly; full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gask et, phenolic or PE bo lt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a.Provide separate comp anion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum wo rking pressure as required to suit system pressures. 6.Dielectric Couplings: Galvan ized-steel coupling; with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 4
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 7.Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple; with inert an d noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). B.Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations th rough exterior building walls are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C.Sleeves: The following materials are fo r wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1.Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galva nized, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3.Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated. 4.PVC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 5.PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 6.PE Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup-shaped, smooth outer surface; with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.4IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A.General: Manufacturer's standard products of cat egories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 2 Sections. If more than one type is speci fied for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category. B.Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened to equipment. 1.Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, ca pacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested comp liances, and similar essential data. 2.Location: An accessible and visible location. C.Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with recommendations of ASME A13.1 for pipi ng and similar applications, but at least 1-1/4-inch- (30-mm-) high letters for ductwork and at least 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 1.Material: Fiberboard. 2.Material: Brass. 3.Stencil Paint: Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. 4.Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors. D.Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's st andard preprinted, semirigi d, snap on, color-coded, complying with ASME A13.1. E.Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent -adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1. F.Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded laminated plastic. Comply with the following color-codes: 1.Green: Cold air. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 5
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 2.Yellow: Hot air. 3.Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air. 4.Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air. 5.For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6.Nomenclature: Include the following: a.Direction of airflow. b.Duct service. c.Duct origin. d.Duct destination. e.Design cubic feet/minute (Liters/second). G.Engraved Plastic-Laminat e Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulo se, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Fabricate in sizes required for message. 2.Engraved with engraver's standard letter styl e, of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification. 3.Punch for mechanical fastening. 4.Thickness: 1/16 inch (1 .6 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 5.Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 6.Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200 mm) long; 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units. 7.Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive. H.Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded la minated plastic. Comply with the following color-codes: 1.Green: Cooling equi pment and components. 2.Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3.Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components. 4.Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 5.Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above. 6.For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 7.Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a.Name and plan number. b.Equipment service. c.Design capacity. d.Other design parameters such as pressure dro p, entering and leaving conditions, and revolutions/minute. 8.Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 10 0 mm) for control devi ces, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment. I.Lettering and Graphics: Coor dinate names, abbreviations, and ot her designations used in mechanical identification with correspondin g designations indicated . Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. 1.Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that indicates individual system number and service. 2.5GROUT UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 6
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado A.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 1.Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjus ting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout; nonstaining; noncorrosive; nongaseous; and recommended fo r interior and exterior applications. 2.Design Mix: 5000 psig (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3.Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.General: Install piping as described below, unless pi ping Sections specify othe rwise. Individual Division 2 piping Sections specify unique piping in stallation requirements. B.General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicat e general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated lo cations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansio n, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C.Install piping at indicated slopes. D.Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E.Install piping free of sags and bends. F.Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angl es or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless ot herwise indicated. G.Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. H.Install fittings for changes in d irection and branch connections. I.Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions. J.Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. K.Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic removable sleeves. L.Verify final equipment lo cations for roughing-in. M.Refer to equipment specifications in other Divi sion 2 Sections for ro ughing-in requirements. N.Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping Sections: 1.Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove bu rrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2.Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside pipe and fittings before assembly. 3.Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 4.Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 5.Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 7
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 6.Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."7.Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a.Note internal length of threads in fittings or va lve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe shou ld be threaded into joint. b.Apply appropriate tape or thread compou nd to external pipe th reads, unless dry seal threading is specified. c.Align threads at point of assembly. d.Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into wh ich pipe is being threaded. e.Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with corroded or damaged threads. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 8.Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pi pe," using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 9.Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positio ned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradua lly and uniformly using torque wrench. 10.Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fitti ngs according to the following: a.Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. b.ABS Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. c.CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. d.PVC Plastic, Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672. e.PVC Plastic, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855. f.ABS to PVC Plastic, Nonpressure Transition Fitting s: Procedure and solvent cement according to ASTM D 3138. 11.Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturer's written instructions. a.Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. b.Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. O.Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unle ss otherwise indicated: 1.Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection.2.Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection. 3.Dry Piping Systems: Install di electric unions and flanges to conn ect piping materials of dissimilar metals.4.Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 8
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.2EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conf licts to Owner’s Representative. B.Install equipment level and plumb. C.Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. D.Install equipment giving right of way to piping system s installed at required slope. 3.3LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Incl ude arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1.Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. 2.Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping. 3.Locate pipe markers on exposed pipi ng according to the following: a.Near each valve and control device. b.Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pa ttern is not obvious. c.Near locations if pipes pass through walls or floors, or enter inaccessible enclosures. d.At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e.Near major equipment items and othe r points of origin ation and termination. B.Equipment: Install engraved plas tic-laminate sign or equipment ma rker on or near each major item of equipment. 1.Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) hi gh lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering. 2.Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indi cate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C.Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. 3.4PAINTING AND FINISHING A.Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint. B.Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer. 2.Galvanized-Steel Pipi ng: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel fini sh. Include 2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 9
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Includ e 2 finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer. C.Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish. D.Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finish es with materials and procedures to match ori ginal factory finish. 3.5CONCRETE BASES A.Construct concrete bases of dime nsions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (150 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufact urer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 psig (20.7 MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section, "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.6ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A.Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor utility piping materials and equipment. B.Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 3.7ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A.Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor utility materials and equipment. B.Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C.Attach to substrates as required to support app lied loads. 3.8DEMOLITION A.Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified in Division 2 Sections. B.If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is dama ged or disturbed, remove dam aged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. C.Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe in its entirety. D.Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) beyond face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish. E.Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site. F.Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reins tall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation. UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 10
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 11 3.9CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for utility piping installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B.Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.10GROUTING A.Install nonmetallic, nonshrink grout for equipment-support bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment support plates, and ancho rs. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions. B.Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C.Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D.Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout. E.Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. F.Place grout around anchors. G.Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 02080
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2.Removing trees an d other vegetation. 3.Clearing and grubbing. 4.Topsoil stripping. 5.Removing above-grade site improvements. 6.Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 7.Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. B.Related Sections: Division 2 Section “Earthwork” 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. 1.3MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.Except for materials indicated to be st ockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B.Record drawings according to Di vision 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 1.Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, wal ks, and other adjace nt occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or ot her adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. B.Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indi cated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises as directed by Owner. C.Notify utility locator service for area where Pr oject is located before site clearing. Make notification more than 48 hours prior to beginning work described in this section.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 2.1SOIL MATERIALS A.Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 1.Obtain approved borrow soil materials o ff-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from di sturbance during construction. B.Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C.Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. D.Protect existing site improvements to rem ain from damage du ring construction. 1.Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2TREE PROTECTION A.Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1.Do not store construction materi als, debris, or excavated materi al within drip line of remaining trees.2.Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees. B.Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. C.Where excavation for new construction is required w ithin drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1.Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2.Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in di ameter with emulsifi ed asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4.Cover exposed roots with wet bu rlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D.Repair or replace trees and vegetati on indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1.Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisd iction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2.Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist. 3.3UTILITIES A.Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing when requested by Contractor. 1.Verify that utilities have been disconnected an d capped before pro ceeding with site clearing. B.Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1.Owner will shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. C.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilit ies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to pr ovide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Architect not less than two days in adv ance of proposed utility interruptions. 2.Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. D.Excavate for and remove undergroun d utilities indicated to be removed. E.Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 15 mechanical or Division 16 electrical Sections. 3.4CLEARING AND GRUBBING A.Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other veget ation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructio ns and grubbing roots. 1.Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2.Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3.Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extendi ng to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4.Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B.Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1.Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SITE CLEARING 02230 - 4 3.5TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B.Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, includ ing trash, debris, weeds, r oots, and other waste materials. C.Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent win dblown dust. 1.Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.2.Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3.Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4.Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.6SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B.Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters , and aggregate base as indicated. 1.Unless existing full-dep th joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cu t length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavemen t. Saw-cut faces vertically to full depth. 3.7DISPOSAL A.Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable to psoil, obstructions, demo lished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and le gally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02230
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02240 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes co nstruction dewatering. 1.2PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, in stall, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1.Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not f lood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 2.Prevent surface water from entering exca vations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3.Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation. 4.Remove dewatering system if no longer needed. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings for Information: Fo r dewatering system. Show arra ngement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of headers and di scharge lines; and means of discharge and disposal of water.1.Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monito ring performance of dewatering system. 2.Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise. 3.Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B.Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer. C.Photographs or vi deotape, suffici ently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. D.Record drawings at Project closeout id entifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions performed during dewatering. 1.Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. E.Field Test Reports: Before star ting excavation, submit test results and computations demonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disp osal requirements of au thorities having jurisdiction. DEWATERING 02240 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado B.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Coordination." 1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilit ies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Contractor and then on ly after arranging to provid e temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B.Project-Site Information: A geotec hnical report has been prepared for th is Project and is available for information only. The opinions expr essed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil co nditions, tests, and results of analyses condu cted by geotec hnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interp retations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1.Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering. 2.The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual. C.Survey adjacent structures and improvements, empl oying a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1.During dewatering, regularly resurvey be nchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Contractor if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1.Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from f looding site and surrounding area. 2.Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. B.Install dewatering system to ensure minimum inte rference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or ot her adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having ju risdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install dewatering system utilizi ng wells, well points, or similar me thods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pum ps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls. DEWATERING 02240 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado DEWATERING 02240 - 3 B.Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures ha ve been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until de watering is no longer required. C.Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavatio n, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrad es. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1.Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to lo ss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability. D.Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foun dations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1.Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) below surface of excavation. E.Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner th at avoids endangering p ublic health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimenta tion tanks, and other flow-c ontrol devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F.Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immed iate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of syst em becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1.Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minim um of 36 inches (900 mm) below overlying construction. G.Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. 3.3OBSERVATION WELLS A.Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or piezometers indicated and additional observation wells as may be requ ired by authorities having jurisdiction. B.Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometr ic water levels in observation wells. C.Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not functioning properly until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove wa ter from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly. 1.Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed. END OF SECTION 02240
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.This Section includes excavation suppor t and protection systems. B.Related Section: Division 2 Section "E arthwork" for excavatin g and backfilling. 1.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Design, provide, monitor, and maintain an anchored and braced excavation support and protection system capable of resisting soil and hyd rostatic pressure and supporting sidewalls of excavations. 1.Work includes removing excavation support and protection systems when no longer needed. 2.Prevent surface water from entering exca vations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3.Install excavation support and protection syst ems without damaging existing buildings, pave-ments, and other improvements adjacent to excavation. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Submittals not required for typical open-cut excavations, provided that these excavations meet require-ments of authority having jurisdiction. 1.Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qua lified professional engineer for ex-cavation support and protection systems. Syst em design and calculations must be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and expe rience. Include lists of completed pr ojects with project names and ad-dresses, names and addresses of architects an d owners, and other inf ormation specified. 3.Photographs or videotape, sufficiently deta iled, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by excavation support and protection systems. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and per-form work of this Section who has specialized in in stalling excavation support and protection systems similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A profession al engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services for de-signing excavation support and protection systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 1.Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or supervise the preparation of data for the excavation support and protection system in cluding drawings and com-prehensive engineering analysis that shows the system's compliance with specified requirements. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Existing Utilities: Do no t interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado B.Project Site Information: A geotechni cal report has been prepared for this Project and is available for in-formation only. The report is not part of the Contract Documents. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of the subsoil conditions, tests, and re-sults of analyses conducted by the ge otechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpreta-tions or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. 1.Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations as necessary. 2.The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. C.Survey adjacent structures and improvements, emplo ying a qualified professional engineer or surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1.During installation of excavation support an d protection systems, reg ularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Owner’s Representative if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Materials need not be new but must be in serviceable condition. B.Structural Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M). C.Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328 (ASTM A 328M) or ASTM A 572 (ASTM A 572M) D.Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nomin al rough thickness of 3 inches (75 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, was hout, and other hazards that coul d develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1.Shore, support, and pr otect utilities encountered. B.Install excavation support and pr otection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or othe r adjacent occupied or used facilities without per-mission from Owner’s Repr esentative and autho rities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. C.Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. D.Monitor excavation support and protection system s daily during excavation pr ogress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E.Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities cause d by installing excavation support and protection sys-tems. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 3 3.02SOLDIER BEAMS AND LAGGING A.Install steel soldier piles before stating excavation. Space soldier piles at intervals indicated. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B.Install wood lagging within flanges of sold ier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behi nd lagging with so il, and compact. C.Install wales horizontally at centers indi cated and secure to soldier piles. 3.03SHEET PILING A.Install one-piece sheet piling and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elev ation at top of excavation. 3.04TIEBACKS A.Tiebacks: Drill for, install, tension, and grout tiebacks into position. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 3.05BRACING A.Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing co nstruction, and other permanent work. If nec-essary to move a brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1.Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, unless otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative. 2.Install internal bracing, if required, to preven t spreading or distortio n of braced frames. 3.Maintain bracing until structural elements are suppo rted by other bracing or until permanent con-struction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.06REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A.Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to sup-port excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stage s to avoid distur bing underlying soils and damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1.Remove excavation support and protection sy stems to a minimum depth as recommended by the Civil Engineer below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2.Repair or replace, as approved by Owner’s Representative, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. END OF SECTION 02260
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2.Excavating and backfilling for building s and structures. 3.Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4.Sub-base course for concret e walks and pavements. 5.Base course for concrete paving. 6.Subsurface drainage back fill for walls and trenches. 7.Excavating and backfilling tr enches within building lines. 8.Excavating and backfilling trenches for bu ried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 9.Rock excavation. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1.Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2.Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B.Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavat ed subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C.Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. D.Drainage Course: Layer suppo rting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. E.Excavation: Removal of material enc ountered above subgrade elevations. 1.Additional Excavation: Excavation below su bgrade elevations as di rected by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2.Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width. 3.Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below su bgrade elevations or bey ond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. F.Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G.Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratif ied masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot in Architect’s opinio n be removed by rock excavating equi pment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic dr illing, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: EARTHWORK 02300 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, short-tip-radius ro ck bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25,000 lb f and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf; measured according to SAE J-1179. 2.Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000-lbf breako ut force; measured according to SAE J-732. H.Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratif ied masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that wh en tested by an independe nt geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches. I.Structures: Buildings, fo otings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-m ade stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.J.Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drai nage fill, or topsoil materials. K.Utilities include on-site underground pipes, co nduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For the following: 1.Each type of plastic warning tape. 2.Drainage fabric. 3.Separation fabric. B.Samples: For the following: 1.30-lb samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from on-site or borrow sources. 2.12-by-12-inch sample of drainage fabric. 3.12-by-12-inch sample of separation fabric. C.Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of th e following with requ irements indicated: 1.Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2.Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 3.Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-d efinition testing, as docu mented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. EARTHWORK 02300 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado B.Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Proj ect site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilit ies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide tem porary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Architect not less than two days in adv ance of proposed utility interruptions. 2.Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3.Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B.Demolish and completely remove fro m site existing underground utilit ies indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1SOIL MATERIALS A.General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B.Satisfactory Soils: As approved by th e Soil’s Engineer for intended use and specifically for the required location or purpose, reference the Geotechnical report prepared by Koechlein Cons ulting Engineers, Inc. on December 2005 per ASTM D 698. C.Foundation Wall Back fill: On site soil materials as approved by the Soil’s Engineer. D.Over-excavation and Recommendation Zone: As sp ecified for structural fill E.Drainage Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixt ure of natural or crus hed gravel, crushed stone, reasonably uniform size, with maximum size of 1.5 inches and not more than 5% passing a No. 200 sieve, as acceptable to the Soils Engineer. F.Bedding: The pipe shall be carefully bedded as show n in the bedding details. Provide Class “B” minimum bedding for PVC sanitary sewer pipe Class “C” minimum be dding for all other pipe except for ductile iron water pipe 1.Class B Bedding (Granular Foundation): Defined as th e method of bedding in which the pipe is set on compacted granular mate rial supporting the lowe r ½ of the pipe barrel. a.Compacted Granular Material: Shall be a well graded gravelly material meeting the following requirements and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent Weight by passing Type I Square Mesh Sieves Type II 3”-90-100 1.5” --0.75” -20-90 0.375” 100 -EARTHWORK 02300 - 3
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado #495-100 0-20 #16 45-80 -#50 10-30 -#100 2-10 - #200 0-2 0-3- 2.Class C Bedding (Granular Foundation): Defined as th e method of bedding in which the pipe is set on compacted granular material supporting the lo wer quadrant of the pi pe barrel using uniform graded material as specified below .U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent Weight by passing Type I Square Mesh Sieves Type II 3”-90-100 1.5” --0.75” -20-90 0.375” 100 -#495-100 0-20 #16 45-80 -#50 10-30 -#100 2-10 - #200 0-2 0-3 3.Ductile Iron Pipe Bedding: Provide either well graded sand as specified below or squeegee sand as specified below a.Well Graded Sand U.S. Standard Sieve Size Total Passing Weight by Percent 3/8” 100 No 4 70-100 No 8 36-93 No 16 20-80 No. 30 8-65 No. 50 2-30 No. 100 1-10 No. 200 0-3 b.Well Graded Sand U.S. Standard Sieve Size Total Passing Weight by Percent 3/8” 100 No. 200 0-3 2.2ACCESSORIES A.Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant po lyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detecto r when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: EARTHWORK 02300 - 4
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Red: Electric. 2.Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3.Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4.Blue: Water systems. 5.Green: Sewer systems. B.Geotextile Fabric: As shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B.Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C.Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2DEWATERING A.Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surro unding area. B.Protect subgrades from softening, u ndermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2.Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until de watering is no longer required. 3.3EXPLOSIVES A.Explosives: Do not use explosives. B.Unclassified Excavation: All excavation is to be considere d “unclassified” when using heavy duty earth-moving equipment except wh ere rock is encountered at utility trenches (either inside or outside of building line) C.Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as rock excavation. 1.Intermittent drilling or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will classified as unclassified excavation. D.Rock Payment lines are limited to the following:. 1.In pipe trenches, 6” below invert elevation of pipe and 2’ wider than inside perimeter of pipe but not less than 3’ minimum trench width. 2.Assume no rock excavation is required for the work. If rock excavation is required at utility trenches, such work will be paid in accordance with provisions relative to changes in the work and will paid on the basis of bid unit prices. EARTHWORK 02300 - 5
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.4EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.Excavate to indicated elevations a nd dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing an d removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other c onstruction, and for inspections. 1.Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2.Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated w ithin a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.Over excavation and Recompaction Zone: Over-excavate existing soils from all areas of the over excavation and replacement zone as defined in subsection 2.1C, for the interior and exterior slabs-on-grades, ramps and accessible walks adjacent to the building, to a minimum depth of 4’ below bottom elevations of the slabs-on-grad e. Moisture condition and reco mpact per the requirements of this sections. 3.5EXCAVATION FOR WA LKS AND PAVEMENTS A.Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.6EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A.Excavate trenches to indicated gra dients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1.Beyond building perimeter, ex cavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B.Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls ver tically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Clearance: 12 inches on each side of pipe or conduit or as shown on drawings. C.Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1.Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.7APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A.Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B.If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1.Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C.Proof roll subgrade with h eavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. EARTHWORK 02300 - 6
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado D.Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.8UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A.Fill unauthorized excavation unde r foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top el evation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1.Fill unauthorized excavations unde r other construction or utilit y pipe as directed by Architect. 3.9STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A.Stockpile borrow materi als and satisfactory excavated soil material s. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excav ations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10BACKFILL A.Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1.Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing , waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2.Surveying locations of und erground utilities for record documents. 3.Inspecting and testi ng underground utilities. 4.Removing concrete formwork. 5.Removing trash and debris. 6.Removing temporary shori ng and bracing , and sheeting. 7.Installing permanent or temporary horizont al bracing on horizontally supported walls. B.Backfill Placement: 1.At areas not subject to stru ctural loads, provide unclassified backfill around structures beyond 5’ from foundation wall and for embankments and la ndscape areas with top 6” being topsoil stockpiled on site 2.For Foundation wall backfill within 5’ of the building line, use over-excavated moisture conditioned and recompacted soil. 3.Under walks, steps and pavements beyond 5’ from the building line, use unclassified backfill or borrow material where additional fill is required. Under walks, steps and pavements within 5’ of building line, use over-excavated moisture conditioned and recompacted soil. 3.11UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A.Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, join ts, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B.Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. EARTHWORK 02300 - 7
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado C.Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch or bedding material as shown on the details and required by the Owner, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1.Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damag e or displacement of utility system. D.Coordinate backfillin g with utilities testing. E.Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. F.Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. G.Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches be low finished grade, ex cept 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.12FILL A.Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1.Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and pe rimeter insulation. 2.Surveying locations of und erground utilities for Reco rd Documents. 3.Testing and insp ecting underground utilities. 4.Removing concrete formwork. 5.Removing trash and debris. 6.Removing temporary shori ng and bracing , and sheeting. 7.Installing permanent or temporary horizont al bracing on horizontally supported walls. B.Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13MOISTURE CONTROL A.Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within optimum as determine d by ASTM D698 as follows: Over-excavation/Recompaction Zone a. Under interior slabs-on-grades b Under exterior slab-on-grade ADA ramp and accessible walks immediately adjacent east and south of the building. +2 to +4 Upto 5’ Beyond Building under pavements, Walks, Steps and Strutures not included in the Over-Excavation and Replacement Zones. -1 to +3 Foundation Backfill: Non-Structural Areas -3 to +3 1.Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2.Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. EARTHWORK 02300 - 8
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.14COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A.Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B.Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C.Compact soil to not less than the following percentag es of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: D.Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698: 1.Under structures, build ing slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2.Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3.Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inch es (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4.For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.15GRADING A.General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1.Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2.Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B.Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations with in the following tolerances: 1.Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2.Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch to ½ inch. 3.Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C.Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.16DRAINAGE COURSE A.Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1.Compact drainage course to required cross secti ons and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2.When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 3.When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.17FIELD QUALITY CONTROL EARTHWORK 02300 - 9
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado A.Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified indep endent geotechnical engin eering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B.Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously comp leted work comply with requirements. C.Footing Subgrade: At footing su bgrades, at least one test of each so il stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of su bgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D.Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, ASTM D1557, ASTM D6 98, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1.Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved ar ea or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.2.Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3.Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer and every 2’ above top of pipe, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. E.When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified comp action is obtained. 3.18PROTECTION A.Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B.Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C.Where settling occurs befo re Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstru ct surfacing. 1.Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.19DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. B.Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. EARTHWORK 02300 - 10
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado EARTHWORK 02300 - 11 1.Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02370 - SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Temporary measures needed to control erosio n and water pollution by use of berms, dikes, darns, sediment basins and/or traps, geotextiles, stone checks, hay bales, silt fences, surface roughing, mats and nets, aggregate, mulch, grasses, slope drains, and other approved measures at the locations necessary to control erosion and water pollution. Coordinate temporary pollution controls wi th the permanent erosion control features specified and with Stormwater Management Plan provided by the Owner. B. Related Work: 1.Site Clearing: Section 02110 2.Drainage Structures, Pipe s, and Fittings: Section 02430 3.Earthwork: Section 02200 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requeste d, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Silt Fence 2. Jute Netting PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure (%) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (lbs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified) Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 US Sieve CW-02215 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability (%) 90 ASTM-G-26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minim um of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be stand ard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 per linear foot. C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fe ncing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6” mesh opening , or as approved. SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above method providing the un it is installed per manufacturer’s instructions. 2.02 JUTE NETTING A. Heavy-woven jute mesh of a rugged construction. Made of undyed and unbleached, twisted jute fibers, having smolde r resistant treatment. Provid e in rolls 225’ by 4’ wide containing 100 square yards wei ghing approximately 90 pounds. 2.03 VEHICLE TRACKING GRAVEL A. Provide gravel (2” crushed screened rock) suitable for cont rolling dirt and debris from leaving the site at lo cations as shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%. Discharge on existing vegetated slope alternately to avoid erosion. 3.02 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets , across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bi nd straw bales with nylon or bailing wire, not twine. Anchor bales to gro und with two posts per bale. 3.03 JUTE NETTING Start jute roll at top of slope or channel and unroll down grade. Lay second strip parallel to first and allow 2” overlap. Bury top end of roll in tren ch, minimum 4” deep. Anchor jute roll to earth surface with stakes of 8 gauge steel, 8” long, approximately 12” apart. Staple outside edges 4’ to 10’ apart and along overlap edges. Overlap end rolls by 4” and anchor securely. 3.04 VEHICLE TRACKING GRAVEL Install 2” crushed screened rock to not less than 6” in depth over the area indicated for access to the site with length and width as required, length not less than 50 feet. Filter cloth shall be placed over the entire area prior to placement of stone. 3.05 CHECK DAMS Install bottom of check dam at least 6” below depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6” above maximum design water depth. Install ma terials in accordance with drawings. 3.06 FILTER BERMS/SEDIMENT POND Field construct berms as directed by Engineer. Place washed 1” to 1-1/2” aggregate with 2’ top and 3:1 side slopes extending to bottom of channel . Berm to retain sediments by retarding and filtering runoff. Place sand on face of berm for future replacement of filter material. Construct in accordance with drawings. 3.07 SILT FENCE Install silt fence in acco rdance with drawings. SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370 - 3 3.08 MAINTENANCE Maintain, repair, and supplement all slope prot ection and erosion control measures as stated in all applicable permits and as directed by the Owner. END SECTION 02370
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside th e building for the following: 1.Water services. 2.Fire-service mains. 3.Combined water service and fire-service mains. 4.Aboveground water piping for appli cations other than water-service piping. B.Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation. C.Related Sections 1.Division 2 Section “Earthwork.” 2.Division 2 Section “Concrete Paving.” 3.Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.” 4.Division 15 Section “Plumbing Systems.” 1.2PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Materials and methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District and the Town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the more restrictive requirements shall govern. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.Fire-Service Main: Exterior fire-suppression-water piping. B.Fire-Suppression-Water Piping: Interior fire-suppression-water piping. C.Water-Distribution Piping: Interi or domestic-water piping. D.Water Service: Exterior domestic-water piping. E.The following are industry abbre viations for plastic materials: 1.PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic. 2.PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3.PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic. 4.PP: Polypropylene plastic. 5.PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 6.RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings. 7.RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe. 1.4SUBMITTALS WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado A.Product Data: For the following: 1.Piping specialties. B.Coordination Drawings: For pipi ng and specialties including relation to other services in same area. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locati ons, and elevations. C.Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contr actor. Submit pressure and leakage reports, from chlorination and bacteriologic acceptance tests D.Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in em ergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to item s specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: 1.Valves. 2.Backflow preventers. 3.Protective enclosures. 4.Drinking fountains. E.Record drawings: At project close out, submit record drawings of insta lled water system piping and production in accordance w/ Division 1 requirements. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer’s qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with water works similar to that required for project. B.Product Options: Drawings i ndicate size, profiles, and dimensi onal requirements of piping and specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C.Regulatory Requirements: 1.Comply with requirements of utility comp any supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 2.Comply with standards of authorities havi ng jurisdiction for potab le-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 3.Comply with standards of authorities hav ing jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose th reads, installation, and testing. D.Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. E.Comply with FM's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Prot ection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products. F.NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve supervision for fire-service-main pi ping for fire suppression. G.NSF Compliance: 1.Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water. 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Preparation for Transport: Prepare valv es, according to the following: WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2.Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3.Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B.During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following: 1.Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; th en reinstall for storage. 2.Protect from weather. Store indoors and mainta in temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. C.Handling: Use sling to handle val ves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use ha ndwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. D.Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Main tain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. E.Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt . Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F.Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. G.Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilit ies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to pr ovide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Architect not less than two days in adv ance of proposed utility interruptions. 2.Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 1.8COORDINATION A.Coordinate connection to water main with Eagle River Wat er and Sanitation District. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where subparag raph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.a.American Cast iron Pipe b.Griffen Pipe Products Company c.Pacific States d.U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 3
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2PIPING MATERIALS A.Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A.Push-on-Joint, Du ctile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pr essure 150psi, Class 50, minimum wall thickness of 0.25, cement mortar lining, seal casted AWWA C104,with push-on -joint, bell- and plain-spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1.Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a.Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. B.Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iro n glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. C.Ductile-Iron or Cast-iron Deflection Fittings: Compou nd, ductile-iron or cast-iron fitting complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. All fittings cement mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bitu minous outside coatin g one mil thick. Rating of 250psi with mechanical or push joint. 2.4COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A.Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, wate r tube, annealed temper, w ith flared connections. 1.Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. B.Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 15 0, with solder -joint end. Furnish Class 30 0 flanges if required to match piping. C.Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, he xagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 2.5JOINING MATERIALS A.Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for commonly used joining materials. B.Transition Couplings: 1.Underground Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, pipi ng to be joined. 2.Aboveground Piping: Pipe fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. C.Soldering Flux: ASTM B 813, water-flushable type. D.Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, lead-free type with 0.20 percent maximum lead content. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 4
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.6PIPING SPECIALTIES A.Flexible Connectors: 1.Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with b ronze wire braid; with copper-tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose. 2.Ferrous Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wi re braid; with ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16 .5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose. 2.7CORROSION-PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A.Encasement for Underground Metal Pi ping: AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008-inch minimum thickness, tube. 2.8HOSE-CONNECTION, BACKFLOW-PREVENTION DEVICES A.General: ASSE standard, nonremova ble-type, backflow-preve ntion devices with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. B.Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with manual drain feature. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze. C.Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suita ble for at least 3-gpm flow and applications with up to 10-foot head of water back pressure. Include two check valves and intermediate atmospheric vent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EARTHWORK A.Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenchin g, and backfilling. 3.2PIPING APPLICATIONS A.General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. B.Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C.Do not use flanges, unions, or keyed couplings for underground piping. D.Flanges, unions, keyed coup lings, and special fittings may be used , instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. E.Underground Water-Service Piping : Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1.NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought-copper fittings; and soldered joints. 2.NPS 5 and NPS 6): Use NPS 6 (DN 150) ductile-iron , push-on-joint pipe ; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 5
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.3JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction. B.Make pipe joints according to the following: 1.Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Wate r-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 2.Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 3.Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters co mpatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pr essure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.4PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for piping-system common requirements. 3.5PIPING INSTALLATION A.Water-Main Connection: Arrange with u tility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main. B.Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation. 1.Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. C.Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." D.Bury piping with depth of c over over top at least 54 inches. E.Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1.Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water piping systems when those systems are installed. F.Install underground piping with restrained joints at ho rizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. G.Anchor service-entry piping to building wall. H.See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building. I.See Division 13 Sections for fire-suppre ssion water piping inside the building. J.Install trap below frost line on drain outlet of each drinking fountain. 3.6ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A.Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 6
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B.Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.7CONNECTIONS A.Piping installation requirement s are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. Pothole ahead of wo rk to Electrician exact horizontal and vertical location of existing utilities at planned connections points. Notify Engin eer of conflicts. B.Connect water-distribution pip ing to existing water service and new fire service line per Eagle River Water and Sanitation District requirements. C.Connect water-distr ibution piping to interior domestic-w ater and fire-suppression piping. 3.8FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B.Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1.Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test un til leakage is within allowed limits. C.Prepare reports of testing activities. 3.9IDENTIFICATION A.Install continuous underground detectable warning tape du ring backfilling of trench for underground water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for underground warning tapes. 3.10CLEANING A.Clean and disinfect water-distr ibution piping as follows: 1.Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2.Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authoriti es having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of fire service line piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 7
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 8 3.Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by author ities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: a.Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b.Drain system or part of system of previous so lution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. c.After standing time, flush system with clean, pot able water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. d.Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having ju risdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. B.Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C.After completing drinking fountain in stallation, inspect unit. Remove pain t splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged fini sh to match original finish. END OF SECTION 02510
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes subdraina ge systems for the following: 1.Foundations. 2.Underslab areas. 3.Retaining walls. 4.Landscaped areas. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene. B.HDPE: High-density polyethylene. C.PE: Polyethylene. D.PP: Polypropylene. E.PS: Polystyrene. F.PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For drainage conduit, drainage panels, and geotextile fabrics. 1.Perforated pipe. 2.Solid pipe. 3.Pipe with open joints. 4.Drainage conduits. 5.Drainage panels. 6.Geotextile fabrics. 1.4COORDINATION A.Drainage panel materials and installation shall be co mpatible with dampproofing and waterproofing of walls below grade. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where subparag raph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Wo rk include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.2.2PIPING MATERIALS A.Refer to various application articles in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3UNDERSLAB HEADERS A.ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751. 1.Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2.Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. B.Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes, hu b-and-spigot ends, gray, for gasketed joints. 1.Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe. C.PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrug ated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1.Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. D.PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, co rrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1.Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. E.PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 , bell-and-spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1.Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.4DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS A.Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405, corrugated, for coupled joints. 1.Couplings: Manufactur er's standard, band type. B.Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 667, corrugated, for coupled joints. 1.Couplings: Manufactur er's standard, band type. C.Perforated, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado D.Perforated, Clay Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 700, Standard-Strength and Extra-Strength classes, unglazed, socket-and-spigot ends, for closed joints. 1.Gaskets: ASTM C 425, rubber. E.Perforated, Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 444/C 444M, Type 1, and applicable requirements of ASTM C 14/C 14M, Class 2, socket-and-spigot fittings. 1.Gaskets: ASTM C 443/C 443M, rubber. F.Clay Drain Tile: ASTM C 4; Standard, Extr a-Quality, and Heavy-Duty classes, for open joints. G.Concrete Drain Tile: ASTM C 412/C 412M; Stan dard-Quality; Extra-Quality; an d Heavy-Duty, Extra-Quality classes, for open joints. H.Open-Joint Screening: ASTM D 226, T ype I, asphalt-saturated roofing felt. I.Open-Joint Screening: ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated roofing felt. J.Open-Joint Screening: Copper-mesh screening. K.Open-Joint Screening: Corrosion-resi stant metal clips made for this application. L.Open-Joint Screening: Woven geotex tile filter fabric, for a minimum total weight of 3 oz./sq. yd. (0.10 kg/sq. m). 2.5SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS A.Description: ASTM C 1173. Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. 2.6CLEANOUTS A.Cast-Iron Pipe: ASME A112.36.2M; with rou nd-flanged, cast-iron housi ng; and secured, scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug. B.PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034 , PVC cleanout threaded plug and thr eaded pipe hub. 2.7DRAINAGE CONDUIT A.Pipe and Fittings: Perforated and corrugated, mo lded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350, with fittings and geotex tile filter fabric jacket. 1.Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick with a minimum flow rate of 30 gpm per foot (62 L/s per 1000 mm). 2.Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick with a minimum flow rate of 45 gpm per foot (93 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3.Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection. 4.Couplings: Corrugated HDPE band. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 3
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado B.Pipe and Fittings: Perforated, molded from HDP E complying with ASTM D 1248 into shape of interconnected corrugated pipes, with fittings and geotextile filter fabric jacket. 1.Size: 6 inches (152 mm) high by approximately 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) thick with a flow rate of 15 gpm per foot (3.1 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 2.Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) thick with a flow rate of 30 gpm per foot (6.2 L/s per 1000 mm ) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3.Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 3-3/4 inches (95 mm) thick with a flow rate of 45 gpm per foot (9.3 L/s per 1000 mm ) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 4.Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection. 5.Couplings: HDPE. C.Pipe and Fittings: Perforated, smooth PVC co mplying with ASTM D 4216 and ASTM D 2729. 1.Size: 8 inches (203 mm) high by approximately 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) thick with a minimum flow rate equal to NPS 4 (DN 100) pipe. 2.Fittings: PVC with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet connection. 3.Couplings: PVC. 2.8MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, manufacturers offer ing products that may be incorporated into th e Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.American Wick Drain Corporation. 2.Grace, W. R. & Co.; Co nstruction Products Div. 3.GREENSTREAK/Western Textile Products. 4.Ling Industrial Fabrics, Inc. 5.TC Mirafi. B.Molded-sheet drainage panels are specified in va rious Division 7 waterproofing Sections. C.Description: Prefabricated, composite panels, 36 to 60 inches (915 to 1525 mm) wide, and manufactured with geotextile facing laminated to molded-plastic drainage core. D.Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, no nbiodegradable, molded PP or PS. 1.Minimum Compressive Strength: 15,0 00 lbf/sq. ft. (718 kPa)] [18,000 lbf/sq. ft. (862 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 1621. 2.Minimum Flow Rate: 7 gpm per foot (87 L/min. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 0.1 and compressive stress of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. E.Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation great er than 50 percent; co mplying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: 1.Survivability: Class 2. 2.Apparent Opening Size: No . 60 (0.25-mm) sieve, maximum. 3.Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum. F.Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; co mplying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 4
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Survivability: Class 2. 2.Apparent Opening Size: No . 60 (0.25-mm) sieve, maximum. 3.Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum. G.Film Backing: Polymeric film bonded to drainage core surface. 2.9FABRIC DRAINAGE PANELS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, manufacturers offer ing products that may be incorporated into th e Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Akzo Nobel Geosynthetics Co. 2.GSE Lining Technology, Inc. 3.JDR Enterprises, Inc. 4.Strata Systems, Inc. 5.Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. B.Description: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, made with drainage core and filter fabric, for use as part of foundation, and re taining-wall dr ainage system. C.Drainage Core: Open-construction, resilient, 0.8-inch- (20-mm-) thick , nylon-filament mesh. 1.Minimum Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm per foot (30 L/mi n. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 3600 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. D.Drainage Core: 3-dimensional, PE strand, 0.25-inch- (6.3-mm-) thick, nonwoven net. 1.Minimum Flow Rate: 5 gpm per foot (62 L/min. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 3600 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. E.Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm per sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 2.10INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, manufacturers offer ing products that may be incorporated into th e Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, prov ide products by one of the following: 1.Diversifoam Products. 2.Dow Chemical Company (The). 3.Owens Corning. 4.Tenneco Building Products. C.Insulation drainage panels are specified in various Division 7 waterproofing Sections. D.Description: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation co mplying with ASTM C 578; fabricated with shiplap or tongue-and-groove edges and with on e side having grooved drainage channels, faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 5
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density a nd 25-psig (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2.11SOIL MATERIALS A.Impervious Fill: Clay, grav el, and sand mixture. B.Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly gr aded mixture of crus hed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No . 57, with 100 percent passing 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.12ROOFING FELTS A.ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated roofing felt. B.ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated roofing felt. 2.13GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS A.Woven or nonwoven geotex tile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow rates range from 110 to 330 gpm per sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. Available styles are flat and sock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. B.If subdrainage is required for lands caping, locate and mark existing utilities, undergroun d structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning inst allation and avoid disruptio n and damage of services. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2EARTHWORK A.Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.3SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping: 1.Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, co uplings, and coupled joints. 2.Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. 3.Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strengt h class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4.Clay drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints. 5.Concrete drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 6
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado B.NPS 6 (DN 150) Piping: 1.Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, co uplings, and coupled joints. 2.Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strengt h class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.Clay drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints. 4.Concrete drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints. C.NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping: 1.Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strengt h class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2.Clay drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints. 3.Concrete drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints. 3.4UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping: 1.Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, co uplings, and coupled joints. 2.Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. 3.Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strengt h class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4.Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. B.NPS 6 (DN 150) Piping: 1.Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, co uplings, and coupled joints. 2.Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. 3.Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strengt h class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4.Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. C.NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping: 1.Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strengt h class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2.Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 3.5UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYST EM HEADER APPLICATIONS A.NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) Piping: 1.ABS pipe and fittings, coupl ings, and coupled joints. 2.Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and ga sketed joints. 3.PE drainage tubing and fitting s, couplings, an d coupled joints. 4.PVC sewer pipe and fittings, coup lings, and coupled joints. B.NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping: 1.ABS pipe and fittings, coupl ings, and coupled joints. 2.Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and ga sketed joints. 3.PE drainage tubing and fitting s, couplings, an d coupled joints. 4.PVC sewer pipe and fittings, coup lings, and coupled joints. C.NPS 12 (DN 300) Piping: 1.ABS pipe and fittings, coupl ings, and coupled joints. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 7
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 2.Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and ga sketed joints. 3.PE drainage tubing and fitting s, couplings, an d coupled joints. 4.PVC sewer pipe and fittings, coup lings, and coupled joints. D.NPS 15 (DN 375) Piping: 1.Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and ga sketed joints. 2.PE drainage tubing and fitting s, couplings, an d coupled joints. 3.PVC sewer pipe and fittings, coup lings, and coupled joints. 3.6IDENTIFICATION A.Materials and their installation are specified in Divisi on 2 Section "Earthwork ." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 1.Install warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2.Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.7FOUNDATION DRAI NAGE INSTALLATION A.Bottom Impervious Fill: Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and comp act impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide. B.Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drai nage fill to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. Aft er satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed. 1.Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filt er fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. 2.Encase pipe with sock-style geot extile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. 3.After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). C.Install vertical drainage panel as follows: 1.Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2.Lay perforated, PE or PVC drai nage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this Specification. Do not install aggregate. 3.Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width. 4.Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 5.Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. 6.Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beg inning of pipe. Place core side of panel against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product cylinders to attach panel to wall. Place nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below t op of panel, approximat ely 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Some manufacturers use const ruction adhesives, metal stick pi ns, or double-sided tape. Do not penetrate waterproofi ng. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 8
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 7.If another panel is required on the same row, cu t away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core and wrap fabric over new panel. 8.If additional rows of panel are required, overla p lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric. 9.Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade. 10.For inside corners, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for overlap. 11.Do not use drainage panels as protection over waterproof memb rane, unless otherwise approved by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. D.Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish elevations and slope away from building. 3.8UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A.Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgra de material has been comp acted, but before drainage fill has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B.Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage pipi ng, add drainage fill to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping with drainage fill to elevation of botto m of slab and compact drainage material. 1.Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filt er fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. 2.Encase pipe with sock-style geot extile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. C.Install horizontal drainage panels as follows: 1.Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2.Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage p ipe at inside edge of footings. 3.Place drainage panel over drainage pipe with core side up. Peel back fabric and wrap fabric around pipe. Locate top of core at bottom elevation of floor slab. 4.Butt additional panels against other installed panels. If panels have plastic flanges, overlap installed panel with flange. 3.9RETAINING-WALL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A.Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drai nage fill to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. Aft er satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed. 1.Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filt er fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. 2.Encase pipe with sock-style geot extile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 9
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). B.Install vertical drainage panels as follows: 1.Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2.Lay perforated, PE or PVC drai nage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this Specification. Do not install aggregate. 3.If weep holes are used in lieu of drainage pipe, cut 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter holes on core side at weep-hole locations. Do not cut fabric. 4.Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width. 5.Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 6.Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. 7.Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of wall corner. Place core side of panel against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product. Use nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Do not penetrate waterproofing. Before usi ng adhesives, discuss with wat erproofing manufacturer. 8.If another panel is required on the same row, cu t away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core and wrap fabric over new panel. 9.If additional rows of panel are required, overla p lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric. 10.Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 in ches (300 mm) below finish grade. 11.For inside corners, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for overlap. 12.Do not use drainage panels as protection over waterproof memb rane, unless otherwise approved by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. C.Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade. 3.10LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A.Install drainage pipe with a horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to requi red slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B.Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over trench bottom to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed. 1.After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). 2.Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filt er fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. 3.Encase pipe with sock-style geot extile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. C.Drainage Conduit: Provide trench width to allow installation of drainage con duit. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. D.Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over drainage [fill] [conduit]. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 10
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.11PIPING INSTALLATION A.Install piping beginning at low points of system, t rue to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. In stall gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufact urer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1.Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 in ches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2.Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent. 3.Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater piping system, install piping pitched do wn in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. However, when water discharges through wall weep holes , pipe may be installed with a minimum slope of zero percent. 4.Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 5.Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 6.Lay open-joint pipe spaced as indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, with 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between ends. Cover top two-thirds of joint opening with open-joint screening material and tie with corrosion-resistant wire. 7.Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. B.Use increasers, reducers, and coup lings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C.Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. D.Install PVC piping acco rding to ASTM D 2321. E.Install clay piping according to ASTM C 12 and NCPI's "Clay Pipe Engineering Manual." F.Install concrete piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Handbook." 3.12PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hu b and spigot, with rubb er compression gaskets according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings. B.Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with co uplings for soiltight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Brid ges," Division II, Section 26.4 .2.4, "Joint Properties." C.Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; or according to ASTM D 2321. D.Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. E.Join perforated, PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with l oose, bell-and-spigot joints. F.Join perforated, clay pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 425. G.Lay clay pipe and fittings with open jo ints and open-join t screening material. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 11
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado H.Join perforated, concrete pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 443/C 443M. I.Special Pipe Couplings: Join pi ping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use co uplings that are compatib le with and that fit bo th pipe materials and dimensions. 3.13FOUNDATION, RETAINING-WALL AND LANDSCAPING SUBD RAINAGE CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A.Install cleanouts from subdrainage piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. B.In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron so il pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas. C.In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for subd rainage piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade. 3.14UNDERSLAB SUBDRAINAGE CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A.Install cleanouts and riser extensions from subdrainage piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in directio n. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. B.Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug flush with top of slab. 3.15CONNECTIONS A.Piping installation requirements are specified in ot her Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B.Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid building storm drainage system. C.Where required, connect low elevations of found ation subdrainage to storm water sump pumps. 3.16FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing: After installing drainage fill to top of pipe , test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 12
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 13 3.17CLEANING A.Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other super fluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of ea ch day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 02620
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes storm drainage outside the building. B.Related Sections: Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for foundation drains conn ecting to storm drainage. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.HDPE: High Density Polyethylene plastic. B.PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.3PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. B.Materials used should meet or exceed the requirements of the town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, these requirements shall govern. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For the following: 1.Polymer-concrete, chann el drainage systems. 2.Stormwater disposal systems. B.Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed storm drainage system piping and products, in accordance with requirements of Division 1 C.Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete. D.Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B.Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C.Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.6PROJECT CONDITIONS STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado A.Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and ve rify existing utility locations. B.Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. Pothole ahead of installation to determine exact horizontal and vertical location of ex isting utilities at planned crossings. Notify Engineer of conflicts. C.Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilit ies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to pr ovide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Architect not less than two days in adv ance of proposed utility interruptions. 2.Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, prov ide products by one of the following: 1.Polymer-Concrete, Chan nel Drainage Systems: a.ABT, Inc. b.ACO Polymer Products, Inc. 2.NyloPlant Area Drains: As Shown on plan 2.2PIPING MATERIALS A.Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3PIPES AND FITTINGS A.Corrugated HDPE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints, 6” diameter 1.Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints. B.Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints, 12” diameter. 1.Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints. C.Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class III and V, for gasketed joints. 1.Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 2.4MANHOLES A.Normal-Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with p rovision for rubber gasketed joints. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 2
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3.Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 5-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4.Riser Sections: 5-inch minimum thickness , and lengths to provide depth indicated. 5.Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6.Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 7.Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that match 24-inch- diameter frame and cover. 8.Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral sli ppage off step. Cast or anchor into base, riser, and top section sidewalls with steps at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep. 9.Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep.10.Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. 2.5CATCH BASINS A.Normal-Traffic, Catch Basins: as shown on drawings. B.Frames and Grates: as shown on drawings 2.6CONCRETE A.General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: 1.Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2.Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3.Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4.Water: Potable. B.Portland Cement Design Mix: 400 0 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio. 1.Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Gr ade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel. C.Structure Channels and Benches: Fa ctory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio. 1.Include channels and benches in manholes. a.Channels: Concrete invert, fo rmed to same width as connect ed piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourt hs of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. 1)Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole. b.Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. 1)Slope: 4 percent. D.Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious ratio. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 3
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 1.Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Gr ade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel. 2.7POLYMER-CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A.General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channe l recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. B.Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Sy stems: as shown on drawings: 1.Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4-inch inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. a.Frame: Include gray-iron or steel frame for grate, as shown on drawings 2.Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," as shown on drawings. 2.8PIPE OUTLETS A.Riprap Basins: Broken, i rregular size and shape, graded stone, as shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EARTHWORK A.Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3.2IDENTIFICATION A.Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. 1.Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.3PIPING APPLICATIONS A.General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, unless watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B.Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed speci fications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated. C.Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following: 1.NPS 4 and NPS 6: Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 2.NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375): Corrugat ed PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 8 and NPS 10. Use corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and co upled joints in NPS 12 and NPS 15. 3.NPS 15 reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, ga skets, and gasketed joints Class III and V. Do not use nonreinforced pipe instead of reinforced concrete pipe. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 4
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 3.4INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing pl ans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. B.Install piping beginning at low point, true to grad es and alignment indicated w ith unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written in structions for use of lubricants, a nd other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull pa st each joint as it is completed. C.Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings or cleanouts are indicated . Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap in to existing sewer is indicated. D.Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings wh ere different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E.Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. F.Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. 3.5PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A.General: Join and install pipe and fitti ngs according to installations indicated. B.Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction and installation. C.HDPE Pipe and Fittings: As follows: 1.Join pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints accord ing to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.Install corrugated piping according to the Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association's "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings." D.Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." Use the following seals: 1.Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. E.System Piping Joints: Make jo ints using system manufacturer's c ouplings, unless otherwise indicated. F.Join piping made of different ma terials or dimensions with couplin gs made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions. 3.6MANHOLE INSTALLATION A.General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B.Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 5
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado C.Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished grade surface of manholes. D.Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891. 3.7CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION A.Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B.Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.8STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A.Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. B.Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. 3.9CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R. 3.10DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.Assemble and install components acco rding to manufacturer's written instructions. B.Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface. C.Assemble channel sections to form sl ope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recomme nded by system manufacturer. D.Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. E.Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. 3.11CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A.Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. B.Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, as shown on drawings. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade. C.Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.12FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Clear interior of piping and stru ctures of dirt and supe rfluous material as work pr ogresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1.In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 6
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 7 2.Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B.Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1.Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2.Defects requiring correction include the following: a.Alignment: Less than full diameter of insi de of pipe is visible between structures. b.Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c.Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d.Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e.Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3.Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4.Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C.Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been al tered, extended, or repaired in accordance with Vail, Colorado requirements. 1.Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2.Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3.Schedule tests and inspections by authorities ha ving jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice.4.Submit separate reports for each test. 5.Leaks and loss in test pressure con stitute defects that must be repaired. 6.Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.END OF SECTION 02630
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02732 -ROADWAY BASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade prior to paving and after utility contractors have completed installation of all utilities, and furnish and place one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. All work shall be in accordance with Town of Vail requirements, Standards and Specifications. B. Related Work: 1. Drainage Structures, Pipes, and Fittings: Section 02430 2. Water System: Section 02510 3. Sanitary Sewer System 02530 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish prop osed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis – ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion – ASTM C131 3. Liquid Limit – AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves – AASHTO T99 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size Class 1 Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4” 100 - - - 3” 100 95-100 - - - 2” 95-100 - 100 - - 1-1/2” - 90-100 - - 1” - - 100 - ¾” - 50-90 - 100 No. 4 30-65 - 30-50 30-70 30-65 No. 8 - - - 25-55 No. 200 3-15 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12 Liquid Limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. ROADWAY BASE 02732 - 1
L ION S QUARE L ODGE EAST Vail, Colorado ROADWAY BASE 02732 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, li ne, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings be fore placing base material. Compact to 95% ASTM-698 3.02 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by me thods that insure a thorough and homogenous mixture. 3.03 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base cour se exceeds 6”, construct in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum co mpacted thickness of an y one layer shall not exceed 6”. When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be incr eased to 8” upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 95% ASTM-698. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are fi rmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture conten t is within 2% of optimum. END OF SECTION 02732
LION SQUARE LODGE EAST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02741 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A.Work Included: Furn ishing, laying, and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B.Related Work: 1.Roadway Base: Section 2732 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B.Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain un til completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C.Contractor will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B.Test Reports: If requested furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate – AASHTO T96 2. Tar – AASHTO M52 Grade RTC B-5, M118. 3. Liquid Asphalt – AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt – AASHTO M140 5. Compaction – AASHTO T230 6. Stability and Flow – AASHTO T245 C.Job Mix Formula: Provide Engineer propo sed mix design based upon aggregates to be used. 1.Submit design mix to Engineer for approval along with Marshall series performed by an inde pendent laboratory. 2.Stability per ASTM D1559: 1500 lb. minimum 3. Flow per ASTM D1559: .08 to .16 inch 4. Air Voids percentage per ASTM D1559: 3 to 5 percent ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 1
LION SQUARE LODGE EAST Vail, Colorado 5. Use an anti-stripping additive form the approved list of additives in Chapter 400 of the Colorado Depart ment of Highways Fi eld Materials Manual 6. Minimum Asphalt content: 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport mixtures form mixing plant in trucks having tight, clean, non-sticking compartments. When transporting, provide covers to protect from weather and prevent loss of heat when temperature is below 50 degrees F. During temperatures below 50 degrees F on long distance deliveries, pr ovide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place asphaltic concrete on wet surfaces, or when temperature is below 40 degrees F, unless agreed to by Engineer. B. Protection: After final ro lling, do not permit vehi cular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades, flagmen, and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pe destrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. D.Confirm in writing, aggregate base course co nstructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be br ought into conform ance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE Clean, hard, durable particles of crus hed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag with not more than 45% of wear, AASHTO T96. Sizes #8 and larger, toleran ces + 8%; #30 + 3%; where 100% passing, no tolerance. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading Grading Grading Grading G C CX F 1-1/2” 100 - - - 1” 90-100 100 - 100 ¾” 63-85 90-100 100 - ½” 46-78 70-89 90-100 - 3/8” - 60-88 74-89 - #4 22-54 44-72 50-78 - #8 13-47 30-62 32-64 45-85 #30 4-26 12-38 12-38 - #200 1-7 3-7 3-7 7-13 Use Grading CX for this project. 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT AASHTO M226, Penetration Grade 85-100. Use AC-10 for all paving. 2.03 TACK COAT ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 2
LION SQUARE LODGE EAST Vail, Colorado One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier: A. Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140 B. Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208 2.04 MIX DESIGN A. Determine design mix based upon aggregates to be used. 1. Submit design mix to engineer for approval along with Marshall series performed by an inde pendent laboratory. 2. Stability per ASTM D1559: 1500 lb. minimum 3. Flow per ASTM D1559: .08 to .16 in. 4. Air voids percentage per ASTM D1559: 3 to 5% 5. Use an anti-stripping additive form the approved lists of ad ditives in Chapter 400 of the Colorado Department of Highways Field Materials Manual. 6. Minimum Asphalt content: 5.8% B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.06 MIXING A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, contro l, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each co mponent of various-sized com bined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so sep arate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry agg regates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%. Deliver dry aggregate mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, am bient temperature, and workability of mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature – viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. E.Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with jo b-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 90-95% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 3
LION SQUARE LODGE EAST Vail, Colorado A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. If time lapse from final shaping to placement is longer than 24 hours, reshape, wet and compact surface, or apply prime coat. When prime coat is used, apply at rate of 0.3 gallons per square yard as soon as practicable after surface has been prepared and is sufficiently dry. Calibrate distribu tor and furnish calibration to Engineer. Adjust spray nozzles and spray bar to provide uniform distribution of prime coat. Cease immediately upon clogging or interference of any nozzle and correct before distribution is resumed. Protect adjacent surfaces from prime coat material. Remove prime oat from adjacent surfaces. Return to same condition prior to work beginning. Maintain prime coat and/or base course surface until covered by asphaltic concrete. Where prime coat has been applied for 48 hours, and has not dried su fficiently, materials may be blotted with aggregate in manner agreed to by Engineer. Clean any damaged area of all loose material, and repair base course to satisfactio n of Engineer. Reapply prime coat. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with leveling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surface at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which su rfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000’ ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS Set frames of structures to final grade. Place co mpacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on an emergency basis until cut out and ad justed to final surfacing. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Place at temperatures of not less than 280 degrees F, or more than 350 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydo wn. Mechanical, self-powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for leveling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screeds shall be adjustable for height and crown, equipped with cont rolled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix w ithout tearing, shav ing or gouging surface, to depth and cross-section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Pavers shall be capable of placing courses in thickness’ from ½” to 4” and from wi dths of 8’ to 15’. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6”. B. Strike finish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in density and texture; free form hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be ¼” above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility, or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish an d compaction tolerances of these specifications. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 4
LION SQUARE LODGE EAST Vail, Colorado D. Joints: make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day’s work, to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction jo ints must have same texture, density, and smoothness tole rances as other surfacing. 1. Construct transverse joints to ex isting material by cu tting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. Prepare longitudinal joints overlapping screed 1” on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by ha nd rake1/2” on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately1” high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8” for width of 6”, after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place leveling courses within ½” of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10’ straight edge, parallel to center line at lo cation of wheel paths for each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5’ and space under straight edge shall not exceed ¼”. Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overl ay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minim um thickness shall be removed and replaced. 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide one pneumatic-tired and one steel-wheel roller to obtain required density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers, etc. to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers 1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propell ed, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per in ch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish on e complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and ed ges first, starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards ce nter of pavement. Begi n superelevated curves rolling on low side on previous ly transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperatures must not be below 150 degrees F. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 5
LION SQUARE LODGE EAST Vail, Colorado ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 6 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joi nt and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make eno ugh passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture, and surface tolerances required. D. Compact to minimum of 95% Marshall Desi gn method data submitted, or from field samples taken by the Engineer, and prep ared in accordance with ASTM D1550. Re-compact asphaltic concrete not conforming to density standards to these specifications. Cut out compaction test plugs as directed by Engineer. Contractor shall cut test plugs, fill, and repair test holes at his expense. 3.05 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and paralle l, and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.06 CLEAN UP After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. END OF SECTION 02741
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT02768-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02768 - DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes colored cement concrete pavement at locations indicated on Drawings and below: 1. All breezeway (north walkway to all existing units) and deck/patio surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design mixtures. C. Material certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Producer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. C. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sec tions (minimum 48”x48”) of decorative cement concrete pavement to demonstrate typical pattern, texture, surface finish, color, joints, and standard of workmanship. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT02768-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. White Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Adm ixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. F. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in decorative cement concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. 2.4 COLOR MATERIALS A. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound : ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, specifically manufactured for colored concrete.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT02768-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by coloring admixture manufacturer. 2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer. C. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Manufacturer's standard wat erborne, membrane-forming, medium-gloss, acrylic copolymer emulsion solution, specifically manufactured for colored concrete, containing not less than 15 percent solids by volume, nonyellowing, and UV resistant. D. Slip-Resistant Additive: Manufacturer's standard finely gr aded aggregate or polymer additive, designed to be added to clear acrylic sealer, to result in a slip-resistant surface. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strip s: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): per Structur al Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. 3. Slump Limit: per Struct ural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements. B. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content per Structural Engineer and Town of Vail, Colorado requirements.. C. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m) E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment or colored water-reducing admixture to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; wh en air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT02768-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. B. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. C. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 3.2 JOINTS A. Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Const ruct transverse joints at righ t angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform da mpened condition at time concrete is placed. B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. C. Deposit and spread concrete in a con tinuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. D. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipm ent supplemented by hand spading, E. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. F. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. 3.4 INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE FINISH A. Integrally Colored Concrete Finish: After final floating, apply a hand-trowel finish followed by a broom finish to concrete. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp bu rlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Other Locations: Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float- finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT02768-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Sidewalks/Walkways: Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Compound: Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 1. Cure integrally colored concrete with a curing compound. 2. Cure concrete finished with pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener with a curing compound. 3.6 SEALER A. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90-degrees to the direction of the first coat us ing same application methods and rates. 1. Begin sealing dry surface no sooner than 28 days after concrete placement. 2. Mix slip-resistant additive thoroughly in sealer before application according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally during application to maintain even distribution of additive. 3.7 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and ACI 330.1. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace decorative cement concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or does not comply with requirements in this Section in complete sections from joint to joint, unless otherwise approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 02768
UNIT PAVERS 02780 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS (ALTERNATE)PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following alternate paving system for the building exterior: 1. Removed and reinstalled pavers set in aggregate setting beds. 2. Aluminum edge restraints. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02552 – Ground-Loop Heat Pump Piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates. B. Samples of pavers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements for Mortar and Grou t: Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Protect unit paver work against freezing for 24 hours after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT PAVERS A. Unit Pavers: Existing pavers removed, cleaned and reinstalled per Section 01732 Selective Demolition.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Straight, 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick by 4-inch- (100-mm-) high extruded- aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to receive stakes at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., and aluminum stakes 12 inches (300 mm) long for each loop. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BRICKSTOP Corporation. b. Curv-Rite, Inc. c. Permaloc Corporation. d. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation. B. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II. C. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1. 2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No.8. B. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. D. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following: 1. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. C. Joint Pattern: Random, with long edges running parallel to foot traffic. D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints. Install joint filler before setting pavers.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. G. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers or sand in setting bed. 3.2 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density. B. Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated. C. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). D. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. E. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. G. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-am plitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. END OF SECTION 02780
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 02900-1 SECTION 2900 – LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications , apply to this section. 1.2SUMMARY A.Work Included: Provide trees, plants and non-plant materials, labor and equipment required to complete installation of landscape work as indicated on the drawings and specified. Provide landscape complete, as shown and specified on the drawings. 1.Balled and burlapped or spade dug trees 2.Containerized shrubs, perennials, and groundcover 3.Planting soils. 4.Mulches (cobble and wood chip mulches) 5.Sodding 6.Seeding 7.Landscape edging 8.Irrigation 1.3SUBMITTALS A.General: Submit item in this Article to the Cond itions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Section. B.Delivery tickets for all bulk materials with Owner’s Representative’s approval or acknowledgement that materials were received in satisfactory condition. C.Certification of grass seed vendor for each grass-see d mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species, va riety, percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging D.Samples of the following: 1.1 clear gallon size bag full of mulch and cobble for each type required, labeled. 2.Edging materials and accessories 3.All items requested by Contractor for Su bstitution or as an Approval Equal. E.Written warranty stating all items included in the warrant y, conditions of the warran ty, and beginning and ending of warranty period. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer's Field Supervision: Require In staller to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 1.Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 2 B.Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. C.Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, and all app licable Colorado Nurserymen’s Association rules and specifications.D.Inspection: Landscape Architect may inspect plants either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size and quality. 1.The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject at any time or place prior to final acceptance all plant materials which, in the Land scape Architect’s opinion fail, to meet specifications, Inspection of materials is primarily for quality, size, and variety, but other requirements are not waived even though visual inspection results in a pproval. Rejected material shall be removed from the site within 24 hours. 2.The Contractor shall schedule insp ection of the plants, at either th e supplier or on site, to be completed in one visit. Any further inspection required due to plants being unavailable or rejected as not meeting specifications shall be charged to the Contractor at the current hourly rate for Landscape Architect’s personnel performing the inspection. E.Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z6 0.1 with branches and tr unks or canes in their normal position. Do not prun e to obtain required sizes. F.Pre-installation Conference: Contractor shall attend a landscape pre-i nstallation, if requested by Owner or Owner’s Representative. Conference to be held at locations specified by Owner’s Representative. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Prot ect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape . Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. B.Handle planting stock by root ball. C.Sod: Harvest, deliver, store and handle sod according to the requirements of the American Sod Producers Association’s (ASPA) “Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/Installing. Protect sod from drying and breaking. D.Deliver plants after preparations fo r planting have been completed, and inst all immediately. If planting is delayed more than eight hours after delivery, set plan ts and trees in their ap propriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather an d mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1.6WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting fro m abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incide nts that are beyond Contractor's control. b.Structural failures including plan tings falling or blowing over.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 3 2.Warranty Periods from Date of Plantin g Completion: Warrant the fo llowing living planting materials for a period of (1) years after date of Final Acceptance, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects, resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather co nditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents that are beyond Contractor’s control. a.Trees b.Shrubs c.Ground Covers and Perennials d.Sodded Areas e.Seeded Areas f.Irrigation System PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1PLANT MATERIAL A.General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to ge nus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplantin g or root pruning. (Exception Bristlecone Pines, Engelmann Spruce, and Aspens can be collected.) Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated whe n in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B.Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with r oot balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare sh all be visible before planting. C.Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades confirming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Provide specimen grade trees. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect with a proportionate increase in size of roots and balls. D.Perennials: Provide healthy, disease-free plant s of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery. E.All plants shall be the species designated on the Drawings. No substitutions will be accepted without the prior written approval of the Landscape Architect. 2.2TREES A.Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species type, and with relationship to caliper, hei ght, and branching recommendations by ANSI Z60.1, and stem form as designated on drawings. B.Evergreen Trees: Specimen quality, well balanced with leader intact and undamaged, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required conforming to ANSI Z60.1. C.Provide balled and burlapped trees.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 4 D.Container-grown trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped trees subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock. E.All deciduous trees of one species used in formal rows or groupings shall exhibit cultural uniformity i.e. matched in height crown width and shape , height to first branch, and trun k taper. For this reason it is desired that these trees pro duced by a single grower. 2.3SHRUBS A. Form and Size 1.Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required and measured according to ANSI Z60.1, for type, shape and height of shrub. Root development shall be sufficient to hold the soil in the shape of the container wh en removed but without visible circling roots. 2.Normal-quality, well balanced, broadleaf evergreens of type height, spread, and shape required conforming to ANSI Z60.1. B.Provide container grown or balled an d burlapped as in dicated on plans. 2.4GROUND COVERS AND PERENNIALS A.Provide ground covers and plants established and well rooted in removable container or integral peat pots and with not less than the minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size indicated. 2.5SOD A.Certified turf grass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut thickness, size, strength moisture content, and mowed height, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses. Provide visible sod of uniform density, color, and texture of the following turf grass species, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. 1.Sod shall be Colorado grown, bluegrass/fescue bl end, a mixture of 3 improved bluegrass varieties, complying with applicable State and Federal codes. B.Sod which has dried out, or with soil that breaks, tears, or crumbles away will not be accepted. Sod shall be kept moist, protected from the sun, heat or wind and after delivery. Prior to cu tting, the sod shall be evenly mown for a blade length of at least 1- inch but not mo re than 2-inches. 2.6 SEEDING A.All seed shall have a purity and germination of 90% or better and shall be applied at a rate/type as noted on plans. 2.7TOP SOIL A.Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a mi nimum of 2 percent organic material content. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, c oncrete layers or chu nks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 5 B.On-site Soil: Topsoil to be selected fro m disturbance areas within the site. Topsoil from site to be scraped and stockpiled in lifts no more th an 2’ in height. Soil to be salvaged, screened on-site, and amended to meet the above stated planting soil requirements. 2.8SOIL AMENDMENTS/PLANT MIX A.Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone contai ning a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No.8 sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing a No. 60 sieve.1.Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone. B.Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. C.Aspen Rich Compost as supplied by Southwest So ils, 970-323-6300. D.A1 Organics Premium 3; as supplied by A1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, 303-454-3492 2.9FERTILIZER A.Superphosphate: Commercial, phosp hate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.B.Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 pe rcent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition or equal organic based: C.Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight in shrub and flower beds. D.Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent pho sphorous, and 10 percent pot assium, by weight in turf grass areas. 2.10MULCHES A.Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-f ree organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent pa ssing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 3 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. B.Materials: Place weed barrier fabric is required under the bark and cobble mulch. 1.Type-1: Basic Shredded Bark Mu lch as supplied by Southwest So ils, 970-323-6300 to installed to tree, shrub and plant beds; or an approved equal. 2.Type-2: Small Bark Nugget as supplied by Waupaca Northwoods LLC., 1-800-365-4032 to be installed in groundcover and perenn ial beds; or an approved equal. 3.Type-3 Cobble Driplines: 3”-4” cobble “Gabion” as supplied by LG Everist, Silverthorne, Co. or an approved equal. C.Installation: Place mulch in all plant saucers 3" deep. Place mulch uniformly in all shrub and tree planting beds at 3" deep. All perennial bes shall have mulch placed uniformly at a depth of 2”. Clean up area of work after installing mulch.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 6 2.11WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A.Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. (101g/sq. m) minimum. OR, B.Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m). 2.12LANDSCAPE EDGING A.Materials: Place stone edging material bordering planting beds as shown on drawings. 1.Type: 'Vogelman Brown Beams' as supplied by Vogelman West Associates, palette size, exact dimensions to vary. Width to be approximately 8”-10”. 2.Installation: Trench along the bo rder of planting beds 6" deep and pl ace stone edging. The top of the stone edging shall be 1 "above grade so as to retain mulch and provide edge for grass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A.Tillable Soil: Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 in ches prior to placing top soil and soil amendments. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and lega lly dispose of them off Owner's property. B.Positive Surface Drainage: Finish and fine grade the project area to establish an even an d well matched gradient over the entire surface. Provide positive surface drainage, with no depressions, settling, or irregularities in the finished grade. C.Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, an d fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.2SOD PREPARATION A.During preliminary grading, dig out all weeds by thei r roots and remove. Loosen th e area to a depth of 4" and water thoroughly. Hand rake the area to remove all rocks larg er than 1.5" in size and foreign matter such as building rubble, wire, cans, concrete, roots, weeds and debris. Provide a smooth surface at final grade free from ruts and irregularities. Final grade must be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to laying any sod. 3.3 SOD INSTALLATION A.Commence laying sod immediately after areas have been prepared at final grade and fertilized. Apply 18-46-0 fertilizer at a rate of 5 lb. per 1000 s.f. . Lay sod with a staggered joint pattern placed tightly together without stretching the sod. Upon completion of layi ng, roll the lawn with a water ballast roller weighing 100 to 300 lb. to insure positive root contact with the ground surface. Repair any uneven surfaces as di-rected by the Landscape Architect. Water lawn to a depth of 2" immediately after rolling. Approximately 6-7 weeks after installation of sod, apply a second application of fertilizer of the same mixture and rate as previously applied.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 7 3.4 SEED PREPARATION A.LIMITS OF SEEDING: All grass covered areas, as well as existing naturally vegetated areas, which are damaged or disturbed by const ruction operations or pipeline installation shall be seeded except those areas which are to be sodded, planted, mulch, etc. Areas off site that are disturbed fro m utility line connections shall be relandscaped and revegetat ed back to original conditions. B.PREPARATION: During preliminary grading, dig out all w eeds by their roots and remove. Loosen the ar-ea to a depth of 4" and water thoroughly. Hand rake the area to remove all rocks larger than 1.5" in size and foreign matter such as building rubble, wire, cans, concrete, roots, wee ds and debris. Provide a smooth surface at final grade free from ruts and irregularities. Final grade must be approved by the Landscape Ar-chitect prior to seeding. C.INSTALLATION: The seed shall be applied in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect with the method clearly defined in the bid proposal. The seeded area shall be fertilized with 18-46-0 or approved equivalent at a rate of 5 lb. per 1000 s.f. . Protect against erosion by spreading a specified mulch treatment. Apply this erosion control with in 24 hours of seeding. Water the seeded areas immediately with care taken so that the watering does not cause any unnecessary erosion. . 3.5EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A.Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainag e away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1.Excavate approximately two times as wide as ball diameter. 2.Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider th an root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3.Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. B.Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be use d as planting soil if approved by Landscape Architect. 3.6TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A.Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B.Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Rem ove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C.Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or tr ench with root flare 2 in ches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1.Use planting soil for backfill mixed with excavated soil 50/50. 2.Balled and Burlapped: After placing some back fill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if an y, before setting. Do no t use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken be fore or during planting operation. 3.Balled and Potted or Container-Grown: Ca refully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 8 4.Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Caref ully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 5.Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate vo ids and air pockets. When planting pit is approx imately one-half filled, water thorough ly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 6.Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D.When planting on slopes, set the plant so the roo t flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the do wnhill side of the root ball. 3.7TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A.Remove only dead, dying, or broken br anches. Do not prune for shape. B.Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to ret ain natural character. 3.8GROUND COVER & PERENNIAL PLANTING A.Set out and space groun d cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. B.Use planting soil for backfill. C.Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D.Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. E.Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. F.Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.9PLANTING AREA MULCHING A.Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) secure seams with galvanized pins. No weed-barriers shall be installed in perennial beds. B.Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of mulch and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks and stems. 1.Thickness: 2-inches deep in grou nd cover and perennial bed areas. 2.Thickness: 3-inches deep in shrub and bed areas. C.Mulch tree rings in turf out to driplin e with 3-inch depth specified organic mulch.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 9 3.10PLANT MAINTENANCE A.Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings . Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Maintain trees, shrubs, gro undcovers and perenn ials until final accep tance by Owner. B.Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C.Apply treatments as required to kee p plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. D.Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. E.Protect plants from damage due to landscape opera tions and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation period. Designation of new planting areas through the use of signage and/or construction fencing as necessary to protect the health of the plants. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. F.Maintain turf grass immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established and until final acceptance by Owner. G.Maintain native grass and seeded areas by reseeding and mulc hing (weedfree straw or hydromulch) as required to insure erosion control and complete seed coverage. Begin maintenance of grasses immediately after each area is planted and continue maintenance until final acceptance by Owner. In areas that have been regraded and/or have existing weed growth, wee d control measures appropriate to the amount of growth and/or species shall be provided. Subm it weed control plan to Owner for approval. 3.11CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A.During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B.Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape op erations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Designation of new planting areas thro ugh the use of signage and/or construction fencing as necessary to protect the health of the plants. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 10 Section 4 -IRRIGATION 4.1DESCRIPTION A.This work shall consist of furnishing and installation of the irriga tion system as directed in the plans and specifications. B.Within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to proceed, the Contractor shall submit: 1.A materials list of items to be provided in the contract. 2.Manufacturer’s Specifications and other data needed to assure compliance with the specified re-quirements. 3.Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. 4.2MATERIALS A.Pipe:1. Plastic pipe: a.Use Class 200 IPS, SDR-21 polyvivyl chloride b.Fittings: Use schedule 40 polyvinylch oride, type I-II, co mplying with ASTM D2466. B.Risers:1.Quick coupling valv es: Use schedule 80 PVC risers with a mu ltiple swing joint assembly of nip-ples and elbows to permit readjustment of the valv e angle. Flexible polypipe may be used with the Landscape Designer’s approval. C.Valves: 1.Gate Valves – Reference irrigation details. 2.Quick Coupling Valves – Provide Rainbird, or equivalent equal, ¾”, all brass, locked top, to fir sing, lug couplers. Refere nce irrigation details. D.Backflow Preventer: 1.Provide a reduced pressure principal type of backflow preventer as shown in the plans. E.Automatic Irrigation Controller: 1.Hunter ACC Controller or approv ed equal shall provide 117 V input, 26.5 V output, with the number of valve stations and in type and model number shown in the plans. F.Field Wiring: 1.Use Hunter two wire syst em, or approved equal by landscape designer. G.Control Valves: 1.See type and model shown in the plans. Valves to be installed within Ametec, Carson, or approved equal, plastic valve boxes. H.Wire Slices: 1.Waterproof all wire splices with 3M DB Y, Scotch-look or equivalent. I.Rain Sensor: 1.Provide a Rainbird rain sensor or approved equal, installed and mounted so as to have free access to rainfall. 4.4PIPE INSTALLATION
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 11 A.Surface Conditions: 1.Examine the areas and conditions under wh ich work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatis-factory conditions are corrected. Keep stones, scraps of pipe, etc., picked up to maintain a profes-sional and workman-like appearance on the site. B.Field Measurements: 1.Make necessary measurement in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the ap-proved design. Field fit location of valves, irrigation heads, quick couplers, etc. as based on final finished grades, hardscape, and plant locations. All field changes to be approved by landscape de-signer. C.Trenching and Backfilling: 1.Trench depth shall be as required for specified coverage over pipe. 2.Trenches shall be backfilled with excavated material, free of debr is and rocks over four inches in size. Backfilled trenches shall be flush with final finish grade. Adjust for settling and compaction as necessary to achieve flush finish grade at the time of project completion. D.Inspection of Materials: 1.Carefully inspect pipe and fitti ngs before installation, removi ng all dirt, scale, and burrs; and reaming as required. 2.Plastic Pipe: a.Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings: i.Store under cover until ready to install. ii.Transport only on a vehicle w ith a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and c oncentrated external load. b. Repair dented and damaged pipe by cutting out and discarding the dented or damaged sec-tions, and rejoining with a coupling. c.In jointing, use only the specified solvent and make joints in accordance with the manufactur-er’s recommendations. 4.5EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.Install control valves where indicated on the plans and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recom-mendations. B.Filed Wiring: 1.All wires shall be bundled to gether and taped every fifty (50) feet. The wires shall be installed in the trench, under the main irrigation line. Enclose wire splices in approved plastic valve box. C.Quick Coupling Valves: 1. Install in lawn areas with the top flush with the ginish grade, and 8” from pavements and heads. 2.Install in planting areas with tops 2 inches above grade and 8 inches from pavement and heads. 3.Stake each quick coupling valve with 2”x2” knot-free redwood state set at least 24 incehs into the earth, and extended sufficiently above the surface to ensure stability of the riser. 4. Secure the riser to the stake with an adjustable stainless steel geared clamp. D.Lawn Sprinkler Heads: 1.Install where indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E.Perennial Sprinkler Heads: 1.Install where indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado LANDSCAPING 2900 - 12 F.Backflow Preventer: 1.Install where indicated on the plans and in accord ance with all pertinent c odes, regulations, and the Manufacturer’s recommendations. Un it is to be plumbed with unions to facilitate removal in winter. Reference plumbi ng and irrigation notes regarding the backflow install per plans. 2.Unit to be housed in an adequate sized cover th at is insulated to resist freezing and mounted per Manufacturer recommendations. 4.6TESTING AND INSPECTION A.Before backfilling the main line, and with control valves in place, but beore lateral pipes are connect-ed, completely flush an d test the main line. 1.Repair leaks. 2. Flush out each section of lateral pipe before sprinkler heads are attached. B.Testing: 1.Make necessary provision for thoroughly bleeding the line of air and debris. 2. After valves have been installed, test live water lines ofr leaks at a pressure of 40-60 psi for the period of 1 hour. 3.Provide required testin g equipment and personnel. 4.Repair leaks, and retest until acceptance by owner. C.Final Inspection: 1.Clean adjust, and balance all systems. Verify that: a.All drip emitters are workable and properly adjusted. b. Heads are properly adjusted for radius and arc of coverage c. The installed system is workable, clean , and efficient. 4.7OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A.Attach a legend inside each controller door, stating the areas covered by each control valve. B.After the system has been completed, inspected, and approved, instruct the owner’s maintenance per-sonnel in the operation and maintenance of the system. END OF SECTION 2900
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cem ent Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 2 Section “Decorative Conc rete Pavement” for colored concrete. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with, fly ash at high sulfates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufact ured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results , or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concre te reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing materials. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Epoxy joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips. 12. Repair materials. G. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-- Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following , unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), unless otherwise indicated..D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide the following: a. US SPEC Ezkote, or US SPEC Slickote, or US SPEC Safekote; US MIX Products Co. 303- 778-7227 (Or Approved Similar) E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave ho les not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast conc rete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. C. Lightweight Aggregate: per ASTM C3 30, ¾” nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixt ure: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retardin g Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 FILL MATERIALS A. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; meeting delet erious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, po lyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E.Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: Class A. ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-co mponent epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathe red at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm). 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete accor ding to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes as indicated on structural drawings. D. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weigh t, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 15 percent. F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: as indicated G. Air Content: Add air-entrai ning admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as indicated. H. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floor slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. I. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. J. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 2. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concret e according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air te mperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm). D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing represe ntative field- or laboratory- cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). B. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill.3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcem ent against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one a nd one hole mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and ap pearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for grade beams in the middle third of spans. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weak ened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a dept h equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete wh en cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After rem oving formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated.1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. Do not drop concrete in forms from a height exceeding 60 inches. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete insi de forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slab s in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or da rbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is exp ected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade cont aining frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burl ap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete tex ture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. For concrete surfaces below ground. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: For concrete surfaces above ground. As-cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granu lar texture. Typical for all interior slabs. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) Typical interior floors except gymnasium b. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) in Gymnasium C. Medium to Fine Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concret e platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. D. Trowel and fine broom finish: for locations where tile or carpet is to be installed (refer to Room Finish Schedule). 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling in dicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furni shing machines and equipment. 1. Provide 6” thick housekeeping pads with welded wire mesh reinf orcement at mechanical equipment. Coordinate sizes and locations with mechanical design. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premat ure drying and excessive co ld or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coatin g and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack pat ching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one- half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patch ing mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concret e and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend w ith adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Arc hitect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado F. Repair materials and installation not specifi ed above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete place ment. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer th an five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test tw o laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days, one at 28 days, and one specimen will be retained in reserve for later testing if required.. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide correc tive procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds speci fied compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Arch itect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, nam e of concrete testing and inspect ing agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agen cy shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrain ment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinde rs complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.END OF SECTION 03300
CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT03542 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 03542 – CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cement-based, polymer-modifi ed, self-leveling underlayme nt for interior finish flooring repair and patching. Contractor to ensure that patch compounds will bond with existing underlayment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locati ons, and average depths of cement-based underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has completed cement-based underlayment applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in constructio n with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containe rs, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and application. B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's wr itten instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate cement-based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections. 1. Before installing surface sealers recommended by underlayment manufacturer, if any, verify compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives.
CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT03542 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Self-Leveling Underlayment ; W. R. Bonsal Company. 2. 300 Premium Underlayment ; Burke Group, LLC (The). 3. LeveLayer I; Dayton Superior Corp. 4. Firm-Fill® 2010, Hacker Industries, Inc. 5. Thoro Underlayment, Self-Leveling; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. 6. Levelex Underlayment; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 7. Ultra/Plan MB; Mapei Corporation. 8. Gyp-Crete 2000; Maxxon Corp. 2.2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS A. Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathe red at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 3. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm), or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C). D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer reco mmended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of underlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT03542 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate accord ing to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, neutral-p H substrate for underlayment application. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form- release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove rust, foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply corrosion-resistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. D. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment comp onents according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 2. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Slump Test: If slump testing is recommended in writing by manufacturer, test underlayment for slump as it is placed for compliance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT03542 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Field Samples: Take at least three molded-c ube samples from each underl ayment batch. Test samples according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compliance with compressive-strength requirements. When requested , provide test results to Architect. 3.5 PROTECTION A.Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03542
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Stone trim units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following in stalled compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days. 1. Refer to Drawings for additional requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, be nding, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" sh owing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. C. Samples for selection of the following: 1. Colored-masonry mortar samples showing the full range of colors available. 2. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color. D. Samples for verification of the following: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. E. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 3. Masonry units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualif ied independent testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction with specified requirements:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, test masonry prisms per ASTM E 447, Method B. 2. Test mortar properties per test methods of ASTM C 270. 3. Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Maso nry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Mockup: Prior to in stalling unit masonry, construct sample wall pa nels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requ irements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the locations as directed by Architect. 2. Build mockup of typi cal wall area as shown on Drawings. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates an d times when mockup s will be constructed. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Retain and maintain mockups du ring construction in an undisturb ed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless suc h deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover to ps of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in con tact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as we ll as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the am bient temperature is within the limits indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 deg F (4 to 0 deg C): Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). b. 32 to 25 deg F (0 to -4 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. c. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C) if grouting. Use heat on both side s of walls under construction. d. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 an d 49 deg C). Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F (4 deg C). Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosures. 2. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is within the limits indicated, provide the following protection: a. 40 to 25 deg F (4 to -4 deg C): Cover masonry with a weather-resi stant membrane for 48 hours after construction. b. 25 to 20 deg F (-4 to -7 deg C): Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h (25 km/h). c. 20 deg F (-7 deg C) and Below: Provi de enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the encl osure for 48 hours after construction. 3. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards ma y allow a certain percentag e of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Best Block/Keystone. b. Clalite, Inc. c. Robinson Block Co. 2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, co rners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Li ghtweight or Normal weight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: a. 4 inch (100 mm) nominal: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inch (150 mm) nominal: 5-5/8 inch (143 mm) actual. c. 8 inch (200 mm) nominal: 7-5/8 inch (194 mm) actual. d. 10 inch (250 mm) nominal: 9-5/8 inch (244 mm) actual. e. 12 inch (300 mm) nominal: 11-5/8 inch (295 mm) actual. f. 16 inch (400 mm) nominal: 15-5/8 inch (397 mm) actual. 5. Exposed Faces: none.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: AS TM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of por tland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. 1. For pigmented mortars, use colored portland cement-lime mix of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as select ed from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Water: Potable. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 (ASTM A 615M). B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 4 96, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 zinc coating. C. Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.06 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows: 2. ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1, for interior walls; and ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for exterior walls. B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated wi th deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm).
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.07 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in sub sequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: 1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for wire ties and anchors in exterior walls. 2. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). C. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), hot-d ip galvanized to co mply with ASTM A 153, Class B-1, B-2, or B-3, as applicable to size and form indicated. 2.08 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2. For anchorage to steel framing, provide manu facturer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm). 2.09 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and with the following structural performance characteristics: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in either tension or compression without deforming over, or developing play in excess of, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: 1. Wire Tie Shape: Triangular or rectangular. 2. Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into masonry wythe of veneer face.3. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet-metal plate with screw hole s top and bottom, 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm) thick by 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; fabricated into tee shape with 2 projecting tabs, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide by 1 inch (25 mm) long; with slotted holes for connection of vertical legs of tria ngular or rectangular wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-st eel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer; No. 10 (4.8-mm) diamet er by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts comp lying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where i ndicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet-Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the follo wing metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" and below: 1. Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embe dded in masonry as follows: a. With ribs formed in dovetail pattern at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide a 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage. 3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to shape indicated.4. Application: Use where flashing is fully or partly concealed in masonry wall. B. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt co mpound, 26 mils (0.7 mm) thick, bonded completely and integrally to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film, 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, to produce an overall thickness of 30 mils (0.8 mm). 1. Primer: Flashing manufacturer 's standard product or product recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to masonry and concrete. 2. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: a. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. b. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips comp lying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene or urethane. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indi cated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organi c roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep Holes: Provide the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm). 2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, effl orescence, and other new construct ion stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stain s, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. 2. For dark-colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface-acting aci ds and special inhibitors. 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 2. For masonry below grade, in contact w ith earth, and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. 3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: M or S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. D. Self-Consolidating Grout for Unit Masonry 1. Proportioned in accordance with ASTM C476 Table 1 for coarse grout and conforming to requirements of ACI 301, ready mixed concrete. 2. Provide self-consolidating grout with slump flow of 22” minimum to 30” maximum. 3. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi is required, using ASTM C1019 Standard Sampling Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Extra Water: Grout shall be delivered to the jobsite within batch tolerances as prescribed according to ASTM C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. Should additional water or admixture be required at the jobsite to achieve the required minimum slump flow, it shall be added only at the direction of an authorized ready-mixed concrete supplier representative and shall be noted as such on th e delivery ticket. Slump flow shall be retested and documented after water or admixture is added PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of un it masonry. Do not pr oceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of pipi ng connections prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated.B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications.C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to pr ovide clean, sharp, unchippe d edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-co oled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several palle ts or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed join ts and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) nor plus 1/2 inch (12 mm). E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed- joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent cours e by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar- joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than- half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizont al face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As co nstruction progresses, build-in items specified un der this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on foot ings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch (10-mm) joints. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 1.2 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. (0.42 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. ve rtically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically. 2. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and othe r materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." 3.06 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide con tinuous horizontal-joint rein forcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond opening. 4. Reinforcement above is in additio n to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at contro l and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corn ers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to metal studs with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to metal studs with 2 metal fasteners of type indicated.2. Fasten anchors through sheathing to metal studs with metal fasteners of type indicated. 3. Insert anchor section in metal st uds as sheathing is installed. Prov ide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 4. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2-inch (50-mm) air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 5. Locate anchor section relative to course where tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. 6. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm). 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips in to hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 4. Install temporary foam plastic filler in head joints and remove when unit masonry is complete. C. Build-in horizontal pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Secti on "Joint Sealants." 1. Locate horizontal pressure-relieving joints be neath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure be hind masonry veneer. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for 24 inches (610 mm) for block size units are shown wit hout structural steel or other supporting lintels.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-13 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matchi ng concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method as CMU. 2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommende d by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm), and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm), and behind air-infiltration barrier/building paper. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashin g 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 4. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall con struction is completed. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exteri or wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Form weep holes w ith product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. In cavities, place pea gr avel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. 4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. E. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity. Space vents and close off cavities vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. 1. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES04810-14 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.13 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line , and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Grouting 1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 2. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimens ion for grout pour s over 60 inches in height. 3. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. 4. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o.c. 5. Place self-consolidating grout within 1½ hours after mix water has been added unless prior arrangements and mix design adjust ments have been made by the ready mix concrete supplier rep resentative. 6. Do not mechanically vibrate self-consolidating grout. 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as wor k progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is th oroughly set and cured , clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles an d nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall pane l; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's app roval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleani ng method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04810
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –1 SECTION 04860 – STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior stone veneer. 1. Adhered to concrete backup. 2. Adhered to unit masonry backup. 3. Adhered to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for concealed flashing, horizontal joint reinforcement and veneer anchors. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for cavity-wall insulation. C. Products installed, but not furn ished, in this Section include: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for stone masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Projec t, include data on physical properties specified. B. Stone Samples for Verification: For each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required. C. Colored Mortar Samples for Verification: For each color required. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone masons and stone fitters who are skilled in installing stone veneer assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose projects have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each va riety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single manufacturer with resources to provide ma terials of consistent quali ty in appearance and physical properties. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of stone veneer assembly in sizes approximately 48 inches
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –2 (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup. a. Include stone coping at top of mockup. b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone veneer above half of flashing). 2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of stone; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to stone colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Contractor in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitu te approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Contractor in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Veneer Assemblies: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone veneer assemblies when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of stone masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections fro m mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen mate rials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE A. Match Architect’s samples for variety, color range, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. B. Design selections: 1. Exterior Stone Veneer: Match Lion Square Lodge North Building. Cleft cut stone face out for North Stair East/West/North wall recesses. 2. Exterior Stone Caps: Dark Buff Sandstone. Provide stone caps at top of stone walls, stone piers, and window sills. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. E. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural or synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and with a record of satisfactory performa nce in stone masonry mortars. G. Latex Additive: acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation. b. Bonsal. c. Bostik Findley Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. DAP Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –4 h. MAPEI Corp. i. Summitville Tiles, Inc. j. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company. H. Water: Potable. 2.3 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wi re: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire. C. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch- (0.76-mm-) thick by 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) wide hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 13 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm). D. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company b. Heckmann Building Products Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire-Bond. 2. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 5 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.4. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 5. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire. E. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8-mm diameter) by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. b. ITW Buildex; Scots Long Life Teks.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –5 2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC. B. Weep Holes: 1. Rectangular Plastic Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 inches (10 by 38 mm) by thickness of stone veneer assembly. 2. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 1/8 inch (3 mm) from exterior face of stone veneer, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry-measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry-measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and othe r new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by stone producer. 2.7 STONE FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone in sizes and shapes necessary to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings. B. Cut and select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances re commended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. C. Thickness of Stone Veneer: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 3-1/2 and 1-1/2 inches as indicated on the Drawings plus or minus 1/2 inch. D. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. E. Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as indicated on the Drawings. F. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. G. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –6 2.8 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S. C. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part Portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weat her-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. 3.2 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. 1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. 2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Arrange stones in three-course, random-range as hlar pattern with random course heights, random lengths (interrupted coursed), and uniform joint widths. D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for va riations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignme nt if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) at widest points. F. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Sheet metal flashing: Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up the face of sheathing at least 12 inches (300 mm), and behind weather-resistant sheathing paper. 2. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm), and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –7 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing fu ll length of angles but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. 4. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) at ends. 5. At ends of head and sill flashing turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 6. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip. H. Flexible flashing: Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 2. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 3. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. I. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and at flashing. 1. Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER A. Install flashing over sheathing and behind weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing. B. Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheath ing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063. C. Coat backs of stone units and face of masonry backup with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and masonry backup. D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to dept h of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STONE VENEER ASSEMBLIES 04860 –8 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method de scribed in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." 3.5 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil- contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1.Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. END OF SECTION 04860
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. B. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional structural provisions. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" fo r steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural- steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabricatio n of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For fabri cator and professional engineer. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Shop primers.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the State of Colorado where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPC- QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualif ications of Shop Painting Applicators." C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 3. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members." 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Join ts Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345). B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: AS TM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, an d Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 th rough 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: 60 KSI. 1. Configuration: As indicat ed on Structural Drawings. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. E. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grad e 1030, cold-fin ished carbon steel. F. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 10 18, cold-finish ed carbon steel. 2.3 PRIMER A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. Unprimed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." 2. Primed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Primed Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." B. Primers: 1. Primed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Build ings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Do not paint surfaces to receive welded stud shear connectors. G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other wo rk to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indi cated otherwise on the Structural Drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowa ble tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. Unprimed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." 2. Primed Non-Exposed Metal Surfaces: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.1. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- an d masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary sh ores, guys, braces, and other supp orts during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shi ms, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and ar chitecturally exposed stru ctural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for St eel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally expo sed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indi cated otherwise on the Structural Drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, ali gnment, and removal of pa int on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: 1. Bolt Testing: Test 2 percent of all high stre ngth bolts, nuts, and washers for compliance with all provisions of specified requirements. Review all certifications and mill test reports. 2. Bolted Connections: Visually inspect all bolted connections to assure all bolts, nuts, and required washers have been installed and are of proper type, and all faying surfaces have been brought into snug contact. 3. Standard High Strength Bolts: Inspect tightness of 30 percent of all bolts (minimum of 2), selected at random in each slip-critical high strength bolted connection of structural steel framing on Project. If rejectable bolts are found in any connection, check all remaining bolts in that connection of tightness. Inspection will conform to “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” approved by Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. Tension Control (Self-Indicating) Bolts: a. Perform visual inspection of all high strength bolted connections to ensure all torque-off splines have been sheared. b. Splines not sheared, verify proper bolt tension ha s been achieved by the application of a properly calibrated testing torque device or remove and replace all bolts with un-sheared splines. Contractor will pay cost of additional inspections required. C. Welded Connections: Agency will perform following on shop and field welds: 1. All welds, including wall and shoring connections: 10 percent visual. 2. Full penetration groove welds in transfer elements: 100 percent ultrasonic. 3. Steel decking: 100 percent visual. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal e ither a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, pro mptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 05120
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 1 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Non-composite form deck. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 1.2SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C.Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D.Welding certificates. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.B.Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."C.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Steel deck units shall be iden tified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.D.AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B.Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Steel Deck: a.ASC Profiles, Inc. b.Consolidated Systems, Inc. c.DACS, Inc. d.Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. e.New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. f.Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. g.Roof Deck, Inc. h.United Steel Deck, Inc. i.Verco Manufacturing Co. 2.2NONCOMPOSITE FORM (FLOOR) DECK A.Steel Floor Deck: Fabricat e ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form -deck panels to comply with “SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck,” in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicat ed, and with the following: 1.Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 (275), G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2.Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3.Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 22 gage. 4.Span Condition: per Structural Drawings. 2.3ACCESSORIES A.General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.B.Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C.Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexag onal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter. D.Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E.Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F.Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yiel d strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and prof ile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 G.Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H.Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit de ck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm ) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter. I.Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same mate rial and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. J.Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine supporting frame and field conditi ons for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other cond itions affecting performance. 3.2INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written in structions, and requirem ents in this Section. B.Install temporary shoring befo re placing deck panels, if requi red to meet deflection limitations. C.Locate deck bundles to prevent ove rloading of supporting members. D.Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fast ened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E.Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F.Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G.Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H.Comply with AWS requiremen ts and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I.Reinforcement at Openings: 1.Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work shown. 2.Miscellaneous openings not shown on Drawings such as those required for vents, risers, conduits, etc., shall be cut and reinforced by the trade requiring the opening.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 4 3.3DECK INSTALLATION A.Fasten deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1.Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2.Weld Spacing: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3.Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location as recommended by deck manufacturer. B.Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports as indicated on Structural Drawings. C.End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1.End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D.Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexib le closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. E.Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and gird er fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. F.Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet cell closures, and Z-closures to deck according to SDI recommendations to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking . Weld cover plates at changes in direction of deck panels, unle ss otherwise indicated. G.Uplifting Loads: Install and anchor roof units to resist net uplift load ing of 30 lbs per square foot at entry canopy and eave overhangs, design for 45 lbs per square foot. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified ind ependent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B.Field welds will be subject to inspection. C.Testing agency will report in spection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D.Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E.Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.5REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B.Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado STEEL DECK 05310 - 5 END OF SECTION 05310
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Length/400 for wind loading.. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Stan dard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- and T-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's st andard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's st andard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 2.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as indicated on structural drawings. B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as indicated on structural drawings. 2.4 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard steel sections as indicated on structural drawings.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as deter mined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath shea thing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Ty pe I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and th e top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 EXTERIOR LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bo ttom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal br acing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, in cluding masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a do uble stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicat ed to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not in dicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud- track solid blocking of width and thickness to ma tch studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to mu ltiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, includ ing supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.4 JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. D. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equa l length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. E. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings . Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist- track solid blocking of width and thickness indi cated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. F. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. G. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, in cluding web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist- framing assembly. 3.5 TRUSS INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section. B. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. C. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. D. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. E. Align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing stud s or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. F. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses.".3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
COLD-FO R MED METAL F R AMING05400 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 05400
METAL FAB R ICATIONS05500 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. 6. Metal bollards. 7. Pipe guards. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube railings. D. See Division 5 Section "Gratings" for metal gratings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Metal nosings and treads. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Templates: For anchors and bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below intr oduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS05500 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard we ight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 4. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels complying with MFMA-3, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.079- inch (2-mm) nominal thickness. 5. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Available Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-wei ght, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS05500 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use ma terials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base meta ls. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into conc rete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and support s not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. D. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 1. Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanize. 2. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete w ith fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. E. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. F. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of pr ofiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and an chorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Galvanize. G. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick steel plate. 2. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) th ick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS05500 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. H. Pipe Guards: Fabricate from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends a nd to fit around pipe with 2-inch (50-mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specifi cation No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in- place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expa nsion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard.
METAL FAB R ICATIONS05500 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in pos ition until concrete has cured. 4. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500
METAL STAIRS 05511 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. West Stairwells: Preassembled steel stairs with abrasive-coating-finished formed-metal treads. 2. East Stairwells: Industrial-type stairs with ADA-compliant grip-strut steel treads. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs and to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs.
METAL STAIRS 05511 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, th at are to be embedded in concrete or mas onry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). F. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170). H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205). I. Expanded Metal, Carbon Stee l: ASTM F 1267, Class 1 (uncoated). J. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5- mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
METAL STAIRS 05511 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cast-Metal Abrasive Nosings: Cast gray iron, Class 20, with an integral abrasive finish. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. c. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Co. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete. B. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-wei ght, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.2.4 FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to su pport and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
METAL STAIRS 05511 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Stair Framing: Fabricate stri ngers of steel plates or channels]. Construct platform s of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members. 1. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bo lts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 2. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum-board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. 3. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. D. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal St airs: Form risers, treads, and platforms from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with pe rformance requirements but not less than 0.0966 inch (2.5 mm). Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded abrasive finish. E. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. F. ADA-compliant Serrated Grip-strut stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1. Fabricate treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. Comply with ANSI requirements for slip resistance. 2. Manufacturer: Ohio Gratings, Inc 3. Shall be fabricated with serrated grating members. 4. Provide unit sizes to fit treads and landings at East egress stairs. 5. Provide concealed support members, including steel angles, bolts, etc. G. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to compl y with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, includ ing wall thickness of tube, post sp acings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and posts with infill panels made from woven wire mesh in steel channel frames. 2. Fabricate railings with welded con nections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings. 4. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. 5. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 6. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. 7. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 8. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposu re conditions of installed products:
METAL STAIRS 05511 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Exterior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. G. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05511
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS05521 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professiona l engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS05521 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re quirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Sharpe Products. c. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed meta l of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel and Iron: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). 2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded), Class 1 (uncoated). 6. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135- inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated. 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, withou t failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS05521 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-package d, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink an choring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design , dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connectio ns to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. D. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce un iform curvature; maintain cross section of member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. H. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill pa nels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-by-1/2- by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) metal channel frames. 2.5 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron: 1. Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exteri or railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galv anizing, clean railings, treat with metallic-phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting requi red for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not ex ceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
PIPE AND TUBE R AILINGS05521 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves or formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. D. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. F. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05521
GRATINGS 05530 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bar gratings. 2. Metal frames and supports for gratings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 75 lbf/sq. ft. (3.59 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 2000 lbf (8.90 kN), whichever produces the greater stress. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 2. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of gratings. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Bar Gratings: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation. b. All American Grating, Inc. c. Barnett/Bates Corp.
GRATINGS 05530 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado d. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. e. Fisher & Ludlow. f. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V. g. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. h. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division. i. Ohio Gratings, Inc. j. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc. k. Tru-Weld. 2.2 METALS A. Ferrous Metals: 1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Anchors: Provide anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 cond ucted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. C. Fit exposed connections accurately toge ther to form hairline joints. D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. E. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. F. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicat ed. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with ba rs of same size and material as bearing bars. G. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
GRATINGS 05530 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2. Interior, where indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. B. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Fit exposed connections accurately toge ther to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. D. Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. 1. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.2. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
GRATINGS 05530 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 05530
O R NAMENTAL R AILINGS05721 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1.Steel and iron ornamental railings. 2.Metal entry gate to receive hardware per Section 087100. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube components. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For railings assembled from standard components, grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professiona l engineer responsible for their preparation.
O R NAMENTAL R AILINGS05721 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Samples: For each exposed finish required. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will enga ge testing agency to test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. Payment will be made by Owner. 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representativ e of proposed materials and construction. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections ma de under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel and Iron Ornamental Railings: a. Architectural Iron Designs, Inc. b. Artezzi. c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. e. Indital USA. f. Lawler Foundry Corporation. g. Livers Bronze Co. h. Olin Wrought Iron. i. Regency Railings. j. TT Triebenbacher - Bavarian Iron Works Co. k. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel and Iron: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). 2. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
O R NAMENTAL R AILINGS05721 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, withou t failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply w ith Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. F. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-package d, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107, or water-resistant, nonshrink, anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connectio ns to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. D. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provid e wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron:
O R NAMENTAL R AILINGS05721 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallic-phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves or formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. D. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with sleeves concealed within railing ends or brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. F. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erect ion, clean abraded areas and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05721
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Plywood backing panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of proce ss and factory-fabricat ed product indicated. 1. Include data for wo od-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 7. Building and window wrap. C. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and fini shing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process use d, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities of treated materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show comp liance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.03 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treat ed or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 2. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. 3. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m). 4. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: a. Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior for wood exposed to weather. c. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture co ntent of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection ag ency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.04 PLYWOOD A. Plywood: Provide either all-veneer, mat-formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Per- formance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide ply- wood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Ply- wood," where plywood is indicated. B. Trademark: Factory mark structural-use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. C. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings re quired to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." D. Plywood Underlayment: Underlayment B-C Exterior with fully sanded face, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). E. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). F. Plywood Backing Panels: Fo r mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indi- cated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick. 2.05 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Northern species; NLGA. 3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Douglas Fir-Larch. Grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings. D. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. E. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attach ment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop bases and support curbs.
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. F. For items of dimension lumber size, provide lumber grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. 2.06 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. B. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross secti on, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. C. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 2.07 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, single-floor panels as indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, 3/4 inch thick. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, zinc coating of one ounce per square foot. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metals Products, Inc. e. Silver Metal Products, Inc. f. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
R OUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exc eed those indicated per manufacturer's published values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1- inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate, nailers, blocking, and similar suppo rts to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. In accordance with “ICBO 2304.9.1.” D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. F. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. G. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide. H. Fastening Methods: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Glue and nail to framing. 2. Underlayment: Nail or staple to subflooring. END OF SECTION 06100
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 1 SECTION 06108 - EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, in cluding General and Suppl ementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. 1.2SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Exterior decks and support framing. 2.Wood decking. B.Refer to Section 06100 for preservative-treated sleepers installed on roof to support deck framing. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products and metal framing anchors. B.Material Certificates: 1.For lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values ap proved by ALSC's Board of Review. 2.For preservative-treated wood products. Indi cate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. C.Evaluation Repo rts: For the following: 1.Preservative-treated wood products. 2.Wood decking. 3.Expansion anchors. 4.Metal framing anchors. 5.Decking fasteners. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1LUMBER, GENERAL A.Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with app licable rules of grading agencies indi cated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with th e applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1.Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. 2.For items that are exposed to view in the co mpleted Work, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 2 3.Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2DIMENSION LUMBER A.Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B.Deck and Stair Framing: No. 2 grade or higher and any of the following species: 1.Hem-fir (North); NLGA. 2.Southern pine; SPIB. 3.Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. C.Dimension Lumber Posts: No. 2 grade or higher and any of the following species: 1.Hem-fir or hem-fir (North); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2.3BOARDS A.Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. B.Provide boards hand selected for freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. C.Board Decking: 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) thick radius -edged decking of any of the following species and grades: 1.Redwood, Heart Clear; RIS. 2.Western red cedar, Select Dex, WCLIB. 3.Grade Characteristics: a.Clear one face; small pin knots and worm holes allowed on back face. b.Straight grained and parallel cut. c.Free of heart centers. d.No decay, incipient decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shakes, splits, or wane. e.No discoloration. 2.4TIMBER A.Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B.Dressing: Provide timber that is ba nd-sawn unless otherwise indicated. C.Timber Posts: southern pine; No. 2, SPIB. 2.5PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A.Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA 31. B.Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative accor ding to AWPA C15 requirements for "sawn building poles and po sts as structural members."
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 3 1.Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process. C.Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium except for timber posts. D.Use process that includes water-repellent treatment. E.Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. F.After treatment, redry timber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. G.Mark treated wood with treatment qua lity mark of an inspection agency approv ed by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. H.Application: Treat all exterior rough carpe ntry unless other wise indicated. 1.Framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade. 2.Sills and ledgers. 3.Members in contact with masonry or concrete. 4.Posts.2.6FASTENERS A.General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1.Use fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating comp lying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 unless otherwise indicated. 2.For pressure-preser vative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners. 3.For plastic decking, use st ainless-steel fasteners where fast eners are exposed to view. B.Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless-steel, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load im posed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed wh en installed in conc rete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1.Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4). 2.7METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, prov ide products by one of the following: 1.Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2.Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3.KC Metals Products, Inc. 4.Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5.Southeastern Metals Ma nufacturing Co., Inc.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 4 6.USP Structural Connectors. B.Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with a llowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated on Drawings. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rati onal engineering analysis and demonstra ted by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C.Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. D.Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.8CONCEALED DECKING FASTENERS A.Deck Clips: Black oxide coated stainless-steel clips desi gned to be fastened to deck framing with screws, and to secure decking material with teeth. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, av ailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Tiger Claw Inc.; Tiger Claw Hidden Deck Fasteners. B.Deck Tracks: Formed metal strips designed to be fastened to deck framing and to secure decking material from underside with screws. Made from epoxy powder-coated, ho t-dip galvanized steel. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, av ailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Grabber Deckmaster, a division of John Wagner Associates, Inc.; Deckmaster. b.Ty-Lan Enterprises Inc.; Shadoe Track. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Set exterior rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members pl umb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit exterior rough carpentry to other construc tion; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B.Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Co nventional Wood Frame Construction" unless otherwise indicated. C.Install plastic lumber to comp ly with manufactu rer's written instructions. D.Secure decking to framing with decking fasteners selected by Architect. E.Install metal framing anchors to co mply with manufacturer's written instructions. F.Do not splice structural members between supports unless othe rwise indicated. G.Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. H.Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06108 - 5 1.Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedu le," in ICC's International Building Code. I.Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variati on between largest and sm allest treads and risers within each flight. J.Treads and Risers: Secure by screwing to carriages. Co untersink fastener head s, fill flush, and sand filler. Extend treads over carriages. K.Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freesta nding railings to newel posts and to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts and glue. END OF SECTION 06108
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-1 SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes framing using rough sawn glu-lam columns, beams, braces and trusses. B. See Drawings for sizes and locations. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked with grade stamp. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction." 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber const ruction to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAVY TIMBER, GENERAL A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review, as applicable. 1. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade stamps to surfaces that will not be exposed to view or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 2.02 TIMBER A. Provide pressure treated fabricat ed members with airborne solutio n for above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2. 1. Provide preservative treatment solution free of water repellents and other substances that might interfere when applying finishes as required for timber work.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-2 B. After fabrication and surfacing of each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. Protect from moisture damage during on site storage by shrink wrapping prior to delivery or providing a well ventilated covering. C. Provide protection for all members below grade. D. Refer to structural drawings for wood sp ecies, dimensional requirements, attachments, and connection details. E. Timber Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch WCLIB, or WWPA. F. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. G. Dressing: Provide timber that is rough sawn (Rgh), unless indicated otherwise. H. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colo rless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts. I. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.03 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil dry film thickness. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. B. Fit members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. C. Install timber connectors as indicated. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Contractor.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-3 D. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber construction if repairs are not approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 06130
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-1 SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Building paper. 4. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include co nstruction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment and ire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. 4. Building wrap. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-2 B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all plyw ood, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Comply with performa nce requirements in AWPA C27. 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classi fication marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural 1 sheathing. 1.Span Rating: per St ructural Drawings. 2.Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings. 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Roof Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Deck" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 3.Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structur al 1 sheathing. 1.Span Rating: per St ructural Drawings. 2.Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings. 2.5.1 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A.Plywood Combination Subfloor-U nderlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1.Span Rating: per St ructural Drawings. 2.Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-3 B.Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. 1.Span Rating: per St ructural Drawings. 2.Nominal Thickness: per Structural Drawings. C.Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) over board or uneven subfloors. D.Hardboard Underlayment: AHA A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1S; with back side sanded. 2.6 FASTENERS A.General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated th at comply with requiremen ts specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1.For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B.Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C.Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D.Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E.Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1.For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide scre ws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. F.Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheath ing to Cold-Formed Metal Fram ing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1.For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002. 2.For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954. 2.7 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric silicone joint sealant recommended by sheathing manufacturer. B. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers. 2.8 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-4 B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air reta rder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, re spectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Basis of Design Manufacturer: DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company) a.Tyvek® CommercialWrap® 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 152g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). C. Building-Wrap Tape: Tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphal t compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B.Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C.Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1.NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2.Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D.Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indi cated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E.Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installati on with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner th at prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F.Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture. G.Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-5 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide." B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail or staple to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. 1.Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a.Glue and nail to wood framing. b.Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c.Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry, concrete or similar materials. B.Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. 3.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.5 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap, unless otherwise indicated.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SHEATHING 06160-6 B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-in ch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to co mply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except that at flashing flanges of other constructio n, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap weather-resistant building paper ov er flashing at heads of openings. 4. After flashing has been applied, roll surface s with a hard rubber or metal roller. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather- resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION 06160
EXTE R IOR FINISH CARPENTRY06201 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Lumber siding. 3. Exterior soffits. 4. Wood shutters and hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B. Samples: For each type of siding indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicab le grading rules of inspection ag encies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. Application: Where indicated. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 3. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth) or Saw textured, per Architect.
EXTE R IOR FINISH CARPENTRY06201 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.4 LUMBER SIDING A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. B. Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. For exterior work use 9-12% lumber with final moisture of 7-12%. D. Vertical Siding: 8” minimum widt h face, tongue and groove vertical siding 1. Species and finish: per Architect, to match adjacent North Building. 2.5 WOOD SHUTTERS AND HARDWARE A.Dogs - Whittington, hand forged iron offset beacon hill shutter tiebacks, dog 3 ¼” L x ½” W x 5” H with ½” W x 4” H lag screw, sold in set of two, black powder coat finish. B.Hinges – Whittington, Wrenne iron hinge strap, hand-forged iron, sold individually, trap dimension 13” L x 7/8” W (front to back) x 2 1/8” H, ½” pin diameter, includes mounting hardware, black powder coat finish. C.Mounting location: Mount the dogs on the side of th e shutter one third of the way up from the bottom. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum fasteners, face applied, countersunk and filled, or colored to match finished siding. B. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh. C. Round Soffit Vents: Stamped aluminum louvered vents, 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter. D. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"; recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.
EXTE R IOR FINISH CARPENTRY06201 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners. 3.3 SIDING INSTALLATION A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Lumber Siding: Apply starter str ip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding. 3.4 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Shutter banding colors: 1. Red, match red stucco on the North building 2. Off-white, match Benjamin Moore Paint, 1B Seashell 926 END OF SECTION 06201
INTE R IOR FINISH CA R PENTRY06202 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 06202 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running tr im to match ex isting in each unit. 2. Interior mouldings, chair rails and other wood trim items. 3. Interior spiral stairs and railings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B. Samples: For each type of paneling indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicab le grading rules of inspection ag encies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Lumber: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20, Interior Type A. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. B. Plywood: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27, Interior Type A. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. C. Application: Where indicated. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Hardwood Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: Match existing. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. B. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2, N-grade wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
INTE R IOR FINISH CA R PENTRY06202 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Species: Match existing. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 2.4 SPIRAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: York Spi ral Stair, a Division of Duratherm Window Co. 1. Design Dimensions: 5’-0” double helix with 26” minimum clear dimension at stair run. 2. Material: stained and sealed wood, species per Architect a. Treads: 1-1/16-inch (27-mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued, stepping with half-round nosing. b. Risers: 13/16-inch (21-mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued stock. 3. Interior Railings, balusters and newel posts: Clear, kiln-dried. 4. Contact Info: www.yorkspiralstair.com; 1-800-996-5558 B. Finishing: Factory finish, install upon arrival, touchup in field with manufacturer provided materials. C. Special Instructions: Protect from dehydration of wood at all times with manufacturer provided wood sealers. Store inside unit upon delivery. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyur ethane, or resorcinol wood glue. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true , and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset. 4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
INTE R IOR FINISH CA R PENTRY06202 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.4 STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION A. Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to rough carriages. 1. Closed Stringers: Cope wall stringers to fit tightly over treads and risers. 2. Open Stringers: Miter risers and stringer at open stringers. Extend tread over open stringers and finish with bullnose edge. B. Balusters: Dovetail or mortise balusters into treads, glue, and nail in place. Let into railings and glue in place. C. Newel Posts: Secure newel posts to stringers, ro ugh carriages, and risers with countersunk-head wood screws and glue. D. Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts and to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue. Assemble railings at goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue. END OF SECTION 06202
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1 SECTION 07141 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cold fluid-applied polyurethane or latex-rubber waterproofing for use on concrete substrates at: 1. Foundation walls at basement level only. 2. Horizontal decks 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside an d outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Product test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 STORAGE A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufactur er. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fo rm, signed by manufacturer, and agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight for a period of five years after date of Substantial Completion.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the following: 1. Spray-applied Waterproofing: a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; “Barricoat”, 60 mil application thickness, applied in two coats. B. Other Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, bu t are not limited to, the following: 1. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Seamless Membrane. b. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW-525. c. Cetco; LDC 60. d. Karnak Corporation; One-Kote System. e. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 201. f. Miradri, T. C.; Miraseal. g. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Neogard 7403/7405. h. Pacific Poly mers, Inc.; Elasto-Deck B.T.i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 500. j. Sonneborne, Div. of ChemRex Inc.; HLM 5000. k. Tremco; Tremproof 60. l. United Coatings; Elastall 1000. 2. Two-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Futura Coatings, Inc., Subsidiary of IPI International, Inc.; Futura-Flex 518. b. Gaco Western Inc.; LM-60. c. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 222. 3. Single-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Permagard 7410. b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 101. c. 3M Construction Markets; Scotch Clad 5893/5864. 4. Two-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing: a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW 703 Liquiseal. b. Lymtal International, Inc.; Isoflex 550 SP. c. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 102. d. Stellar-Mark; Pro-Deck 7520. e. 3M Construction Markets; FC 100. 5. Two-Component, Unmodified Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Procor.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 3 2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836. B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factor y-formulated polyu rethane or epoxy primer. C. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining uncured sheet neoprene. 1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive. D. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage." B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to 1 side and a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m). C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43- mm) sieve laminated to 1 side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 L/min. per m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust- free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. 1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method acco rding to ASTM D 4263. B. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. E. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 4 1. Apply a double thickness of waterproofing and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. F. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instru ctions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. G. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. 3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.3 mm) at any point. B. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels to substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.4 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and so iling from adjacent construction us ing cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07141
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). 4. Concealed building insulation. 6. Loose-fill building insulation. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Sound attenuation insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units fo r each type of exposed insulation indicated. C. Product test reports. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of build ing insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulatio n and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent ne cessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not de liver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. B. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type VI, with a density of 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m), faced with insulation manufacturer's standard nonwoven filtration fabric and fabricated with 1 side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Owens Corning. b. T. Clear Corporation. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and with a nominal density to achieve an STC rating of 50 for the wall assembly. 1. Location: Acoustical partitions, at locations indicated on plans. In stall to fill space and as required to achieve STC ratings indicated on plans. 2. Available Manufacturers:
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning. B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, T ype IA or Types IA and IB; faced on 1 side with foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following nominal density and thermal resistivity. 1. Location: attached to face of studs on exteri or walls at locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Owens Corning FIBERGLAS™ 700 Series a. Product: Type 703 b. Depth: 3” thick c. R-Value: R13 d. Flame spread: 25 per ASTM E 84 e. Smoke developed: 50 per ASTM E 84 f. Density: 6.0 pcf g. K-value: 0 .23 2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor- retarder membrane on 1 face. 1. Install kraft-faced batts below enclosed ceiling. 2. Install foil-faced batts above ceiling. 2.5 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Location: Acoustical partitions, at locations indicat ed on plans. Install to fill space and as required to achieve STC ratings indicated on plans. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Thermafiber. Basis of Design Product: Creased Thermafiber SAFB at demising walls.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 C. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.6 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5. 2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, sel f-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 2.9 INSULATION LOCATIONS A. Provide building insulation of rigid and blanket types as applicable: 1. Exterior Walls: a. R-24 Glass fiber blanket type between studs. a. R-13 Rigid fiberglass insulation Type 703 Owen s Corning, 3” thick attached to face of studs. Flame spread 25, ASTM E84, Smoke developed 50, ASTM E84. 2. Stair Tower Walls: a. R-24 Glass fiber blanket type between studs. 3. Ceilings and Soffits: Glass fiber blan ket type; R-38, with foil-facing. 4. Foundation walls (exterior face): Rigid, 2 inches thick: R-10, 0.1 U factor. 5. Slabs on grade: Rigid, 2 inches thick, at perimeter. 6. Interior walls (acoustic): Sound attenuation blankets per wall types on plans to achieve STC 45 rating at unit demising walls and floor/ceiling assemblies. See section 01230 Alternate #1 and sheet A0.3 for details. 7. Demising Walls: Creased Thermafiber SAFB, basis of design. B. Provide vapor barrier at building perimeter. Vapor barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene sheet. C. Perimeter insulation 2 inches thick four feet high, cl osed cell expanded polystyrene. At first floor slab on grade area, apply vertically at the foundation wall. D. Glass fiber batt insulation (1.7 p.c.f.) R-19 at wa lls (stud cavity) at all heated spaces, friction-fit, use mechanical fasteners where required. Provide Kraft paper backing on batts used below the ceiling line and foil-faced above the ceiling. E. Acoustical partition insulation: Semi-rigid glass fiber (3 p.c.f.), 3 1/2 inch thick, or mineral wool blankets (full thickness). Friction fit between st uds. Provide in partitions unit demising walls,
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 floor/ceiling assemblies, mechanical room, and all separations between public and non-public spaces. Refer also to Division 9, gypsum board systems, and to plans for interior wall types requiring insulation. F. Perimeter wall firesafing and sealants, firesafing at pipe, duct, and conduit penetrations, and top-of-wall firesafing where required to maintain fire ratings. G. Fill all void spaces in exterior assemblies with glass fiber blanket insulation. 2.10 AUXILIARY INSU LATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cro ss ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 2.11 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envel op entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6 B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insula tion units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Se t in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect top surface of horiz ontal insulation from damage du ring concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved in to place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units w ith vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder , and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity he ights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneou s voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Acoustical partition insulation: Semi-rigid glass fiber (3 p.c.f.), 3 1/2 inch thick, or mineral wool blankets (full thickness). Friction fit between st uds. Provide in partitions unit demising walls, floor/ceiling assemblies, mechanical room, and all separations between public and non-public spaces. Refer also to Division 9, gypsum board systems, and to plans for interior wall types requiring insulation.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 7 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Window wood trim color: a. In buff color stucco field and buff color vertical siding field, match C2 Paint, C2-362 P, Kalahari. b. In green stucco field match Benjamin Moore Paint, HC-123, Kennebunkport Green. END OF SECTION 07210
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-1 SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 3. Ridge vents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For asphalt shingles, ridge and hip cap sh ingles, and ridge vent. C. Product test reports. D. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip ca p shingles ridge vents and self-adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; AS TM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty period. 1. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first 5 years nonprorated, or manufacturer’s standard warranty, whichever is greater. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-1 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. Color selections by Architect, as selected from manufacturer’s full range. 1. Basis of Design Products: a.Steep Slope Roofing: CertainT eed Corporation; Independence. b.Color per Architect. 1) Alternate: Owens Corning Co.; Oakridge Pro with 30-year warranty. b. Low Slope Roofing: Certainteed, Laminated Shingles, Landmark Series, 30 year, with low slope underlayment WinterGuard HT (or approved equal, WR Grace Ice and Water Shield). B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 55-mil- (1.4-mm-) thick sheet; glass-fiber-mat-reinforced, SBS-modi fied asphalt; mineral-granule surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Face d: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0- mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene -film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 2.4 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigi d section high-density polypropylene or other UV- stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven ge otextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Basis of Design Product: Cor-A-Vent X-5 Xtreme Ridge Ventilation System, or approved substitute. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Eave Ventilation: 1. Basis of Design Product: Cor-A-Vent S-400 strip vent. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. C. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-1 2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Sheet Metal: Anodized aluminum, Kynar dark bronze finish. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufactur er if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asp halt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof ed ge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) over fascia at eaves and rakes. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shin gles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches (300 mm) beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle c ourses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2 inches (50 mm) short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-1 1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches (150 mm) of valley center. 2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same expo sure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 3.4 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Asphalt Shingles: Match asphalt roofing at North building; CertainTeed Corporation, Independence. Color by Architect. END OF SECTION 07311
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 1 SECTION 07531 - ETHYLENE-PROPY LENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, in cluding General and Suppl ementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. 1.2SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Fully adhered EPDM membrane over decking. 2.Vapor retarder. 3.Roof insulation. B.Locations: 1.Flat roofs. 2.Roof decks. 3.Balconies. C.Refer to Section 07650 Pedestal Paver System for roof deck systems applied over EPDM system specified in this section. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of term s related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base fl ashings that remain water tight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B.Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one a nother under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.5SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include pl ans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1.Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2.Tapered insulation, including slopes.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 2 3.Insulation fastening patterns. C.Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1.12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2.12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of roof insulation. 3.12-inch (300-mm) length of metal termination bars. 4.12-inch (300-mm) length of battens. D.Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifyi ng that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. E.Qualification Data: For In staller and manufacturer. F.Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests per formed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency , for components of roofing system. G.Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. H.Maintenance Data: For roofing syst em to include in maintenance manuals. I.Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. J.Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacture r that has UL listing for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C.Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testin g agency with the expe rience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D.Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing sy stem from same manufacturer as roofing membrane. E.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identi cal products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. F.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Revi ew methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Meet with Owner; Architect; Owne r's insurer if applicable; testing and inspectin g agency representative; roofing In staller; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 3 installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, in cluding installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2.Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3.Review and finalize construction schedu le and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4.Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5.Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6.Review base flashings, special roo fing details, roof drainage, ro of penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other constru ction that will affect roofing system. 7.Review governing regula tions and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8.Review temporary protec tion requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9.Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.7DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, dat e of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B.Store liquid materials in their original undamag ed containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by ro ofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liqui d material from direct sunlight. 1.Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be app lied within its stated shelf life. C.Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deter ioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Compl y with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling , storing, and protecting during installation. D.Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.1.8PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9WARRANTY A.Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulatio n, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway product s, for the following warranty period: 1.Warranty Period: Ten years from da te of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 4 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where subparag raph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.2.2EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A.EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: 1.Products: a.Carlisle SynTec Incorporated b.Firestone c.Versico. d.WeatherBond 2.Thickness: 60 mils, nominal, or better 3.Reinforcement: reinforced if available. 4.Exposed Face Color: Architect select Black or Grey. 2.3AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofi ng system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1.Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of author ities having jurisdiction. B.Sheet Flashing: 45-mil (1.5-mm) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C.Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. D.Seaming Material: Single-component butyl splici ng adhesive and splice cleaner, combined with Manufacturer's standard synthetic-r ubber polymer primer and 3-inch (75-mm) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. E.Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match ro ofing membrane. F.Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. G.Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. H.Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick, prepunched. I.Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 5 J.Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.4ROOF INSULATION A.General: Provide preformed roof insulation boar ds that comply with requ irements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B.Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. Minimum thickness 1 ½”. C.Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulatio n boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. D.Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge st rips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.5INSULATION ACCESSORIES A.General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B.Cover Board: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, orient ed strand board, 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick. C.Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standar d cold fluid-applied adhesi ve formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. 2.6WALKWAYS A.Walkpad: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 100 mil thick, of materials acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Color: Grey. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with In staller present, for comp liance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting perfo rmance of roofing system: 1.Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2.Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers ar e securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3.Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 4.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2PREPARATION
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 6 A.Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detri mental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B.Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C.Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginn ing work on adjoining roofing. D.Install acoustical roof deck rib in sulation strips, specified in Divisi on 5 Section "Steel Deck," according to acoustical roof deck ma nufacturer's written instructions. 3.3VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A.Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively. 1.Seal laps with tape or with roofing membrane manufacturer's standard adhesive. B.Completely seal vapor retarder at terminati ons, obstructions, and penetrations. 3.4INSULATION INSTALLATION A.Coordinate installing membrane roofing system component s so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B.Comply with membrane roofing system manu facturer's written instructions for in stalling roof insulation. C.Install tapered insulation under area of r oofing to conform to slopes indicated. D.Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickn ess is 2 inches (50 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. E.Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F.Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of in sulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1.Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2.Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3.Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G.Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1.Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 2.Minimum thickness: 1 ½”, installed in two layers with staggered joints.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 7 H.Install slip sheet over insulation and immediately beneath sheet. 3.5ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A.Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane an d allow to relax before installing. B.Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain un iform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer . Stagger end laps. C.Bonding Adhesive: Apply bon ding adhesive to substrate and und erside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. D.Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. E.Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap seal ant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. F.Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap seal ant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. G.Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. 3.6FLASHING INSTALLATION A.Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B.Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C.Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and out side corners with sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer. D.Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E.Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld con tinuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. F.Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically an chor to substrate thro ugh termination bars. 3.7COATING INSTALLATION A.Apply coatings to roofing membrane or base fl ashings according to manufacturer's written recommendations, by spray, roller, or ot her suitable application method.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 8 3.8WALKWAY INSTALLATION A.Walkways: Install walkway pads in locations indicated. Heat weld or adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofi ng system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roof ing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. B.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C.Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily , according to manufacturer's written instructions, and repair seam sample areas. D.Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing syst em manufacturer's technical pers onnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1.Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3.10PROTECTING AND CLEANING A.Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wea r during remainder of co nstruction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and ex tent in a written report, with copies to Arch itect and Owner. B.Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does no t comply with requiremen ts, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and accordi ng to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION 07531
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMB R ANE ROOFING07551 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 07551 - APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes APP-modified bituminous membrane roofing for use on new and replaced roof decks.1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop-applied roofin g asphalt and 75 centipoise for mechanical spreader- applied roofing asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roof ing system from or approved by roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, fo r application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMB R ANE ROOFING07551 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re quirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. APP-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: a. American Lubricants Co., Inc. b. Bitec Inc. c. CertainTeed Corporation. d. Dibiten USA. e. Ecology Roof Systems. f. Firestone Building Products Company. g. GAF Materials Corporation. h. Garland Co., Inc. (The). i. Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc. j. Honeywell Commercial Roofing Systems. k. ICA, Inc. l. IKO Industries. m. Johns Manville International, Inc. n. Koppers Industries, Inc. o. Malarkey Roofing Company. p. Performance Roof Systems, Inc. q. Polyglass USA, Inc. r. Texas Refinery Corporation. s. U.S. Intec, Inc. 2.2 APP-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP- modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: Gray. 2.3 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). 2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows:
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMB R ANE ROOFING07551 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Granule Color: Gray. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing membrane. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. D. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufact urer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with roofing membrane and base flashings. E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos fr ee, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.B. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insula tion boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulati on shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMB R ANE ROOFING07551 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standar d cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requiremen ts in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry." D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. E. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 7 26, glass-fiber insulation board. 2.9 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, rei nforced asphaltic composition, slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: 24 inches wide. B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: Gray. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. B. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure pref ormed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roo fing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. E. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMB R ANE ROOFING07551 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado F. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." B. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24), install roofing membrane sheets parallel with slope. C. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulati on and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipita tion or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asph alt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. E. Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively. F. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive. 2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. G. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. H. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMB R ANE ROOFING07551 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at te rminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping wh ere metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads in cold-applied adhesive, using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07551
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fix ed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. D. Maintenance data. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protec tive film before shipping.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 2. Color: Dark bronze, to match sheet metal roofing. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, me tallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 4. Color: Dark bronze, to match sheet metal roofing. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C). B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using pl astic caps or factory- applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanent ly elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonst aining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric po lymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and - welded corners and junctions or with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick or Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Finish: Mill, where not exposed to view. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to de sign, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. 2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnis h with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as c opings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate he ad, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer fo r installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. F. Soldered Joints: Not allowed. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and sold ered or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal wa tertight with sealant. 1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between. E. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofing. F. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. G. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with el evation of conductor head ri m 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper or gutter discharge. H. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint cove rs at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clam p flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM07620 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies” and “Stone Masonry." C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete” and Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies”. D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: In stall continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metallic-coated steel surfaces of s ubstances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Rake, eave and parapet fascia paint color: dark brown, match C2 Paint, C2-354 A, Beaucoup. END OF SECTION 07620
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07650-1 SECTION 07650 – PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Pedestal system used to support precast concrete pavers set on pedestals, over waterproofed decks. 2.Precast pavers for installation on pedestals. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics 2. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating 3. ASTM D 1525 -Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company with no less than three (3) years documented experience in the installation of exterior pedestal mounted pavers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 or other applicable section in Division 1. B. Samples: 1. Pedestals: Submit sample of each type of pedestal. 2. PVC Pipe: Submit 12-inch long sample of PVC pipe. C. Shop Drawings: Show general layout of paved areas, and layout of pedestal sy stem, including sloped conditions; include dimensions, edge details, adjacent construction, and special conditions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with 016000 or other applicable section in Division 1. B. Store pedestal support system and pavers on platforms a minimum of 4 inches off the ground. Cover with polyethylene and protect from contact with materials which would ca use staining or discoloration. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Submit in accordance with Section 017700 or other applicable section in Division 1. B. The contractor performing this work, warrants th at their work will remain free from defects of labor and materials used in conjunction with their work in accordance with the general conditions for this project, for a period of five (5) years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM A. Paver Pedestal System: Tile Tech Pedestal System ,as manufactured by Tile Tech Pavers, 213 380-5560, www.TileTechPavers.com Pedestal system consists of pe destals and caps, including “snap-fit” top and bottom shims and leveling plates, as required for adjustme nt and leveling of pavers; each pedestal tested to support at ultimate failure compression load of 11,500 psi , with maximum height of 22 inches, per the Lab Test No. E77612, performed by Northwest Laboratories, Seattle WA, on December 2, 2003. Lab test results as follows:
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07650-2 SUBMITTED: 4" SDR 35/ASTM D3034 PVC Pipe - Paver Pede stals With End Cap TEST METHOD: Per Customer's Instructions Load Per End Use Condition TEST RESULTS: (Sample Conditioning – 68 degrees F) Sample Sample Length (in.) Load, Lbs. Failure Mode 1 1.5 11,930 PVC Pipe 2 2.0 11,730 PVC Pipe 3 4.0 11,740 PVC Pipe 4 6.0 11,810 PVC Pipe 5 8.0 11,900 PVC Pipe 6 10.0 11,650 PVC Pipe 7 12.0 11,670 PVC Pipe 8 14.0 11,650 PVC Pipe 9 16.0 11,740 PVC Pipe 10 18.0 11,050 PVC Pipe 11 20.0 10,085 PVC Pipe 12 22.0 11,500 PVC Pipe 2.2 PEDESTAL PAVERS A.Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates. 1.Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Tile Tech Pavers, Inc. a.Product: StampTech® Slate b.Color: Tan Slate. c.Size: 15 ¾ x 15 ¾ x 1 ½”. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Top Cap: ½-inch high with 1/8-inch joint spacers; ABS plastic composed of Dow “ABS 70” plastic meeting following physical properties: 1. Characteristics: a) 6300 psi Tensile strength at yield, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. b) 350,000 psi flexural modulus, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. c) 10,500 psi flexural strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. d) 226 degrees F., vicat soft ening point, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1525. e) Ozone Resistant. B. Bottom Cap: ½-inch high with smooth protective edges; ABS plastic composed of Dow “ABS 70” plastic meeting following physical properties: 1. Characteristics: a) 6300 psi Tensile strength at yield, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. b) 350,000 psi flexural modulus, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. c) 10,500 psi flexural strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. d) 226 degrees F., vicat soft ening point, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1525. e) Ozone Resistant.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07650-3 C. Top and Bottom Shims: 1/8 and 1/16-inch thick, lock to top and botto m caps; ABS plastic composed of Dow “ABS 70” plastic meeting following physical properties: 1. Characteristics: a) 6300 psi Tensile strength at yield, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. b) 350,000 psi flexural modulus, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. c) 10,500 psi flexural strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. d) 226 degrees F., vicat soft ening point, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1525. e) Ozone Resistant. D. Spacers: 1-inch long x ½-inch high 1/8-inch thick used with bottom shim for heights lower than ½-inch; ABS plastic composed of Dow “ABS 70” plastic meeting following physical properties: 1. Characteristics: a) 6300 psi Tensile strength at yield, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. b) 350,000 psi flexural modulus, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. c) 10,500 psi flexural strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. d) 226 degrees F., vicat soft ening point, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1525. e) Ozone Resistant. E. Buffer Pads: Thermoplastic Elastomer (TPE) “Kraton”, meeting minimum physical requirements of following tests: 1. Tensile strength and elongation, break at 830psi, and elongation at break minimum of 270% per ASTM D 412 2. Tear resistance of 18psi, per ASTM D 624 3. Shore Hardness (A Scale): 70. F. Pedestal Joist Plate: 1/4-inch high with 1/8-inch joint spacers; ABS plastic composed of Dow “ABS 70” plastic. 2.4 COMPONENTS – SEPARATELY SUPPLIED BY INSTALLER OR OTHERS A. Pedestal Pipe (NOT supplied with pedestal com ponents by Tile Tech Pavers): 4-inch diameter PVC sewer pipe, type SDR 35 meeting ASTM D-3034 and F-679; pr ovide pipe for use in the pedestal system, meeting following physical properties: a. Characteristics: 4.215 inches outside diamet er; 3.890 inches inside diameter. B. Protection Course: 1. Protection board (required over insulated BUR systems, and when specifi ed for use over bituminous asphalt-based waterproofing): W.R. Meadows “Vibraflex” or equal, minimum 3/8- inch thick asphaltic composition protection board. 2. Insulation (when specified): Dow Styrofoam “Highload 100” or equal, mi nimum compressive strength of 100 psi recommended for foam plastic insula tion placed beneath Pedestal System to prevent damage to the waterproof membrane. 2.5 PERIMETER CONTAINMENT AND SUPPORT A. The complete assembly of insulation (if used), protec tion board (if used), drainage mat (if used), pedestals and pavers must be restrained at the perimeter of th e walk deck area. Cumulative movement in excess of 1/8 inch will void the Tile Tech Pavers Pedestal System warranty. Perimeter parapet walls, concrete dividers or other perimeter restraint must be capable of resisting lateral forces (including seismic and wind). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07650-4 A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of othe r trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commen ce. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory co nditions are resolved. Begi nning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Verify that substrates, membranes, and protection bo ards are ready for installation of pedestal system, and pavers. 1. The substrate that is to receive pedestals shall have positive slope to provide adequate drainage in accordance with good building practices. 2. Inspect to insure that all substrates have been properly prepared to accept the pedestals. Any surface defect which may impair performance of the pe destals or waterproofing membrane shall be appropriately repaired. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Establish accurate lines, levels, and pattern . B. Assure that the surface to accept the pedestals is clean and free of debris which would impair the performance of the pedestal system. C. Insulation and/or protec tion board must be applied over the waterproofing/roofing substrate. If specified, drainage mat, insulation and/or protection board must be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations. If protection is specified only under the pedestal, then each pad must extend beyond the edge of the Pedestal System bottom cap or Buffer Pad, by a minimum of 2-inches. 3.3 PEDESTAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. GRID LAYOUT AND ELEVATIONS 1. Layout the paver and pedestal grid layout, starting poi nt and finished elevations in accordance with approved shop drawings which ha ve been reviewed by the A/E or Designer, installing Contractor and Owner's Representative. B. LEVEL INSTALLATION 1. Establish starting point and finishe d elevation of the paver surface, the support system elevation (finished elevation less the paver thickness) is est ablished and marked around th e perimeter using transit, water level or laser leveling device. 2. Take measurements, and provide two (2) perpendicular chalklines "snapped" on the surface to receive the pedestals. Use these lines as a reference to check the paver layout during installation and to assure a square layout. Installation of pavers can now begin, one row at a time. 3. At the starting row of pavers, a pedestal must be placed where each grid line meets the perimeter.Remove two spacer tabs in line with one another from atop each Pedestal System top cap, located along the perimeter. Adjust each to the elevation marked on the perimeter. 4. Position the pedestal as close to th e edge of the perimeter as po ssible, with the two remaining spacer tabs aligned with the grid line. Using the elevation marked on the perimeter, stretch a mason’s line along and slightly ahead of the second ro w of pedestals. A laser leveling device may also be used for this purpose. 5. Top Shims: Slight irregularities in paver thickness and/or deck heights, can be compensated for by using one or more of four pie-cut segments of Top Shims which is placed under a paver corner(s) atop the Top Cap at intersection quadrants. 6. Bottom Shims: Slight irregularities in paver thickness and/or deck heights (with additional slope requirements), can be compensated for by using one or more of the Bottom Shims which is placed below the Bottom Cap. 7. Buffer Pads and Protection Board: Install Buffer Pads and 12” x 12” x 3/8” thick protection board (W.R.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07650-5 Meadows “Vibraflex”) below each Bottom Cap of the pedestal assembly, when installing the Pedestal System over: a) Built-Up roofing (BUR) membranes that are instal led over rigid or sem i-rigid insulation; b) Elastomeric type waterproof and/or roofing me mbrane coatings, so as to prevent damage to the membrane or coating system; C. SLOPED INSTALLATION 1. Compensation to maintain a level paver surface over sloping substrates, can be accomplished using a combination of the following: a) PVC Pipe length cut to varying lengths to compensate for slope; b) Bottom Shims: Place one or more Bottom Shims under the Bottom Cap, to compensate for up to 1 inch per foot of slope. c) Top Shims: Place the Top Shims (pie-shaped pieces) on to the Top Cap, in increments of 1/16 inch to precisely level the top on substrates with slope of up to 5/8 inch per foot. D. PERIMETER CONTAINMENT 1. Any section of paver, pedestal or protection cour se which is not restrained by an abutting wall or parapet must be "boxed in" by some field installed restrai nt. No movement should be allowed at the perimeter of a paver system greater than 1/8 of an inch. E. PEDESTAL JOIST PLATE SYSTEM 1. Joist Plate is placed directly on a 4x6 treated wood joist (or where existing deck joists are 2x6 or 2x 8, “sister” another treated wood 2x to the sides of existing joists). 2. Joist Plate serves as a spacer both horizontally and vertically, at each quadrant of the paver or gauged natural product (stone or equivalent) suitable for a waking surface. 3. Screw or nail in, but with a stabilized edge restraint (perimeter containment – see paragraph above) for the pavers, and at the proper spacing for the pa vers will serve to align and level pavers which are applied directly to wood joists. a. If the pavers are an inconsistent depth, or the wood is not exactly level, the top and/or bottom shims can be used to adjust for the inconsistency. 4. The Joist Plate System can be used over built up roof decks where fi xed heights are allowed, 1/8” above membrane. 3.4 PAVER INSTALLATION A. Install pavers in accordance with paver manufacturer’s written instructions. Carefully align the Top Cap joint spacers with paver edges. Level pavers in each succeeding row. C. Install pavers tightly butted into pedestals. Form minim um joint widths. D. Shim or adjust to level and as necessary to prevent rocking of pavers. E. Installation Tolerances: 1. Step in Face Alignment Between Pa ver Faces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 2. Jog in Joint Alignment Between Pave r Sections: Maximum 1/16 inch. F. Do not use pavers with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects which might be exposed to view in the finished work. G. Machine cut pavers as necessary to fit the conditions indicated. Joints shall be no wider than the typical paver to paver joint. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PAVER PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07650-6 A. Continuing and Final Inspection: Inspect often during installation to assure that grid (spacer) lines are straight and consistent, and that pavers are level, and where necessary, install Top or Bottom Shims; confirm that heights in excess of fifteen (15) inches have been braced in accordance with Tile Tech Pavers written instructions. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean soiled surfaces using solution which will not harm concrete pavers. Consult paver supplier for recommended type. B. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION 07650
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM07720-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 07720 – SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Deck-mount snow fences. B. Roof ladders & platforms. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be installed, including model number, material, color, finish and installation instructions. C. Verification Samples: Two representative samples of each type of product to be installed. D. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's engineered layout chart based on roof material, code ground snow load, roof slope and sheathing thickness. E. Manufacturer's Certification: Manufacturer's standard warranty stating in writing that systems and layout have been engineered for project conditions and location and are suitable for use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Convene a pre-installation con ference prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall incl ude review of layout and installation details. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide Installer's two-year warranty on workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: TRA-MAGE Roof Accessory Systems, which is located at: 1657 S. 580 East P. O. Box 682 ; American Fork, UT 84003; Toll Free Tel: 800-606-8980; Tel: 801-756- 8666; Fax: 801-756-7891; Email: info@tra-mage.com; Web: www.tra-mage.com
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM07720-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 SNOW FENCES A. Mountin g: 1. Deck Mount, Two Pipes; Model: D-2HL. 2. Deck Mount, Three Pipes; Model: D-3H. 3. Deck Mount, Four Pipes; Model: D-4H. B. Components: 1. Pipe: 1-inch (25 mm) diameter, 10-foot (3 050 mm) sections, each section includes one union. 2. Mounting Bracket: 1/4 inch (6 mm) plate. 3. Mounting Bracket: 3/16 inch (10mm) plate. 4. Material: Zinc plated steel 5. Material: Flouropolymer-coated steel. C. Base Size: 1. Base Size: Standard. 2. Base Size: Extended. D. Finish: 1. Finish: Kynar (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer) Paint. 2. Color: Dark Bronze, Architect confirm thro ugh submittal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until roofing work is complete in the area in which products will be installed. B. If roof-covering materials are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Snow Fences: Install one row of snow fences at the eave over the plate line. Secure to the rafters. Space supports every 2 feet (610 mm) or per manufacturer's recommendations. Add additional rows according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Brackets for rafter-mounted snow fence shall be installed prior to roof sheathing. 3.3 ROOF ACCESS EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Roof Davits: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Repair or replace damaged prod ucts before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07720
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 07841 – THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes firestopping for the following: 1. Penetrations through fire-resi stance-rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Fi restop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire- resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetrati on firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indi cated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to co ntact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist: 1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located ou tside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Where firestop systems protect penet rations located in construction containing doors required to have a temperature-rise rating. 4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch (100 mm) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross-sectional area. D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per UL-2079, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resist ance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provid e firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetrati on firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke- developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each type of material to be installed. 2. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. B. Schedule: 1. Indicate type of materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. 2. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition. 3. Submit documentation, including illustrations , from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Samples for Selection and Verification of Color: Architect reserves the right to require sealant color samples for exposed areas. D. Product test reports from, and based on tests perf ormed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that co mplies with the foll owing requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow- up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch (20 mm) below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 3. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through- penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. 5. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per UL-2079 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa), as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements: 6. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 7. Joint sealants, including backing materials, b ear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. B. Information on Drawings referring to specifi c design designations of through-penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on co nditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and de signated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of propose d substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single-Installer Qualifications: Engage a single experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping ma nufacturer as having the ne cessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to th e Contractor or to an Installer enga ged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. D. Provide firestopping products containing no detect able asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." E. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirem ents of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." G. Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for compliance with requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels iden tifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle firestopping materials to preve nt their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestoppin g when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestoppi ng manufacturers or when substra tes are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestoppi ng manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behi nd other construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each installation.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firesto pping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire stopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufact urer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. f. Temporary forming materials. g. Substrate primers. h. Collars. i. Steel sleeves. C. Applications: Provide fi restopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance an d other requirements. 2.02 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. B. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation. C. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. D. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant pu tty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elast omeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. F. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing AS TM E 136, with flam e-spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84. G. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado I. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elasto mer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-com ponent, s ilicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade fo r both opening conditions. K. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Sol vent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic- polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade fo r both opening conditions. 2.03 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated th at complies with ASTM C 920 requirem ents, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants.B. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. 2.04 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum pe rformance characteristics for application indicated.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with In staller present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with in stallation until unsatisfactory conditi ons have been corrected.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and pen etrating items to pro duce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fire stopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.03 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through- penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instru ctions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firest op systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through-pen etration firestop systems by prov en techniques to produce the following results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they con tact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation inst ructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants du ring application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPSYSTEMS07841-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configur ation indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting agency empl oyed and paid by Owner will exami ne completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements. B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. C. Do not proceed to enclose fi restopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued. D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacen t to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping during and after curing per iod from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS07842 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 07842 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Floor-to-floor joints. 2. Floor-to-wall joints. 3. Head-of-wall joints. 4. Wall-to-wall joints. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For joints in the following constructions, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed: 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 4. Exterior curtain-wall assemblies and fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. B. Fire Resistance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings and movement capabilities indicated, but with assembly ratings not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions in which joints are located, as determined by UL 2079. 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time test. C. Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity and insulation ratings indicated as determined by UBC Standard 26-9 and UL 2079. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construc tion conditio n in which joints are installed and relationships to adjoining con struction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS07842 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations , from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From fire-resistive joint system manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with fill materials. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire-resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the ICBO Evaluation Service. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to fire-resistive joint system manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect fill materials. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to deter mine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rap id, optimum adhesion of fill materials to joint substrates.a. Perform tests under environmental conditi ons replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, forming materials, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per ICBO ES AC30 and are qualified for types of joints and joint movement capabilities indicated in a current Evaluation Report by the ICBO Evaluation Service. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS07842 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicom ponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fi re-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each fire-resistive joint system is based on products named in Part 2 articles. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one of the following: a. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1) DAP Inc. 2) Firestop Systems Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) 3M Fire Protection Products. 5) United States Gypsum Company. b. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: 1) Specified Technologies Inc. 2) United States Gypsum Company.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS07842 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer pr esent, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and me thods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS07842 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to join ts as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such prot ection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07842
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applica tions, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces an d frames of interio r doors, windows, and elevator entrances. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: f. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. g. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. h. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring. i. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. j. Other joints as indicated. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide exterior elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and main tain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating jo int substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color chart s consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the standard range of colors availa ble for each produ ct exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealan t required. Install jo int sealants in 1/2- inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Application shall be done by a Joint Sealant Subcontractor with five years experience. Submit documentation to the Architect and Owner B. Source Limitations: Ob tain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Manufacturer Technical Assistance: Materials shall be supplied by manufacturer who will provide qualified technical assistance at the Project site. D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standar d test methods. 3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of jo int sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of join t sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants un til contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Submit 2 copies of written 2-year special warranty agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as airtight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion , cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, or general durability; or appear in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer’s data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. B. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Tremco Manufacturing. 2. Dow Corning. 3. General Electric. 4. Pecora Corporation. 5. Maneco International. 6. Sika Corporation. 7. Sonneborn Building Products. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additio nal movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint- Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substra tes, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. Silicone rubber-base, one-part elastomeric sealant, complying ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 2. Use acid-type for non-porous joint surfaces, and non-acid type where one or both joint surfaces are porous. 3. For wet areas use type compounded specifically for mildew resistance. 4. Use for interior joints between equipment or countertops and walls. E. Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant: 1. Polyurethane-based, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade NS (non-sag), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Dynatrol II.” 2. Optional Sealant: Contractor may, as an opti on, provide 1-component silicone sealant, “Silpruf” by General Electric or #790 by Dow-Corning in lieu of above. 3. For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self- leveling), Tremco “Dymeric ”, Pecora “Urexpan NR-200.” F. Exterior Sealant: 1. Two-Component Polyurethane: Polyurethane-base d, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grad e NS (non-sag), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Dynatrol II.” 2. One-Component Silicone: a. Precast Concrete Surfaces: #790 by Dow-Corning b. Stone and Glass Surfaces: #795 by Dow-Corning 3. For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self- leveling), Tremco “Dymeric ”, Pecora “Urexpan NR-200.” 2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product. B. One-component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic emulsi on sealant, one-part, mildew resistant and paintable, complying with ASTM C834, recommended by ma nufacturer for general use as an exposed building construction sealan t, Pecora AC-20. 2.05 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Sch edule at the end of Part 3, prov ide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a) PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. b) AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. c) SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a) BA-98; Pecora Corp. b) Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc. 2.06 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: For each product of this description indicated in the Preformed Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral- curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. B. Preformed Foam Sealants: For each product of this de scription indicated in the Preformed Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide ma nufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; factory produc ed in precompressed sizes and in ro ll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal wh en compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complying with the following: 1. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. 2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Density: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side with protective wrapping. 2.07 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. 3. Type: Any material indicated above.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of rem aining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide product s with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other pl astic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent ma terial compatible with joint sealants and su rfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other co nditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint subs trates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protec tive coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates wher e recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or dam aged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape imme diately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manu facturer's written installation inst ructions for products and applications indicated, unless mo re stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications , and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support seal ants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, punc ture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each join t configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Imme diately after sealant app lication and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified bel ow to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Apply a bead of silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's printed schedule and covering a bonded area of not less than a 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead inside of masking tape by 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of horizontal joints before installing vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At end of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to pr oduce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambi ent temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construc tion operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Comple tion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove dama ged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistin guishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 07920
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES08110 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames, including transom frames, sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labeled and non-labeled, as scheduled. 2. Provide hollow metal doors at non-public spaces and as indicated (refer to Door Schedule). B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisio ns of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 06200 – Finish Carpentry 2. 08210 – Flush Wood Doors 3. 08710 – Finish Hardware 4. 08810 – Glass and Glazing 5. 09900 – Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. NFPA-80-1995 – Fire Doors and Windows 2. ANSI/SDI-100-98 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors an Frames 3. SDI-105-91 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 4. SDI-107-78 – Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application) 5. ANSI-A250.4-1994 – Steel Door s and Frames Physical Endurance 6. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES 1. NFPA-101-1994 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003 – International Building Code 3. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities 4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES08110 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door and frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those on the contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information: a. Material thickness and/or gauge. b. Door core material. c. Mortises and reinforcements. d. Anchorage types. e. Locations of exposed fasteners. f. Glazed, louvered and paneled openings. g. Mounting locations of standard hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant. B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute (SDI.) C. FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES 1. All labeled fire door assemblies to be of a type that have been classified and listed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA80 and test in compliance with NFPA-252, UL-10B, and UBC-7-2. A physical label is to be affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility; embossed labels are acceptable on standard 3 sided door frames. 2. For openings required to be fire rated exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer’s certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engi neering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The supplier shall deliver all materials to th e project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Supplier shall coordinate de livery times and schedules with the contractor.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES 08110 - 3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to any fact ory-finished doors. Mark all doors and frames with opening numbers as shown on the cont ract documents and shop drawings. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods as directed. D. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry and secure place. 1. Place units on minimum 4” high wood blocking. 2. Avoid use of non-vented pl astic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide ¼” spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available ma nufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per ASTM-A366 and A568 general requirements or galvanized to A60 or G60 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM- A924. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of ho t rolled pickled and o iled steel per ASTM-A569. B. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not less that 18-gauge sheet steel, galvanized where galvanized frames are used. C. Frames to be 16 gauge. Doors to be 16 gauge faces for exterior doors and 18 gauge for interior doors. All leafs to be 3'-0" x 7'-0" unless otherwise noted.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES08110 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inserts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM-A153, Class C or D as applicable. E. Doors and frames shall be shop primed for field painting. Rust inhibitive enamel or paint primer shall be used, baked on, and suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces on Steel Doors and Frames.” F. All exterior hollow metal doors shall be insulated: 0.30 U factor. G. Provide all hollow metal doors and frames receiving electrified hardware with ElectroLynx wiring harness and concealed plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate ElectroLynx connectors on end of the wiring harness to pl ug directly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge. 2.03 DOORS A. Provide 1 3/4” thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI-100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Level 2, Model 2 – Seamless a. Interior doors shall be minimum 18-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door. 1) Ceco: Regent-18-SEM 2) Curries: 707N-18 2. Exterior Doors: Level 3, Model 2 – Seamless a. Exterior doors shall be minimum 16-gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door. Exterior doors shall be insulated with a solid slab of expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foam permanently bonded to the inside of each face skin. The top of all doors shall be closed flush by the addition of a 16- gauge screwed-in top cap to prevent water infiltration. 1) Ceco: Legion-16-SEM 2) Curries: 707N-16 B. All doors shall be beveled 1/8” in 2” and shall have top and bottom channels of not less than 16-gauge, flush or inverted, welded to the face sheet s. Doors shall have a full height 14-gauge hinge rail reinforcement channel, or individual 10 gauge hinge reinforcements. C. All doors to conform to ANSI-A250.4-1996 Level “A” criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000 operating cycles and 23 twist tests. Certification of Level “A” d oors is to be submitted with approval drawings by supplier upon request. Do no bid or supply any type or gauge of door not having been tested and passed these criteria. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on the drawings and sche dules. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge 2. Exterior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES08110 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Ceco: SF Series b. Curries: M Series B. Fabricate frames with mitered and faces only welded corners, re-prime at the welded areas. All welds to be flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts. C. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements, 14-gauge lock strike reinforcing, and 12- gauge closer reinforcing. D. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames. E. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double frames. F. Provide minimum 0.0179” thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before ship ment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8” at jambs and hea ds except between non fire rated pairs of doors which may be no more than 1/4.” Not more than 3/4” at the bottom of the doors. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold- rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "M anufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier . Comply with applicable requirements of SDI-107 and ANSI-A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closers and exit devices. H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel or 0.040-inch- thick aluminum. J. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior do ors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. K. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doors
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND F R AMES08110 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Comply with provisions of SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames,” unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing concre te, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. Install fire rated doors with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer B. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS08212 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes stile and rail exterior and interior wood doors and sidelites. B. See Division 6 Section “Interior Archit ectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. C. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass vision panels in stile and rail wood doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: For each species and finish required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Co nstruction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors." B. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testi ng requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below intr oduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS08212 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2 MATERIALS A. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use adhesives. B. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wo od products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Artistic Doors and Windows, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Archit ectural Door Division. 3. International Door and Latch. 4. JELD-WEN, Inc. 5. Maywood, Inc. 6. McPhillips Manufacturing. 7. QSM Doors, Inc. 8. Simpson Door Company. B. Exterior Doors and Sidelites: 1. Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select, solid core doors. 2. Wood Species: Premium Cedar a. Alternate: Premium Douglas Fir.. 3. Finish: Stained and sealed per Section 09900 Painting. 4. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, insulating-glass units made from 2 lites of 3.0-mm-thick, fully tempered glass with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) interspace. C. Interior Doors: 1. Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select, solid core doors. 2. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Premiu m Oak, to match existing oak unit entry doors to remain.. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS08212 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop apply stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" to faces and edges of doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood doors to comply with ma nufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. END OF SECTION 08212
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S08213-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 08213 - ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes preassembled aluminum-clad wood frame door units, glazing and accessories. B. Architect to select from manufacturer’s full line of: 1. Wood species and finish. 2. Insect screen composition and type. 3. Hardware selections. C. Locations: Balcony and Building Entry doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Selection Samples: For each fi nish product specified, two complet e sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for: 1. Wood Members: 10 years. 2. Aluminum Cladding Struct ural Performance: Lifetime. 3. Exterior Aluminum Finish: 20 years. 4. Insulating Glass: 20 years. 5. Other Components: 10 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Custom fabrications as indicated on drawings. B. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to complian ce with requirements, provide one of the following: 1.Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: a. Marvin Windows and Doors. b. Jeld-Wen, Inc. 2.2 DOORS - GENERAL A. Doors: Complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S. 2; factory assembled and glazed, complete with
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S08213-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado weatherstripping, operating hardware and specified accessories. 1. Total Jamb Depth: As indicat ed on Drawings; provide factory installed jamb extensions. 2. NFRC certified thermal performance. 2.3 ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOORS A. Inswinging Doors: 1. Style: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Single Standard Doors: Rating HGD-LC45, maxi mum size 36 by 96 inches (915 by 2438 mm), standard door. 3. Jamb Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Top Rail Height: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 5. Stile Width: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 6. Bottom Rail Height: 12 inches (305 mm). 7. Provide hinged screen; screen frame finish to match cladding; spring latch and door closer. B. Outswinging Doors: 1. Style: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Single Standard Doors: Rating HGD-LC60, maxi mum size 36 by 95 inches (915 by 2413 mm), with high performance sill. 3. Jamb Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Top Rail Height: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 5. Stile Width: 5-3/8 inches (136 mm). 6. Bottom Rail Height: 12 inches (305 mm). C. Wood Frame and Sash Members: Select kiln dried wood, water and insect repellent and preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4; wood members not fastened or adhered to cladding. 1. Wood Species: As selected by Architect. 2. Doors: Frames finger jointed, sash veneer-wrapped. 3. Frame Corners: Block mitered, stapled, and sealed with silicone. 4. Sash Corners: Mortised and tenoned, glued, mechanically fastened, and sealed with silicone. 5. Interior Finish: Factory applied st ain with clear polyurethane top coat; color as selected from manufacturer's full line. D. Cladding: 0.055 inch thick aluminum extrusions on both frame and sash, one piece in any one length; with mitered corners mechanically fastened w ith corner locks and stainless steel screws; sash cladding applied by sliding onto wood members, not fastened or adhered to wood. 1. Finish: Factory-applied Thermoset Kynar finish complying with AAMA 2605. 2. Frame Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full line of standard colors. 3. Sash Color: Selected from manufacturer's full line. 4. Provide matching exterior trim in profiles as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Screens: To match the windows as indicated in Division 8 Section “Metal Clad Windows”. B. Glazing: Sealed insulating glass; glass of thickness recommended by manufacturer for size and application; rated CBA in accordance with ASTM E 774. 1. Overall Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm), except 3/4 inch (19 mm) for doors, sidelights, transoms,
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S08213-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado geometrics, and circle top windows. 2. Doors and Sidelights: Both lites fully tempered, complying with ASTM C 1036 quality Q3 and ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. 3. Tint: None. C. Hardware Finishes: 1. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. D. Swinging Door Hardware and Weatherstripping: 1. Inswing Door Sill: Sloped extruded aluminum with interior oak threshold; with internal drainage to exterior, top plate removable for cleaning. 2. Inswing Door Sill: Low-rise saddle type, extruded aluminum with thermal break. 3. Outswing Door Sill: Bumper type, extruded aluminum with interior oak threshold; compression weatherstripping on bumper. 4. Outswing Door Sill: Low-rise saddle type, extruded aluminum with thermal break. 5. Sill Finish: Bronze anodized. 6. Weatherstripping: High performance compression weatherstripping on frame stop; six finger sweep weatherstripping on bottom of door. 7. Outswinging Doors: Provide extruded drip cap and flange. 8. Locks: Three-point concealed locking, all bolts operated by single mechanism; keyed deadbolt with interior turn knob placed above handle. a. Operation: Automatic locking upon closing door. b. Operation: Manual activation of locking mechanism. c. Provide U.S. standard key cylinders keyed alike. d. Provide U.S. standard key cylinders keyed differently. e. Allow for U.S. standard key cyli nder to be furnished by others. 9. Handles: Provide handles and trim plates both sides; style selected from manufacturer's standard line. 10. Provide dummy trim on inactive leaves. 11. Hinges: a. Type: Commercial grade hinges. b. Type: Adjustable hinges, allowing vertical and horizontal adjustment. c. Provide 3 hinges on each leaf up to 96 inches (2440 mm) tall. d. Provide 4 hinges on each leaf 96 inches (2440 mm) or taller. 12. Hardware Finish: Coated finish selected from manufacturer's full line. E. Interior Trim and Casings: Profiles as indicated on the drawings; same species as interior frame and sash; finger jointi ng is acceptable for opaque finishing. F. Structural Mullion Reinforcement: As indicated on the drawings or required to comply with local code requirements; provide drip cap at horizontal zero mullions. G. Metal Trim Accessories: Type and confi guration as required to make a complete, weatherproof installation; same finish as exterior frame. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until su bstrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD DOO R S08213-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ma nufacturer's instructions. B. After installation adjust units for proper operation, without binding, sticking, or racking. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08213
ACCESS DOORS 08305-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of access doors: 1. Wall access doors. 2. Fire-rated wall access doors. 3. Ceiling access doors. 4. Fire-rated ceiling access doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection ratings (if required). 1. Include complete schedule, including types, ge neral locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of customized access doors and frames, including details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and accessory items. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for the entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-respon se characteristics per test met hod as indicated below, and are labeled and listed by UL, ITS (formerly Warn ock Hersey), or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Test Method for Vertical Installations: ASTM E 152. 2. Test Method for Horizont al Installations: ASTM E 119. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Jensen Industries 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Milcor, Inc. 4. Bilco 5. Cesco Products 6. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.
ACCESS DOORS 08305-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 commercial-quality, co ld-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Non-Insulated, Flush Mount Fire-Rated Doors: Self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel. 2. Door & Trim: 16 gauge cold rolled steel. 3. Hinge: Continuous piano type hinge. 4. Latches: Self latching tool-key or ri ng operated latch (as selected by owner). 5. Fire-Protection Rating for Walls: 1-1/2 hours. B. Drywall Flange-Flush Doors: Units consisting of frame with drywall corner beads on all sides, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel. 2. Door & Trim: 16 gauge cold rolled steel with 28 gauge flange. 3. Hinge: Concealed pivot type. 4. Locks: Screwdriver-operated lock. 5. Finish: Baked on pri me coat (commercial grey). 6. Packaging: Individually boxed. C. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1 .5-mm-) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum board infill. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board surfaces.4. Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge. 5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam. 6. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Concealed Frame for Clean Drywall Finishes; Bauco plus Access Panel Solutions, Inc. b. Access Door Type RDW; Karp Inc. D. Sizes (unless otherwise noted with in the construction documents): 1. 16”x16” - Hand Access 2. 30”x20” - Person Access 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supp orts indicated.
ACCESS DOORS 08305-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For gypsum board assemblies, furnish fram es with edge trim for gypsum board in accordance with Drywall Flange-Flush Doors requirements within this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. C. Install concealed-frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. D. Provide the owner with all related access doors and frames hardware, keys, maintenance manuals and warranties at time of substantial completion. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08305
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1 SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following typ es of manually overhead coiling doors: 1.Fire-rated (3hour) exterior doors. B.See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 1.2PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Provide ov erhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses wit hout evidencing permanent deformation of door components: B.Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles and for 10 cycles per day. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representativ e who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies co mplying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions , and maintenance inform ation. Include the following: 1.Setting drawings, templates, an d installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices. 2.Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings. B.Shop Drawings: For special com ponents and installations not dimensi oned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets. 1.Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others. C.Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied finishes.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 2 D.Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. E.Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an au thorized repr esentative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.B.Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling door s through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.Obtain operators and controls from the overhead coiling door manufacturer. C.Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide assemblies complyi ng with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b, and that are labeled and listed for fire ratings indicated by UL, FM, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or a nother testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D.Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1.The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1DOOR ASSEMBLY A.Counter Door: Overhead fire-rated coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking galvanized metal slats.1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.ACME Rolling Doors. b.Cookson Company. c.Overhead Door Corporation. d.Raynor. e.Wayne-Dalton Corp. 2.Provide submittals for manufactu rer’s options for Architect to select. 2.2DOOR COMPONENTS A.Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continu ous length for width of door with out splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated. B.Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, either stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to su it type of curtain slats.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 3 C.Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of angles, or channels and angles of material and finish to match curtain slat s, with sufficient depth and streng th to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand load ing. Provide continuous in tegral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and minimize noise of travel and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.D.Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as weatherseal. Contour to suit end brack ets to which hood is attached. Roll and rei nforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 1.Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame. 2.Shape: Round. 3.Exterior Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-join t bead profile for a pplying joint sealant. E.Smoke Seals: Provide UL-listed an d -tested smoke-seal perimeter gaskets. F.Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated door s, provide galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door. G.Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in track s for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. H.Provide automatic-closing device inoperative during normal door operations, with governor unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80, with easily tested and reset release mechanism, and designed to be activated by the following: 1.Governor: Oscillating or viscous-speed type. 2.Temperature rise and melting point of 165 deg F (74 deg C) replaceable fusible links, interconnected and on both sides of wall of door opening. 3.Building fire alarm and detection syst em and door-holder-release devices. 2.3FINISHES, GENERAL A.General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finis hes Manual for Architectur al and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B.Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4FINISHES A.Powder-Coat-Applied Finish: Appl y manufacturer's standard powder-coat-applied finish consisting of primer and topcoat(s) according to coating manufacturer's written instructi ons for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness. 1.Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A.Manual Door Operator: Push-up (lift- or pull-up) operation not exceeding 25 lbf (111 N).
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.General: Install door and operatin g equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. 1.Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80. 3.2ADJUSTING A.Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. B.Remove all soil, grease, hand or finger prints, erec tion marks, labels, and st ains from exposed portions of coiling doors. Do not use abrasive cleaners or cleaning methods. 3.3DEMONSTRATION A.Startup Services: Engage a fa ctory-authorized service rep resentative to perform startup services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a.Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test. 2.Train Owner's main tenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and pr ocedures for testing and resetting release devices. 3.Review data in the maintenance manuals. Re fer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." END OF SECTION 08331
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 1 SECTION 08550 – ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes aluminum-clad wood-framed windows. B. Architect to select from manufacturer’s full line of: 1. Wood species and finish. 2. Insect screen composition and type. 3. Hardware selections. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of co mplying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are repr esentative of those specified, and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows cap able of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Product test reports. F. Maintenance data.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selecti ons made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or work manship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Jeld-Wen, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine (paint grade) or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible fi nger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water- repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. 1. Color: Dark Bronze
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 3 2.3 WINDOW A. Window Type: As indicated in schedule. B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: R20. C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temp eratures when tested according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.32 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.5 W/sq. m x K) or less. D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.35, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Di vision 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Lo cate screens on inside of window and provid e for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) or 18-by-16 (1.0-by-1.1-mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable w ithout dismantling sash or ventilator framing. B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weath er stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. C. Factory machine windows for openings and fo r hardware that is not surface applied. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 4 E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazi ng stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. F. Avoid using exposed fasteners. If necessary for structural performa nce, such fasteners shall be zinc- coated or non-ferrous, countersunk and filled to match wood. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for sm ooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glaz ing materials, dirt, and other substances. G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.END OF SECTION 08550
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-1 SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY: A.Section Includes: Finish Hardware for door ope nings, except as otherwise specified herein. 1.Door hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors. 2.Door hardware for aluminum doors. 3.Door hardware for wood doors. 4.Door hardware for other doors indicated. 5.Keyed cylinders as indicated. B.Related Sections: 1.Division 6: Rough Carpentry. 2.Division 8: Alumin um Doors and Frames 3.Division 8: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4.Division 8: Wood Doors. 5.Division 26 Electrical 6.Division 28: Electronic Security C.References: Comply with app licable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specific requirem ents, the most restrictive shall govern. 1.Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association (BHMA) 2.NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 3.NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows 4.ANSI-A156.xx- Various Performan ce Standards for Finish Hardware 5.UL10C – Positive Pressure Fi re Test of Door Assemblies 6.ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usab le Buildings and Facilities 7.DHI /ANSI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware D.Intent of Hardware Groups 1.Should items of hardware not definite ly specified be required for com pletion of the Work, furnish such items of type and quality comparable to adjacent hardware and appropriate for service required. 2.Where items of hardware aren’t definitely or co rrectly specified, are required for completion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy to Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended. E.Allowances 1.Refer to Division 1 for a llowance amount and procedures. F.Alternates 1.Refer to Division 1 for Alternates and procedures.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 1.2SUBSTITUTIONS: A.Comply with Division 1. 1.3SUBMITTALS: A.Comply with Division 1. B.Special Submittal Requirements: Combine s ubmittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. C.Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 1.Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2.Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.Wiring diagrams for each electric product specified. Coordinate voltage with electrical before submitting. 4.Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts with hardware schedule. 5.Provide 9001-Quality Managemen t and 14001-Environmental Manag ement for products listed in Materials Section 2.2 D.Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 6 complete reproducible copy of detailed hardware schedule in a vertical format. 1.List groups and suff ixes in proper sequence. 2.Completely describe door and list architectural door number. 3.Manufacturer, product name, and catalog number. 4.Function, type, and style. 5.Size and finish of each item. 6.Mounting heights. 7.Explanation of abbreviations and symbols used within schedule. 8.Detailed wiring diagrams, specially developed for each opening, indicating all electric hardware, security equipment and access control equipment, and door and frame rough-ins required for specific opening. E.Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Sched ule" to door and frame supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing. 1.Templates, wiring diag rams and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical terms to electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations. F.Samples: (If requested by the Architect) 1.1 sample of Lever and Ro se/Escutcheon design, (pair). 2.3 samples of metal finishes G.Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Divi sion 1 including specifi c requirements indicated. 1.Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets cont aining the following. a.Complete information in care, maintenan ce, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b.Catalog pages for each product. c.Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d.Parts list for each product.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 2.Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed". 3.Copy of final keying schedule 4.As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each piece of hardware connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. 5.One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with Division 1. 1.Statement of qualification for distributor and installers. 2.Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source responsibility. 3.Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experien ce in the distribution of commercial hardware. a.Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule. b.Hardware Schedule shall be prepare d and signed by an AHC. 4.Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experi enced in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated. 5.Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide testing agency label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings. a.Provide UL listed hardware for labeled and 20 minute openings in conformance with requirements for class of opening scheduled. b.Underwriters Laboratories requirements ha ve precedence over this specification where conflict exists. 6.Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified in hardware schedule, furn ish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware. B.Review Project for extent of finish hardware required to complete the Work. Where there is a conflict between these Specifications and the existing hardware, notify th e Architect in writing and furnish hardware in compliance with th e Specification unless otherwise di rected in writing by the Architect. 1.5DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Packing and Shipping: Comply with Division 1. 1.Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 2.Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage. 3.Mark hardware to correspond with "reviewed hardware schedule". 4.Deliver hardware to door and frame manufacturer upon request. B.Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.6PROJECT CONDITIONS: A.Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hard ware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and simila r requirements indicat ed, as necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 B.Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.7WARRANTY: A.Refer to Conditions of the Contract B.Manufacturer’s Warranty: 1.Closers: Ten years 2.Exit Devices: Three Years 3.Locksets & Cylinders: Three years 4.All other Hardware: Two years. 1.8OWNER’S INSTRUCTION: A.Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units. 1.9MAINTENANCE: A.Extra Service Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protectiv e covering and identify with descrip tive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals Section. 1.Special Tools: Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. 2.Maintenance Tools: Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 3.Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra service materials. B.Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner’s consideration maintenance service agreement for electronic products installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS: A.The following manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with Division 1. Item: Manufacturer: Approved: Hinges Stanley Bommer, McKinney Locksets Best Cylinders Best Card Reader Locks SafeLock Card Reader Exits Advantex SafeLock Exit Devices Precision Closers Stanley D-3550 Push/Pull Plates Trimco Hag er, Rockwood Push/Pull Bars Trimco Hager, Rockwood Protection Plates Trimco Hager, Rockwood Overhead Stops ABH Rixson, Glynn Johnson Magnetic Holders ABH Door Stops Trimco Hager, Rockwood
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 Flush Bolts Trimco ABH, Rockwood Coordinator & Brackets Trimco ABH, Rockwood Threshold & Gasketing National Guard Reese, Pemko 2.2MATERIALS: A.Hinges: Shall be Five Knuckle Ball bearing hinges 1.Template screw hole locations 2.Bearings are to be fully hardened. 3.Bearing shell is to be consistent shape with barrel. 4.Minimum of 2 permanently lubricated non-detachabl e bearings on standa rd weight hinge and 4 permanently lubricated bearing on heavy weight hinges. 5.Equip with easily seated , non-rising pins. 6.Non Removable Pin screws shall be slotted stainless steel screws. 7.Hinges shall be full polish ed, front, back and barrel. 8.Hinge pin is to be fully plated. 9.Bearing assembly is to be installed after plating. 10.Sufficient size to allow 180-degree swing of door 11.Furnish five knuckles with flush ball bearings 12.Provide hinge type as listed in schedule. 13.Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 fo ot 6 inch height. Add one for eac h additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof. 14.Certified by BHMA for all applicable ANSI Standa rds for type, size, function and finish 15.UL10C listed for Fire B.Mortise Type Guest Locks: 1.Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A1 56.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, UL10C. 2.Fit ANSI A115.1 door preparation 3.Functions and design as indi cated in the hardware groups 4.Provide sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim 5.Provide locksets with cylinders 6.Provide 5 Guest Cards per Lockset 7.Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it 8.Card Readers on lockset as required for match of facility 9.Provide training and related equipm ent for comp lete installation C.Cylindrical Type Locks and Latchsets: 1.Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1, Extra-Heavy Duty, and be UL10C listed. 2.Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 3.Fit modified ANSI A115.2 door preparation. 4.Locksets and cores to be of the same manufacturer to ma intain complete lockset warranty 5.Locksets to have anti-rotational studs that are thru-bolted 6.Keyed lever shall not have exposed “keeper” hole 7.Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it 8.2-3/4 inch (70 mm) backset 9.9/16 inch (14 mm) throw latchbolt 10.Outside lever sleeve to be seamless, of one-piece construction made of a hardened steel alloy 11.Keyed lever to be removable only after co re is removed, by authorized control key 12.Provide locksets with 7-pin rem ovable and interchangeable core cylinders 13.Hub, side plate, shrouded rose , locking pin to be a one-piece cas ting with a shrouded locking lug. 14.Locksets outside locked lever must withstand minimum 1400 inch pounds of torque. In excess of that, a replaceable part will shear. Key from outside and inside lever will still operate lockset.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 15.Core face must be the same finish as the lockset. 16.Functions and design as in dicated in the hardware groups. D.Cylindrical Deadbolt: 1.Tested and approved by ANSI A156.5, Operational Grade 1, 2.Fit modified ANSI A115.3 door preparation 3.Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 4.Locksets and cores to be of the same manufacturer to ma intain complete lockset warranty 5.2-3/4 inch (70mm) backset, or 2 3/8 inch backset as needed 6.1 inch throw deadbolt 7.Provide locksets with 7-pin core. E.Exit Devices shall: 1.Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1 2.Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 3.Furnish UL or recognized indep endent laboratory certified mech anical operational testing to 9 million cycles minimum. 4.Provide a deadlo cking latchbolt 5.Non-fire rated exit devices shall have cylinder dogging. 6.Touchpad shall be “T” style 7.Exposed components shall be of architectural metals and finishes. 8.Lever design shall match lockset lever design 9.Provide strikes as required by application. 10.Fire exit devices to be listed for UL10C 11.UL listed for Accident Hazard 12.Shall consist of a cross bar or push pad, the actua ting portion of which extends across, shall not be less than one half the wid th of the door leaf. 13.Aluminum vertical rod assemblies are acceptable only when provid e with the manufacturers optional top and bottom stainless steel rod guard protectors. F.Cylinders: 1.Provide the necessary cyli nder housings, collars, rings & springs as recommended by the manufacturer for proper installation. 2.Provide the proper cylinder cams or tail piece as required to operate a ll locksets and other keyed hardware items listed in the hardware sets. 3.Coordinate and provide as required for related sections. G.Door Closers shall: 1.Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 2.UL10C certified 3.Provide 9001-Quality Man agement and 14001-Environ mental Management. 4.Closer shall have extra-duty arms and knuckles 5.Conform to ANSI 117.1 6.Maximum 2 7/16 inch case pr ojection with non-ferrous cover 7.Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, and backcheck 8.Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blade stop spacers as required by frame and door conditions 9.Full rack and pinion type closer with 1½“ minimum bore 10.Mount closers on non-public side of door , unless otherwise noted in specification 11.Closers shall be non-handed, non-sized and multi-sized. H.Door Stops: Provide a dome floor or wall stop for every opening as listed in the hardware sets.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7 1.Wall stop and floor stop sh all be wrought bronze, brass or stainless steel. 2.Provide fastener suitable for wall construction. 3.Coordinate reinforcement of walls where wall stop is specified. 4.Provide dome stops where wall stops are not practical. Provide spacers or carpet riser for floor conditions encountered I.Over Head Stops: Provide a Surface mounted or concealed overhead when a floor or wall stop cannot be used or when listed in the hardware set. 1.Concealed overhead stops shall be heavy duty bronze or stainless steel. 2.Surface overhead stops shall be heavy duty bronze or stainless steel. J.Push Plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J301, .050 thickness, size as indicated in hardware set. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish. K.Pulls with plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J301, .050 thickness Plate s with ANSI J401 Pull as listed in hardware set. Provide prope r fasteners for door construction. L.Push Pull Bars: Provide ANSI J504, .1” Dia. Pull and push bar model and series as listed in hardware set. Provide proper fasteners for door construction. M.Kickplates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J102 , 10 inches high by width less 2 inches on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish. N.Mop plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J103, 4 inches high by width less 1 inch on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish. O.Door Bolts: Flush bolts for wood or metal doors. 1.Provide a set of Automatic bolts, Certified AN SI/BHMA 156.3 Type 25 for hollow metal label doors. 2.Provide a set of Automatic bolts, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.3 Type 27 at wood label doors. 3.Manual flush bolts, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.16 at openings where allowed local authority. 4.Provide Dust Proof Strike, Certified ANSI/BHMA 15 6.16 at doors with flush bolts without thresholds. P.Coordinator and Brackets: Provide a surface mounted coordinator when automatic bolts are used in the hardware set. 1.Coordinator, Certified ANSI/BHMA A1156.3 Type 21A for full width of the opening. 2.Provide mounting brackets fo r soffit applied hardware. 3.Provide hardware preparation (cutouts) for latches as necessary. Q.Magnetic Door Holders: Provide magnetic doo r holders with Tri-Voltage that can be wired 12VDC, 24V AC/DC or 120V AC 1.Wall magnetic door holders shall be Recessed, Surface or Flush mounted. 2.Armature shall be thru-bolted and can be provided with any projection required. 3.Models will be available in US28 , sprayed finishes and US32D. 4 Floor mounted shall be provided for a single do or or double door hold open application. R.Seals: All seals shall be finished to match adjacent frame color. Seals shall be furnished as listed in schedule. Material shall be UL listed for labeled openings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8 S.Weatherstripping: Provide at head and jambs only those units wh ere resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable. Where bar-type weatherstrip is used with parallel arm mounted closers install weatherstrip first. 1.Weatherstrip shall be resilient seal of (Neoprene, Polyurethane, Vinyl, Pile, Nylon Brush, Silicone) 2.UL10C Positive Pressure rated seal set when required. T.Door Bottoms/Sweeps: Surface mounted or concealed door bottom where listed in the hardware sets. 1.Door seal shall be resilient seal of (Neoprene, Po lyurethane, Nylon Brush, Silicone) 2.UL10C Positive Pressure rated seal set when required. U.Thresholds: Thresholds shall be aluminum beveled type with maximum height of ½” for conformance with ADA requirements. Furnish as specified and per details. Provide fasteners and screws suitable for floor conditions. V.Silencers: Furnish silencers on all interior frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs. Omit where any type of seals occur. 2.3FINISH: A.Designations used in Schedule of Finish Hardware - 3.5, and elsewhere to i ndicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 including coor dination with traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products B.Powder coat door closers to match ot her hardware, unless otherwise noted. C.Aluminum items shall be finished to match pre dominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color.2.4KEYS AND KEYING: A.Provide keyed brass constr uction cores and keys during the constr uction period. Construction control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owne r's permanent keying system or furnished in the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accep ted keying schedule) will be furnished to the Owner. B.Cylinders, removable and interchangeable co re system: Best Patented Cormax 7-pin. C.Permanent keys and cores: Stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These visual key control marks or codes will not in clude the actual key cuts. Permanent keys will also be stamped "Do Not Duplicate."D.Transmit Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys to Owner by Registered Mail, return receipt requested. E.Furnish keys in the following quantities: 1.1 each Grand Masterkeys 2.4 each Masterkeys 3.2 each Change keys each keyed core 4.15 each Construction masterkeys 5.1 each Control keys
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9 F.The Owner, or the Owner's agen t, will install permanent cores and ret urn the construction cores to the Hardware Supplier. Construction cores an d keys remain the property of the Hardware Supplier. G.Keying Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting, with Architect Owner and hardware supplier, and other involved parties to ensure locksets and locking hardware, are functionally correct and keying complies with project requirements. Furnish 3 typed copies of keying schedule to Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion. 1.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2HARDWARE LOCATIONS: A.Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. 1.Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames, by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 2.Recommended locations for Architectural Ha rdware for flush wood doors (DHI). 3.WDMA Industry Standard I.S.-1A-04, Industry Standard for Architectural wood flush doors. 3.3INSTALLATION: A.Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. B.Conform to local governing agency security ordinance. C.Install Conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1 A ccessible and Usable Building and Facilities. 1.Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from the open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the landing side of the door. D.Installed hardware using the ma nufacturers fasteners provid ed. Drill and tap all screw holes located in metallic materials. Do not use “Riv-Nuts” or similar products. 3.4FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT A.Contractor/Installers, Field Services: After installati on is complete, contractor shall inspect the completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is comple te and properly adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings. 1.Check and adjust closers to ensure prop er operation.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-10 2.Check latchset, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed and adjusted to ensure proper operation. a.Verify levers are free from binding. b.Ensure latchbolts and dead bolts are engaged in to strike and hardware is functioning. 3.Report findings, in writing, to architect indicating that all hard ware is installed and functioning properly. Include recommenda tions outlining corrective actions fo r improperly functioning hardware if required. 3.5SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE: Manufacturer List CodeName AB ABH Manufacturing Inc. BE Best Access Systems BY By Others NA National Guard PR Precision SA SAFLOCK ST Stanley TR Trimco Finish List CodeDescription AL Aluminum PC Prime Coat S1 Sprayed Aluminum Finish 600 Primed for Painting 626 Satin Chromium Plated 630 Satin Stainless Steel 689 Aluminum Painted US26D Chromium Plated, Dull US32D Stainless Steel, Dull Option List CodeDescription FL Fire Exit Hardware LBR LESS BOTTOM ROD NRP NON REMOVEABLE PIN HINGE
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-11 Hardware Sets SET #1 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELO CK MORTISE W/DB AND PRIVACY 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #2 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Deadlock 83T-0 KL STK 626 BE 1 Patio Set 93K-0P14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #3 2 Hinges By Gate Mfg. US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR NOTE: Gate: Mounting boxes are needed to mount hardware listed. Provide all Mounting boxes. Coordinate the requiremen ts with the Gate Mfg. SET #4 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2101 (Exit Only) 630 PR 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #5 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELOCK MORTISE W/LATCHBOLT 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #6 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr Mfg. US32D ST 1 Advantex Exit Device 10 SERIES X SAFELOCK CARD ACCESS TRIM US32D SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-12 SET #7 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2103 X 1703A 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #8 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US32D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2103 X 1703A 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #9 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Drip Cap 16 A 4"ODW NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #10 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2114 X 4914D 630 PR 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #11 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device 2108 X 4908D 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #12 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2108 X 4908D 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-13 SET #13 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr. Mfg. 626 BY 1 Deadlock 83T-0 KL STK L/C 626 BE 1 Patio Set 93K-0P14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #100 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELO CK MORTISE W/DB AND PRIVACY 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Door Guard 4016 626 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #101 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #102 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2114 X 4914D 630 PR 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 601 A NA SET #103 NOTE: Existing pair of closet doors all hardware to remain. SET #104 3 Hinges By Prehung Dr Mfg. US32D ST 1 Advantex Exit Device 10 SERIES X SAFELOCK CARD ACCESS TRIM US32D SA 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A TR SET #105 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Entry Cardlock SAFELO CK MORTISE W/DB AND PRIVACY 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Door Guard 4016 626 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-14 SET #106 NOTE: All hardware by the bifold door Mfg. SET #107 NOTE: Overhead coiling door to be linked to th e fire alarm system and have smoke gasketing. All hardware is to be furnished by the coiling door Mfg. SET #108 NOTE: Existing Door. All hardware to remain SET #109 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #110 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Entry Cardlock Safelock Mortise w/Latchbolt 626 SA 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A TR SET #111 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3810 X 3810 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Astragal By Dr Mfg. 600 BY 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #112 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 3917-12 626 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST NOTE: Closer on active door only 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 2 Door Silencers 1229A TR SET #113 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Passage Set 93K-0N14DS3 626 BE 1 Magnetic Holder 2100 S1 AB 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA NOTE: Magnetic holder is to be tied into the fire alarm system.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-15 SET #114 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7D14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #115 3 Hinges FBB191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D ST 1 Deadlock 83T-7 KLSTK L/C 626 BE 1 Patio Set 93K-0P14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Door Holder 1220-5 626 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #116 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Exit Device FL 2108 X 4908D 630 PR 1 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA SET #117 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Exit Device FL 2208 X 4908D LBR 630 PR 2 Rim Cylinder 1E-72 PATD 626 BE 2 Door Closer D-3550 S 689 ST 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #118 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 3917-12 626 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 2 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Astragal By Dr Mfg. 600 BY 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 2 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA SET #119 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 3917-12 626 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Astragal By Dr Mfg. 600 BY 1 Saddle Threshold 425 AL NA 1 Weatherstrip 160S @ Head and Jambs NA 2 Brush Door Sweep C627 A NA
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado DOOR HARDWARE 08710-16 SET #120 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3815L X 3815L 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #121 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3815L X 3815L 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 2 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 2 Mounting Bracket 3095 or 3096 as Req. PC TR 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #122 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 3810 X 3810 630 TR 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Coordinator 3094B Series PC TR 2 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Dustproof Strike 3910 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #123 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3551 STD W/PA BRKT 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #124 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 93K-7R14DS3 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA SET #125 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Exit Set 93K-0Y14DS3 626 BE 1 Door Closer D-3550 PA 689 ST 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Door Guard 4016 626 TR 1 Gasketing 5050 B @ Head and Jambs NA END OF SECTION 087100
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 1 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications , including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows. 2. Exterior Wood Doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than gl ass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fab rication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of gl azing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and gl azing material indicated including warranty. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 2 1. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certificati on Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B. Referenced Standards: Comply with published standards of Flat Glass Marketing Association, latest edition and all applicable ma nufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Insulated Glass: Insulated glass shall meet performance requirements of ASTM E774 (Class CBA). Insulating glass units shall be manufactured by a member of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) or Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association (SIGMA). Units shall be double sealed with ½-inch minimum air space, a single seal is not acceptable. C. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glas s from one primary-glass manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. F. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results fo r product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An inde pendent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. H. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more st ringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 3 J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing mate rials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Every individual piece of glass shall have a label designating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove labels until inspected by Architect. C. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating- glass manufacturer's written recommendations for vent ing and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, fr ost, condensation, or other causes. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated on Drawings, provide products by one of the following: 1. PPG, Inc. 2. Temp Safe Inc. 3. Kwik Temp 4. General Glass Corporation 5. Guardian Industries Corporation 6. PPG Industries 7. AFGD 8. HPG Industries 9. Tempglass 10. Viracon 2.3 GLASS A. Primary Float Glass: Float Glass: ASTM C 1036 , Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated on drawings.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 4 B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated on drawings. 2.5 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complyi ng with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Th ickness of Each Lite: Dimensi ons as indicated on drawings are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and a pplication, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on te sting and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is required, provide products with the cap ability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-protection rating. 2.7 GLAZING GASKETS A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neop rene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lo ck strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 5 B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above. C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, si ze, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibili ty with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Sh ore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AN D OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. 2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A.Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: Low-E coated, clear in sulating glass suitable for high-altitude installation with no leakage of interior air space. 1.Overall Unit Thickness: Manufact urer standard 5/8 or ¾ inch. 2.Thickness of Each Glass Lite: Manufacturer standard, 3mm minimum. 3.Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4.Interspace Content: Air. 5.Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6.Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7.U-Factor: 0.32 maximum.
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 6 8.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.35 maximum. 9.Provide safety glazing labeling. B.Exterior Wood Doors: Low-E coated, clear insulating glass suitable for high-altitude installation with no leakage of interior air space. 1.Overall Unit Thickness: Manufact urer standard 5/8 or ¾ inch. 2.Thickness of Each Glass Lite: Manufacturer standard, 3mm minimum. 3.Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4.Interspace Content: Air. 5.Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6.Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7.U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 8.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.35 maximum. 9.Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, includ ing those for size, squaren ess, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not fi rmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Maintain minimum glazing tolerance between glass faces and frame or metal stops as recommended by the Flat Glass Marketing Association. For ¼-inch thick glass, maintain 1/8-inch clearance between glass face and metal stops. D. Protect glass edges from damage during hand ling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weake n glass and impair performance and appearance. E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized an d located to comply with referenced glazing
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 7 publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. H. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated abilit y to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. J. Set glass lites in each series with unifo rm pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommende d by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket a pplications at corn ers and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal w ithout developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufactur er's written instructions. Prov ide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not le ss than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado GLAZING 08800- 8 before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.END OF SECTION 08800
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior 3-coat stucco system fo r installation over two layers of 15 lb felt underlayment. 1. Metal lath and accessories. 2. Portland cement plaster. 3. Acrylic-based finishes. B. Related Section: Subcontractor responsible for Work of this Section shall comply with Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.” 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each product specified. B. Samples for selection in the form of manufacturer's co lor charts consisting of actual units or sections of units at least 12 inches (300 mm) square showing the fu ll range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish indicated. 1. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 2. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. D. Control joints to be prov ided as necessary in stucco with architect approval. Provide layout of proposed control joints for Arch itect review and comment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized in the application of Portland cement plaster similar in mate rial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to stucco system manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain materials from one source. C. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels for each type of finish and application required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Contractor. 2. Erect mockups 48 by 96 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) by full thickness in presence of Contractor using materials, including lath, support system, and control joints, indicated for final Work. 3. Notify Contractor 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Contractor's approval of mo ckups before start of plaster Work. 6. Retain and maintain mockups during construc tion in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed portland cement plaster Work. a. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer fo r environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or permanent, as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after application. Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provid e deflection or protective screens. C. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required. D. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C). E. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moistu re deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wire-Fabric Lath: a. Davis Wire Corporation. b. Jaenson Wire Company. c. Keystone Steel & Wire Co. d. K-Lath Building Products. 2. Metal Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Metalex (Keene Products). c. MM Systems Corp. d. National Gypsum Co. e. Pittcon Industries. f. Unimast, Inc. g. United States Gypsum Co. h. Western Metal Lath Co. 2.2 LATH A. Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032, fabricated into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal-shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) minimum coating designation. 2. Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter, zinc-coated (g alvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. C. Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick. D. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material: 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick. E. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Galavanized steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick 3. One piece type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges. a. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. F. Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer's standard profile designed for use at sill plate line to form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting dam p earth, fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. G. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. H. Exterior Insulation Finish System Formed Relief: 1. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer for Project. 2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: Match field color of Portland Cement Plaster as selected by Contractor. 3. Primer-Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. 4. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for use, compatible with substrate. 5. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellu lar thermal insulation formed by expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold. Comply with system manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type I, and "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for more stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: a. Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) or less than that allowed by ASTM PS 49. 6. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. (21 dN/cm) per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight: a. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m). b. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m). c. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m). d. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m). 7. Base-Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. 8. Primer: System manufacturer's standard factory-mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat. 9. Finish-Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. B. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish-Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to match Architect's sample. C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. E. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealin g topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. Available Products: a. Bonsal, W. R. Co.; b. ChemRex, SonoWall Stucco Systems; c. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; d. El Rey Stucco, Inc. e. Parex Incorporated; f. Pleko Products, Inc.; g. Senergy, Inc.; h. Sto Corp.; i. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.; 2.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes aft er ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. ft. (16 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mi xes: See Drawings for locations. 1. Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 2. Over Monolithic Concrete: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 3. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2- 1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementit ious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or po lypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. B. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932. D. Building Paper: 2 layers of 10 minute; or 1 layer of 60 minute moisture resistance rated Grade D asphalt saturated Kraft building paper conforming with U.B.C Standard No. 14; or 1 layer of asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226 Type I. E. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. F. Line Wire: 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized), soft, annealed steel wire. G. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2.7 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide system manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish System s, Class PB" and with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below: 1. Low-modulus, multipart, nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Low-modulus silicone sealant. B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Sealant Color: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Match finish-coat color of system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL A. In accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions. B. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with requirements of ASTM C 1063. C. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer. D. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. Install slip- or cushion-type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. E. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordi nate support system for proper s upport of framed work that is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system. 3.2 LATHING A. Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal la th selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards. 1. Exterior horizontal surfaces using woven-wire lath with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal-shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm -) diameter, galvani zed steel wire. 2. Exterior sheathed soffit surfaces using woven-wire lath with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal- shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.3 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. In accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions. B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. C. Install screeds and temporary grounds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with plaster-coat work. 1. Terminate base of stucco system with weep screed in direct contact with concrete foundations in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds, if any. E. Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Secti ons for installing flas hing as indicated. F. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces that are indicated for direct plaster application, except where a bonding agent has been applied. Determine and apply amount of moisture and degree of saturation that will result in optimum suction for plastering. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. In accordance with Manufacture’s written instructions. B. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations: 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners. 2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Contractor: a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet (5.4 m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. c. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in area. d. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. B. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. C. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed at any location on surface. E. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat plaster material, and before lathing where necessary. Except wh ere full grouting is indicated or required for fire- resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches (152 mm) at each jamb anchor. F. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. G. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where in terior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. H. Corners: Make internal corners and angles squa re; finish external corners flush with cornerbeads on interior work, square and true w ith plaster faces on exterior work. I. Number of Coats: As indicated by Manufacturer’s product designations. J. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements: 1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine-textured finish matching Contractor's sample or selection. 2. Prepared Finish: Apply acrylic-based finish coats according to manufacturer's written instructions. K. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field quality-control tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace portland cement plaster Work that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Subcontractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTE R 09220 -9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged duri ng plastering work. Wh en plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, contai ners, equipment, and plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.9 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Exterior Stucco Colors: 1. Stucco field and vertical siding color: buff, match C2 Paint, C2-362 P, Kalahari. 2. Stucco 2nd and 3rd floor belly band color: tan, match Benjamin Moore Paint, 1055. 3. Stucco base, balcony wall color: green, match Benjamin Moore Paint, HC-123, Kennebunkport Green. END OF SECTION 09220
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With mo isture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.2 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Fo r each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhes ive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 2.4 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Finish Levels: 1. Provide Level 1 finish at concealed spaces and plenums. 2. Provide Level 2 finish on substrates for tile and applied wood finishes. 3. Provide Level 4 finish where exposed or indicated to receive paint. C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, j ob-mixed, aggregated, drying-type textur e finish for spray application. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall an d Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated). D. Drywall texture at East Entry Lobby, Fitness Room Wainscot and Fitness Restroom:
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Texture: Medium Skip-Trowel. 2. Paint: She r win Willia m s 3. Color: to b e dete r m ined b y architec t 4. Ty p e: Su p er Pain t 5. Finish: Eggshellor Sa t in 6. Installation: 2 coats ove r p ri m ecoa t asneeded.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. E. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeter s, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Core and shell areas of project. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 5. Level 5: none. 3.5 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weat her, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES09265 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rated walls to achieve a 1 or 2-hour rating, as indicated on sheet A0.3. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire- resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re quirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum Company. 2. BPB America Inc. 3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation. 8. USG Corporation. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated.1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES09265 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comp ly with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: As required to achieve required fire-rating. b. Long Edges: Double bevel.2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufactur er's proprietary liner panels and with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273. a. Core: As required to achieve required fire-rating. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. B. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Di vision 9 Section "Gypsum Board." D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gyps um board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to com ply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES09265 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemb lies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels. B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch (0.79-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum board face-layer panel. D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods. E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.H. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke- tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assem blies cannot be positioned within 4 inches (102 mm) of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- (13- or 16-mm-) thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing. K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES09265 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09265
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES09653-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. 3. Resilient flooring accessories. 4. Resilient carpet accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each typ e of product specified. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's standard sampl e sets consisting of sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inch es (300 mm) long, of each product color and pattern specified. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base and accessories certifying that each product furnished complies with requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experien ced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those req uired for this Project an d with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written reco mmendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space wh ere they are to be installed. C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES09653-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other con struction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after ot her finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that ma tch products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products, by the manufacturers indicated in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I and with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements sp ecified. Do not pr oceed with installation un til unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's wr itten installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES09653-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, accor ding to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carb onation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory cond itions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as pract icable without gaps at seams an d with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 5. Form outside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil. B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recomme nded in writing by resilient product manufacturer. C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before da tes scheduled fo r inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES09653-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Rubber Wall Base: 1. Manufacturer: Johnsonite; Roppe; or as indicated in the Finish Schedule. 2. Style: Cove with top-set toe for vinyl composition tile and straight with no toe for carpet. 3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 4. Height: As indicated in the Fini sh Schedules and on the Drawings. 5. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with ma nufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m). 6. Outside Corners: Premolded. 7. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. 8. Ends: Premolded. 9. Surface: Smooth. 10. Color: As indicated in the Finish Schedules. END OF SECTION 09653
CARPET 09680 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet: see Interior Finish Schedule for Manufacturer and Product. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product `indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installatio n recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. 12. Type of cushion. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pa ttern, and designation in dicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample. 4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample. 5. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (3 00-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product desi gnations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenan ce manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and met hods that could be detrimental to carpet.
CARPET 09680 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provision s of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unus ual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, bu t is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
CARPET 09680 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, to types of carpet indicated in the Finish Schedules and Drawings. B. Carpet 1. Manufacturer: Design Origins by Shaw 2. Contact: Laurie Mat his 303-288-3927 3. Style: to be determined 4. Pattern: to be determined 5. Colors: Strike off to be approved 6. Ply: 2 7. Cons t ruction: Cut Pile 8. Dye Method: Dye InjectionPrin t 9. Gauge: 1/10 10. Stitches p e r Inch: 12.3 11. Tufted Pile Height: .312 inches 12. Yarn Weight: 40.0 ozs / sq. y d.13. Weight Densi t y: 240,000 14. Anti Soil Treatment: Fluo r oca r b on 15. Pri m ary Backing: WovenPolyp r opylene 16. Secondary Backing: WovenPolyp r opylene 17. Warranty: 10 years 18. Fla m m a b ility: Class 1, S m oke Density less t han 450 19. Wid t h: 12’20. Weight: 40 oz.C. Carpet with CR 10 bleach and stain resistant treatment and MP moisture protective backing. D. Install per manufacturer’s and installer’s recommendations. E. Carpet – Existing Units 1. Provide an allowance of $45/sy over entire unit area for Existing Units. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Smooth Transition Strip 1. Manufacturer: Schluter 2. Contact: 800-472-4588 3. Style Number: Reno-TK or Reno-U 4. Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel 5. Location: Between carpeted areas and adjacent areas
CARPET 09680 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 6. Flooring Contractor to select among various sizes to accomm odate different heights in stone flooring and carpeted areas. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. E. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2. F. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for comp liance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified.B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs co mply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following:
CARPET 09680 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered imme diately before installing car pet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation." B. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs." C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosi ngs. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage fro m construction operations and pl acement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods i ndicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680
PAINTING 09900-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coat s specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Unit kitchens. f. Elevator entrance doors and frames. g. Elevator equipment. h. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. i. Light fixtures. j. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper.
PAINTING 09900-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laborat ories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: The standard procedure for measuring specular gloss is contained in ASTM D 523. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system speci fied. Include bl ock fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of co lors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samp les of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:
PAINTING 09900-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a.b. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples for each color and finish. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) samples of masonry, with m orta r join t in thecenter, fo r eachfinishan d color.c.Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) samples of natural-or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e.Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- (200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualificat their cap a names an i on Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrat e b ilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses ,d addresses of architects and owners, a nd other information specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: En gage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Review of first finished room, space, or item of each color scheme is required by Architect for color, texture, and workmanship. 2. Use first acceptable room, space or item as Project standard for each color scheme. 3. For spray application, paint surface not smaller than 100 square feet as Project standard. D. Secondary products not specified by name and required for the job such as shellac shall be "best grade" or "first line" products. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufactur er's original, unopen ed packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions.
PAINTING 09900-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered cont ainers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement w eather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner clean, new, one-quart cans of paints used on the Project, well marked, indicating location of each color and type material used. One can if less than 1,000 square feet, two cans if over 1,000 square feet covered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are refe rred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Carboline Company (Carboline) 2. ICI Dulux Paints-Devoe Coatings (ICI) 3. Kwal •Howells, Inc (K •H). 4. Benjamin Moore & Company (Moore). 5. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 6. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec). C. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
PAINTING 09900-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.02 MATERIALS A. Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. B. No claim as to the unsuitability or unavailability of any material specified, or unwillingness to use specified products, or inability to produce first-class wo rk with specified pro ducts, will be entertained. C. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sales paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint ma terial containers not displ aying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. E. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On reques t, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting op erations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
PAINTING 09900-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral- fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 3. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. 4. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 perce nt solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 6. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 7. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 8. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. 9. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 10. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. 11. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 12. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. 13. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. 14. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.
PAINTING 09900-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 15. Touch up bare areas and shop-app lied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 16. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and a pplying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and ty pe of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to main tain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
PAINTING 09900-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions sho w through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receiv e a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, doe s not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use br ush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear.
PAINTING 09900-9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, ap ply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be paint ed or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish co at with no burn through or othe r defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, re move empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and re painting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. The following schedule for finishing is not intended to mention every particular item which will receive painter's finish. The kinds of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be as scheduled. 3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Semi-Gloss: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer.
PAINTING 09900-10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer. 2) K •H: 9210Rus t InhibitingMetalPri m er 3) Moore: AlkydMetal Pri m e r M06.4) S-W: Ke m Kro m i k Metal Pri m er B50NZ6/B50WZ1. b. First and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex.1) ICI: 2406 Decra-Shield Exterior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 3200Acrylic LatexSe m i-Gloss 3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexHouse & Tri m #170. 4) S-W: A-100LatexHousean d Tri m Paint A82 Series. 2. High Performance Semi-Gloss Urethane: One finish coat over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer, 1 to 2 DFT.1) Carboline: Ru stbond LTR Primer. 2) ICI: Devgua r d 4160Tan k an d S t ruc t ural Pri m er.3) K •H: VyGua r dV13-F-28.4) Moore: Universal Metal Pri m er M06.5) S-W: Ke m KKro m i k Universal Metal Pri m er B50WZ1. 6) Tne m ec: Che m Pri m e37H.b. Finish Coat: Semi-Gloss Urethane, 3 to 4 mils DFT.1) Carboline: 133HB. 2) ICI: Devthane378Aliphatic UrethaneSe m i-Gloss.3) K •H: VyGua r dV41.4) Moore: M74/M75Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Se m i-Gloss.5) S-W: Acrolon218HSB65-650Se r ies 6) Tne m ec: EnduraSeries73.B. Galvanized Metal: 1. Paint System Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1) ICI: 3210 Ultra-Hide Aquacrylic Gripper. 2) K •H: 5800100%Acrylic Pri m er.3) Moore: FreshS t art #023 4) S-W: DTMPri m e r FinishB66W1.b. First and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel.1) ICI: 2406 Decra-Shield Exterior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 3200Acrylic LatexSe m i-Gloss.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexHouse & Tri m #170. 4) S-W: A-100LatexHousean d Tri m Paint A82 Series. 2. High Performance Semi-Gloss Urethane: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer, 1 to 2 DFT.
PAINTING 09900-11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: Decra-Shield 2200 Exterior Flat. 2) K H: 6400Accu-Tone100%Acrylic Flat Finish. 1) Carboline: Ru stbond LTR Primer. 2) ICI: Devgua r d 4160Tan k an d S t ruc t ural Pri m er.3) K •H: VyGua r dV13-F-28.4) Moore: Universal Metal Pri m er M07 5) S-W: Ke m K r o m i k Universal Metal Pri m er B50WZ1. 6) Tne m ec: Che m Pri m e37H.b. Finish Coat: Semi-Gloss Urethane, 3 to 4 mils DFT.1) Carboline: 133HB. 2) ICI: Devthane378Aliphatic UrethaneSe m i-Gloss.3) K •H: VyGua r dV41.4) Moore: M74/M75Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Se m i-Gloss.5) S-W: Acrolon218HSB65-650Se r ies.6) Tne m ec: EnduraSeries73 3. Heat-Resistant, Enamel Coating: For surface temperatur es up to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer Coat: Manufacturer's recommended metal primer.1) ICI: HT-10 Modified Silicone Black.2) K •H: N o p ri m e r required.3) Moore: N o p ri m e r required.4) S-W: N o p ri m e r required.5) Tne m ec:N o p ri m e r required.b. First and Second Coats: Heat-resistant Enamel.1) ICI: HT-10 Modified Silicone Black. 2) K •H: VyGuar d Hi-Heat Silicone Coating 37-J-1, Black. 3) Moore: HighHeat CoatingBlac k M66-80 4) S-W: Ke m H;Te m p heat FlexII450.5) Tne m ec: Series39-661SiliconeAlu m inu m .4. Heat-Resistant Coating: For surface temperatures up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Provide two coats. a. First and Second Coats: Al uminum-pigmented, silicon e-based h eat-resistant coating.1) ICI: HT-10 Modified Silicone Aluminum. 2) K •H: VyGuar d HighHeat Silicone Coating 37-F-2, Zinc Dust Gray. 3) Moore: HighHeat CoatingAlu m inu m M66-78 4) S-W: Hi-Hea t Silicone AlkydAlu m inu m , B59S8. C. Concrete and Concrete–based siding: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. First and Second Coats: Exterior acrylic emulsion.
PAINTING 09900-12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint #171.4) S-W: A-100Acrylic LatexFlat Exterio r Finish A-6Series.3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.1) ICI: Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer. 2) K •H: 9210Metal Pri m er.3) Moore: AlkydMetal Pri m e r M06.4) S-W: Ke m Kro m i k Metal Pri m er B50NZ^/B50WZ1. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K •H: 4200Alky d Undercoat.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydEna m el Undercoate r andPri m e r Seale r #245 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall &Woo d Pri m e r B49W2. c. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Alkyd.1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Accu-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-gloss Ena m el #271 4) S-W: ProMa r 200Se m i-GlossAlkydEna m el B34W200.2. Two-Component Waterborne Epoxy Coating, Gloss Finish: a. Primer: Waterborne epoxy.1) ICI: True-Glaze-WB 4030 Waterborne Epoxy Primer. 2) K •H: 5800Acrylic Pri m er.3) Moore: WaterborneEpoxy Pri m e r M08/M09. 4) S-W: Wate r -Base d CatalyzedEpoxy Pri m e r B70W100. b. First and Second Coats: Waterborne epoxy gloss coating.1) ICI: True-Glaze-WB 4408 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss. 2) K •H 3110WaterborneCatalyzedEpoxy. 3) Moore: Acrylic Epoxy GlossCoatingM43/M44 4) S-W: Wate r -Base d CatalyzedEpoxy B70/B60V25. B. Galvanized Metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Finish: Two finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
PAINTING 09900-13 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.1) ICI: Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer. 2) K •H: 5860All-PurposePri m er.3) Moore: FreshS t art #023 4) S-W: Galvite HSB50WZ30.b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K •H: 4200Undercoater.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Seale r #245.4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall &Woo d Pri m e r B49W2. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semi-gloss, low-odor, alkyd enamel.1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Acc-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-Gloss Ena m el #271 4) S-W: ProMa r 200Se m i-GlossAlkydEna m el B34W200 S eries.C. Concrete (Where scheduled Epoxy Paint): 1. Two-component, Polyamide-Epoxy Co ating System with gloss finish. a. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended undercoat. 1) ICI: True-Glaze 4508 Chemical Resistant Epoxy. 2) K •H: 9100Epoxy Ena m el.3) Moore: Polya m ideEpoxy GlossCoatingM36/M37 4) S-W: Tile-CladHighSolidsEpoxy B62Z Series. b. Second Coat: High-performance, polyamide-epoxy coating.1) ICI: True-Glaze 4508 Chemical Resistant Epoxy. 2) K •H: 9100Epoxy Ena m el.3) Moore: Polya m ideEpoxy GlossCoatingM36/M37 4) S-W: Tile-CladHighSolidsEpoxy B62Z Series. D. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic Latex Finish: Two coats ov er filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler.1) ICI: Bloxfil 4000 Heavy Duty Filler. 2) K •H: 5890Accu-ProAcrylicBloc k Filler.3) Moore: Moorcraf t Supe r Craf t LatexBloc k Fille r #285. 4) S-W: P r oMa r Interior/Exterio r Bloc k Fille r B25W25. b. Primer: Interior Latex Primer:
PAINTING 09900-14 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: 1416 Ultra-Hide Interior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 2300Accu-ToneInterio r LatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el. #276 4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexSe m i-GlossB31W200. c. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Acrylic Latex:1) ICI: 1416 Ultra-Hide Interior Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 2300Accu-ToneInterio r LatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexSe m i-Gloss Ena m el. #276.4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexSe m i-GlossB31W200. 2. Two-Component, Epoxy Emulsion Coating with Gloss Finish: Provide two finish coats of gloss, epoxy emulsion over concrete masonry block filler. a. Filler Coat: Concrete masonry block filler.1) ICI: Bloxfil 4000 Heavy Duty Filler. 2) K •H: 5890AcrylicBloc k Filler.3) Moore: Moorcraf t Supe r Craf t LatexBloc k Fille r #285 4) S-W: Heavy Duty Bloc k Filler B42W46.5) Tne m ec: 130-6601Environfill.b. First and Second Coats: Gloss, Epoxy Emulsion.1) ICI: True-Glaze-WB 4408 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss. 2) K •H: 3110WaterborneCatalyzedEpoxy. 3) S-W: Wate r Base d CatalyzedEpoxy,B70 Ser ies/B60V15.4) Moore: Acrylic Epoxy GlossCoatingM43/M44 5) Tne m ec: Series113H.B.Tne m e-Tufcoat.E. Gypsum Board Systems: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.1) ICI: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer. 2) K •H: 0890SandableDrywall Pri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253 4) S-W: PrepRite 200LatexWall Pri m e r B28W200. b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.1) ICI: 1210 Ultra-Hide Interior Flat. 2) K •H: 1511Accu-ToneLatexFlat.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexFlat #275. 4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexFlat B30W200.2. Acrylic Latex Egg-Shell Enamel: Two finish co ats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils. a. Primer:
PAINTING 09900-15 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 1) ICI: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer. 2) K •H: 0890sandabledrywall p ri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253 4) S-W: PrepRite 200LatexWall Pri m e r B28W200. b. First and Second Coats:1) ICI: 1412 Ultra-Hide Interior Eggshell. 2) K •H: 1903Accu-ProEggshell.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEgg-Shell Ena m el #274.4) S-W: ProMa r 200LatexEg-Shell B20W200. 3. Low-Odor Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.1) ICI: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer. 2) K •H: 0890sandabledrywall p ri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253.4) S-W: PrepRite 200LatexWall Pri m e r B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Alkyd Enamel.1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Accu-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-Gloss Ena m el #271.4) S-W: ProMa r 200Alky d Se m i-GlossB34W200. 4. High-Performance, Polyamide-Epoxy Coating System: Provide two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils. a. Base Coat: Manufacturer's recommended undercoat.1) ICI: Ultra-Hide 3210 Aquacrylic Gripper. 2) K •H: 0890sandabledrywall p ri m er.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecLatexEna m el Undercoate r an d Pri m e r Sealer.#253 4) S-W: P r opRite 200LatexWall Pri m er.5) Tne m ec: 51-792PVASealer.b. First and Second Coats: High-performance, polyamide-epoxy coating.1) ICI: True-Glaze 4508 Chemical Resistant Epoxy. 2) K •H: 9100Epoxy Ena m el.3) Moore: Polya m ideEpoxy GlossCoatingM36/M37. 4) S-W: Tile-CladHSEpoxy B62ZSeries.5) Tne m ec: Series66.F. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
PAINTING 09900-16 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. 1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K•H: 4200 Alkyd Undercoat 3) Moore: Moorcr aft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer. #245. 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Alkyd Enamel.1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss. 2) K •H: 4600Accu-ProSe m iglossEna m el.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecAlkydSe m i-Gloss Ena m el #271 4) S-W: ProMa r 200Alky d Se m i-GlossB34W200.. 2. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats. a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat. 1) ICI: 1020 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Undercoat. 2) K•H: 4200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Moore: Moorcr aft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and Primer Sealer. #245. 4) S-W: Prep-Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2. b. First and Second Coats: Gloss Alkyd Enamel.1) ICI: 2518 Ultra-Hide Durus Alkyd Gloss 2) K •H: 9800Accu-ProAlky d GlossEna m el. 3) Moore: UrethaneAlkydGlossEna m el M22. 4) S-W: IndustrialEna m elB-54Series.G. Stained Woodwork: 1. Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open-grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. a. Stain Coat: Oil-type interior wood stain.1) ICI: 1700 Woodpride Finishing Stain. 2) K •H: 8709Se m i-Transparent Stain.3) Moore: Benwoo d Pene t ratingS t ain#234.4) S-W: WoodClassicsOil StainA48-200Series. b. First Coat: Sealer.1) ICI: 1908 Woodpride Polyurethane Gloss. 2) K •H: Woodkraft Seale r 4048.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecSandingSeale r #267. 4) S-W: WoodClassicsFas t DrySeale r B26V43. c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler for open grain woods. 1) K•H: Old Master’s Paste Wood Filler.
PAINTING 09900-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2) Moore: Benwood Wood Grain Filler #238.3) S-W: She r -Woo d Fas t -Dr y Filler.d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.1) ICI: 1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin 2) K •H: Woodkraft SatinVa r nish.3) Moore: Benwoo d SatinFinishVarnish#404. 4) S-W: WoodClassicsVarnishG1A66-300 Series.. H. Natural-Finish Woodwork: 1. Rubbed Varnish Finish: Two finish coats over sealer plus filler on open-grain wood. a. First Coat: Sealer. 1) ICI: 1908 Woodpride Polyurethane Gloss. 2) K •H: Woodkraft Seale r 4048.3) Moore: Moorcraft Supe r SpecSandingSeale r #413. 4) S-W: Woo d ClassicsFas t DrySeale r B26V43. b. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler for open grain woods.1)K •H: Old Master’s Paste Wood Filler. 2) Moore: Benwoo d PasteWoodFille r #238.3) S-W: She r -Woo d Fas t -Dr y Filler.c. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.1) ICI: 1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin. 2) K •H: Woodkraft SatinVa r nish.3) Moore: Benwoo d SatinFinishVarnish#404. 4) S-W: WoodClassicsVarnishGlossA66-300 Series. I. Exterior Trusses and Corbeled Kickers/Roof Beam Extensions: 1. Stain Finish: Two coats to saturation. a. First Coat: Olympic Stain 700. b. Second Coat: Olympic Stain 700. END OF SECTION 09900
LOUVE R S AND VENTS10200-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in re ferenced standards. B. Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 in ches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided. C. Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a louver 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided. D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and ch annels in jambs and mullions. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1440 Pa), acting inward or outward. 2. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that a llow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of co mponents, and other detrimental effects: a. Temperature Change (Ran ge): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings : Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high. Test units according to AMCA 500. 1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units. 2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each typ e of product specified.
LOUVE R S AND VENTS10200-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations. C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples of same thickness and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes in volve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufactur ers of louvers certifying that the pr oducts furnished comply with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500 and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program. E. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of products with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents thro ugh one source from a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish. B. Welding Standards: As follows: 1. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone rec ertification. C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field m easurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrica tion schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fixed, Extruded-Aluminum louvers: a. Airolite Co.; Louver Model CB605D, 5” Ho rizontal Front Drainage Continuous Blade Appearance. b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Air Conditioning Louvers – 30 o Blade 0292/0291
LOUVE R S AND VENTS10200-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319. F. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. G. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, si ze, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip gal vanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic co mplying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to perm it field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates and without interrupting blade-spacing pattern. B. Maintain equal louver blade sp acing, including separation between blad es and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in op enings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoinin g materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide horizontal mullions, unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. F. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louv er blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of lo uver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. G. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view; unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades.
LOUVE R S AND VENTS10200-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.5 FIXED, FORMED-METAL LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with frames and blades formed from metal sheet of metal indicated. 2.6 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following requirements: 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening, unless otherwise indicated. B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-st eel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Metal: Same kind and form of meta l as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As follows: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.6-mm) wire. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish louvers after assembly. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C 42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitiv e primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. 2.. Color and Gloss: a. Kynar 500 color as selected by Architect from manufacturers custom color range.
LOUVE R S AND VENTS10200-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints w ith exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and gr inding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Di vision 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove prot ective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. D. Restore louvers and vents dama ged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restorati on are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 10200
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10300-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 10300 – PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated gas fireplaces. 1.2 REFERENCES A. WH (CERT) - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gas Fireplaces: A.G.A./C.G.A. approved for natural or LP gas. B. Gas Log Sets: A.G.A./C.G.A approved for natural or LP gas. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and installation instructions. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver to Owner manufacturer's recommended printed operation and maintenance procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect products upon receipt to ensure products are free from damage occurring in transit. B. Store products in covered ar ea, well protected from weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT A. Manufacturer and Product: Model G13600. B. Provide accessories as follows:: 1. Venting: B-vent from back or top as required for retro-fitting into each unit. Field verify prior to ordering. 2. Trim Kit: Black. 3. Fan Unit: Yes. 4. Wall Switch: Yes.
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10300-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 5. Log Kit: As selected by Architect. 6. BTU rating: 25,000. 2.2 FIREPLACE SCHEDULE A. EXISTING UNITS 1. Replacements (20) a. Mfr.- Napolean b. Model # - G13600 c. Btu - 24,000 d. Size - 43 1/2" x 27 1/2" e. Type - zero clearance, gas applia nce, fixed glass, natural gas f. Flue - replace B vent flue 2. End Units plus McIntyre (7) a. Mfr. - Town and Country b. Model # - TC54 Series C c. Btu - 90,000 d. Size - 54" e. Type - gas appliance, fixed glass f. Flue - B vent flue g. Gas Log/Burner - Real Fyre, Glowing Ember Burner (G4 series) 30", Split Oak Designer Plus logs (SDP series) 36" (90,000 btu) B. NEW UNITS 1. Living Rooms (provide venting only) a. Mfr. - Town and Country b. Model # - TC54 Series C c. Btu - 100,000 d. Size - 54" e. Type - open front, gas log f. Flue - B vent flue g. Gas Log/Burner - Real Fyre, Glowing Ember Burner (G4 series) 30", Split Oak Designer Plus logs (SDP series) 36" (90,000 btu) 2. Master Bedrooms (provide venting only) a. Mfr. - Town and Country, or Napolean GD80 b. Model # - TC42 Series c. Btu - 50,000 d. Size - 42" e. Type - glass front, gas appliance f. Flue - direct vent g. Gas Log/Burner - Real Fyre, Glowing Ember Burner (G5 series) 16", Split Oak Designer Plus logs (SDP series) 22" (55,000 btu)
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10300-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that dimensions are correct and substr ate is in proper condition for installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approval listings. B. No deviations or modifications are acceptable. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust components for proper operation. END OF SECTION 10300
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES10520 -1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 3. Fire-protection accessories. 4. Fire protections soffits: Spectis Moulders, Inc.; 1-800-685-9981; moulded high density polyurethane architectural product s; custom product per fire protection interior soffit shown on drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. Size: 6-by-6-inch- (150-by-150-mm-) square Samples. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire exting uishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, ra ting, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Maintenance: Provide filled-out Department of Transportation certificate #B-9 27, inspection tag, on each extinguisher.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES10520 -2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength.C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick. D. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished) or Finish 2 (patterned, textured). E. Acrylic Bubble: One piece. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated.B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, in enameled- steel container. 2.5 FIRE PROTECTION SOFFITS A. Manufacturer: Spectis Moulders, Inc.; 1-800-685-9981 B. Product: Moulded high density polyurethane architectural products; custom product per fire protection interior soffit shown on drawings. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. 2. Provide brackets for ex tinguishers lo cated in cabinets. B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES10520 -3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado a. Application Process: Silk-screened. b. Lettering Color: Red. c. Orientation: Vertical. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Aluminum: Color anodic. a. Color: Dark bronze. 3. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color and Gloss: Dark Bronze. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before ca binet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed. C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES10520 -4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to structur e and cabinets, square and plumb. 3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10520
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-1 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator work includes: 1. Commercial, standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators. 2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment. 3. Jacks. 4. Operation and control systems. 5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons. 6. Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity. 7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 3 Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete. 2. Division 4 Masonry: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry. 3. Division 5 Metals: a. Providing hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider beams for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Providing steel angle sill supports and gro uting hoistway entrance sills and frames. 4. Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished and shop primed ferrous materials. 5. Division 22 Plumbing: a. Sump pit and oil interceptor. 6. Division 23: Heating, Ventil ation and Air Conditioning a. Heating and ventilating hoistways and machine rooms. 6. Division 16 Sections: a. Providing electrical service to elevat ors, including fused disconnect switches. b. Emergency power supply, transfer switch and auxiliary contacts. c. Heat and smoke sensing devices. d. Convenience outlets and illumination in machine room, hoistway and pit. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: When requested, submit product data for the following: 1. Elevator car enclosures and hoistway entrances. 2. Operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop drawings: 1. Show equipment arrangement in the machine room/control space, pit and hoistway. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location. 2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information. 3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work. 4. Indicate electrical power requirements and br anch circuit protection device recommendations. C. Color selection: Submit color charts of exposed finishes and materials for color selection. 1. When requested, submit samples of exposed finishes and materials selected for the elevator system materials and components. D. Certificates: Inspection and acceptance certificates of elevator system installation.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-2 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado E. Operation and maintenance data. Include the following: 1. Operation and maintenance instructions. 2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project. 1. Must be the manufacturer of the power unit, controller, signal fixtures, door operators cab, entrances, and all other major parts of the elevator operating equipment. a. The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured in the United States, and not be an assembled system. 2. The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program. B. Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than five years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local building code. 2. Building Code: National. 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 5. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). D. Fire-rated Entrance Assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-S104 (ULC-S104), UL10(B), and NFPA 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 1/2 hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada). E. Inspection and testing: Elevator Inst aller shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and fees for elevator installation. 1. Arrange for inspections and make required tests. 2. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver elevator materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. B. Store materials in a dry protected area provided by others. Protect and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent damage, soiling, or deterioration. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Prohibited Use: Elevators shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser. B. Painting: 1. Except as otherwise specified, paint all metal work provided by the elevator manufacturer and installer. 2. Provide all ferrous metals installed in the hoist way shop primed with a rust inhibitive primer. C. Provide the hole for the jack unit (if required by the type of jack provided), based on excavation through normal soil or clay which can be removed by manual digging or by standard truck-mounted regular drilling unit. Provide a casing if required to retain the walls of the hole. General contractor shall remove
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-3 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado excavation spoils deposited in the elevator pit. 1. If a physical obstruction or hindrance is encountered below the ground surface, including boulders, rock, gravel, wood, metal, pilings, sand, water, quick sand, caves, public utilities or any other foreign material, obtain written authorization to proceed with excavating using special excavation equipment. 2. Maintain a daily log of time and material costs involved. 3. Elevator contractor will be compensated on a time and material basis for additional costs incurred after encountering the physical obstruction or hindrance, including the cost of the special excavation equipment. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or replace defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 12 months for each elevator from date of Substantial Completion. Service shall consist of peri odic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. 1. Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original equipment. 2. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100 mile radius of the project site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: ThyssenKrupp Elevator, Memphis, TN or equal conforming products by one of the following: 1. Fujitec America, Inc. 2. KONE Inc. 3. Otis Elevator Co. 4. Schindler Elevator Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Colors, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns, and finishes. B. Steel: 1. Shapes and bars: Carbon. 2. Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish. 3. Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel. C. Stainless steel: 1. Shapes and bars: No. 4 brushed or No. 8 polished stainless. 2. Tubing: No. 4 brushed or No. 8 polished stainless. D. Bronze: 1. Drawn pipe: Red brass.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-4 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2. Sheet: Muntz metal. 3. Extrusions: Architectural bronze. E. Aluminum: 1. Sheet and plate: Commercial quality. 2. Extrusions: Commercial quality. F. Nickel silver: Extrusions with polished finish. G. Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP-50 General Purpose Grade, nominal 0.050" thickness. H. Glass: Clear laminated safety glass, complying with ANSI Z97.1, nominal 9/16" thickness. I. Carpet: Manufacturer's standard Herculon IV color fast, stain and soil resistant, jute-backed carpet. Class B fire-resistance rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Select from manufacturer’s complete list of carpet colors. 2.03 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood subfloor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. B. Sling: Steel stiles affixed to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car enclosure. C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega sh aped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets. D. Guide Shoes: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car. E. Guide Rail Lubricators: Provide a leakproof reservoir on top of upper guide shoes. Wool felt wiper shall apply an even, uniform flow of lubricant which shall thoroughly cover face of guide rail. F. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator p it. Mount buffers on a steel template that is fastened to the pit floor or continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions. G. Jack: Jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Single post holeless telescopic 2-stage. Single jack typically mounted in the front structure of the car, with two telescopic sections designed to extend in a synchronized manner when oil is pumped into the Assembly. Each section shall be guided from within the casing or the plunger assembly used to house the section. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. The Jack Assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section. H. Terminal Limit Switches: Place limit switches in the hoistway near the terminal landings. Limit switches shall be designed to cut off the elect ric current and stop the car if it runs beyond either terminal landing. I. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to the landings and correct for overtravel or undertravel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-5 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado J. Failure Protection: Design electrical control circuit so if a malfunction occurs, due to motor starter failure, oil becoming low in the system, or the car failing to reach a landing in the up direction within a pre- determined time, the elevator car will automatically descend to the lowest terminal or other designated landing. If power operated doors are used, the doors will automatically open when the car reaches that landing to allow passengers to depart. The doors will then automatically close and all control buttons, except the "door open" button in the car station, shall be made inoperative. K. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. Provide proper grade oil as specified by the manufacturer of the power unit. L. Emergency Terminal Stopping Device: Provide emergency terminal stopping devices for speeds over 100 FPM. The emergency terminal stopping device shall operate independently of the normal terminal stopping device if it should fail to slow the car down at the terminal landing as intended. Stopping devices shall not be prevented from functioning by a single short circuit caused by a combination of grounds or by other conditions. 1. Normal and emergency terminal stopping devices shall not control the same controller switches unless two or more separate and independent switches are furnished, two of which shall be closed in either direction of travel to complete the circuit to the control valve solenoids in the down direction and to complete the circuit to th e pump motor for the up direction of travel. 2.04 POWER UNIT A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit consisting of the following items: 1. Oil reservoir with tank cover. 2. An oil hydraulic pump. 3. An electric motor. 4. Oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro- magnetic controlling solenoids. B. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifica lly manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car. C. Drive: Drive shall be by direct coupling with the pump and motor submerged in the oil reservoir or by multiple V-belts and sheaves of number and size to insure maximum factor of safety. Drive type shall be determined based primarily on the load on the car, travel, and speed. D. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically desi gned for oil-hydraulic el evator service. Duty rating shall be selected for specified speed and load. E. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line. 1. Relief valve shall be externally adjustabl e and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for dow n start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-6 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado initiated. F. Power controller shall contain electrical contactors, electro-mechanical switches and current overload relays. Mount components in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Logic control system shall be microprocessor based and protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations. G. Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic reduced voltage starter featuring adjustable starting currents. 2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening. 1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of 14 gauge frames with 2 inch (50 mm) profile, 18 gauge doors, hangers, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates, sight guards, and necessary hardware. 2. Elevator wall interface with hoistway entrance assembly shall comply with elevator manufacturer's requirements. 3. Doors: Flush construction a. Main landing: Primed steel panels faced with bronze sheet (muntz metal), natural brushed finish, lacquered. b. Typical landings: Primed steel panels faced with bronze sheet (muntz metal), natural brushed finish, lacquered. 4. Frames: Formed construction. a. Main landing: Primed steel faced with bronze sheet (muntz metal), natural brushed finish, lacquered. b. Typical landing: Primed steel faced with bronze sheet (muntz metal), natural brushed finish, lacquered. B. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Interlocks shall be designed to prevent movement of the car away from the landing until the doors are locked in the closed position as defined by code and shall prevent opening the doors at any landing from the corridor side unless the car is at rest at that landing or is in the leveling zone and stopping at that landing. C. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. 1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during operation. 3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. D. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum at the main landing and at typical landings. 2.06 CAR ENCLOSURE A. Car Enclosure: 1. Walls: Walls shall be finished with two coats factory applied baked enamel. Cab type TKS,reinforced 16 gauge cold-rolled steel. 2. Canopy: Reinforced 14 gauge cold-rolled steel with hinged exit. Finish: Two coats factory applied reflective baked enamel. 3. Ceiling: Suspended type, fluorescent li ghting with translucent diffuser mounted in a metal frame. a. Frame finish: Factory-applied baked enamel finish. Color selected from manufacturer's standard selection chart. b. Panel finish: Not Applicable
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-7 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 4. Cab Columns, Front, and Transom: Provide panels faced with brushed stainless steel. 5. Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides. a. Door Finish: Bronze: Primed steel panels faced with bronze sheet (muntz metal), natural brushed finish, lacquered. b. Cab Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish. 6. Handrail: Provide 2'' flat metal bar on side and rear walls on front opening cars and side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a bronze, natural brushed finish, lacquered finish. 7. Ventilation: Two speed exhaust fan mounted on the car top. 8. Protection Pads: Provide one set of vinyl protection pads with metal grommets for the project. Provide pad buttons on cab front(s) and walls. 9. Finished Floor: Finished flooring to be provided by others, with a maximum thickness of 3/8". B. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection st ation with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station will give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. 2.07 DOOR OPERATION A. Door Operation: Provide a direct current motor dri ven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be electrically cushioned at both limits of travel and the door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. Closed-loop, microprocessor controlled motor-driven linear door operator, with adjustable torque limits, also acceptable. AC controlled units with oil checks or other deviations are not acceptable. 1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: Car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the pr esent position or selected as the next car up. 2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated. 3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel will reverse and the door will reopen to answer the other call. 4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door movement is obstructed for a field programmable time, a buzzer will sound. If the multiple beam infra-red door protection system detects a person or object while closing, the doors will stop and resume closing after the obstruction has been removed. 5. Limited Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and an infra-red beam is interrupted, the doors will reverse and reopen partially. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors will begin to close. 6. Door Open Sentinel: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors will recycle closed then open six times to try and correct the fault. 7. Door Close Sentinel: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors will recycle open then close six times to try and correct the fault. 8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close. B. Door Protection Devices: Provide a door protection system using 154 microprocessor controlled infra-red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-8 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen. A mechanical reopening device is not acceptable. 2.08 CAR OPERATING STATION A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing retur n panel requiring no applied faceplate. Swing return shall have a brushed stainless steel finish. The panel shall consist of the following pushbuttons, key switches and indicators: 1. The bottom of the Car Operating Station shall contain the "door open," "door close," "alarm" buttons and a keyed "emergency stop" switch. 2. The Intermediate area of the station shall cont ain floor buttons which illuminate when a call is registered and remain illuminated until the call is answered. Raised floor indications and handicap symbols shall be located to the left and immediately adjacent to the floor buttons. No applied symbols or floor indications or symbols on the buttons shall be permitted. 3. The next level shall contain supplied options switches. 4. The top of the Car Operating Station shall contain fire service features, including operating instructions, in accordance with ASME A17.1 and any local code. B. Position Indicator: A position indicator shall be contained above floor push buttons. As the car travels, its position in the hoistway shall be indicated by the illumination of the alpha/numeric character corresponding to the landing which the elevator is stopped at or passing. C. Emergency Light: Emergency light, capacity plate, and elevator number shall be integrated into the top module.The emergency light shall consist of white LED’s and be capable of putting out a minimum of four (4) foot candles, one foot out and four foot in front of the car swing panel. The emergency light will illuminate automatically upon loss of the building’s normal power supply. D. Emergency Communications System: Provide an emergency communications device mounted integrally within the swing return. Emergency communications device shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADAAG) requirements. E. Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required F. Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close. G. Include the following special controls: 1. Independent service switch. 2. Inspection switch. 3. Two speed fan/light switch. 4. Certificate frame. H. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide telephone jack in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-9 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado 2.09 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Controller: The elevator control system shall be microprocessor based and software oriented and be linked together for purposes of communication by a serial communications link. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings. 1. Momentary pressing of one or more buttons shall dispatch the car to the designated landings in the order in which the landings are reached by the car, irrespective of the sequence in which the buttons are pressed. Each landing call shall be canceled when answered. 2. When the car is traveling in the up direction, it shall stop at all floors fo r which car buttons or "up" hall buttons have been pressed. The car shall not stop at floors where "down" buttons have been pressed, unless the stop for that floor has been registered by a car button or unless the down call is at the highest floor for which any buttons have been pressed. Pressing the "up" button when the car is traveling in the down direction shall not intercept th e travel unless the stop for that floor has been registered by a car button or unless the up call is the lowest for which any button has been pressed. 3. When the car has responded to its highest or lowest stop, and stops are registered for the opposite direction, its direction of travel shall reverse automatically and it shall then answer the calls registered for that direction. If both up and down calls are registered at an intermediate floor, only the call corresponding to the direction of car travel shall be canceled upon the stopping of the car at the landing. B. Microprocessor: Locate the main microprocessor and car controller in the elevator machine room, control space or hoistway. 1. Microprocessor for door operator shall reside in the door operator and control all functions of the elevator door(s). Communication to the car controller shall be serial. 2. Electronic selector shall reside on the car top and contain hall effect transducers that detect magnetic fields. Magnets, corresponding to floor positions and top/bottom of hoistway are mounted on a perforated metal tape th at runs the length of the hoistway. C. Provide Simplex Operation D. Provide a key operated switch in the elevator for the purpose of removing the car from normal operation. When the switch is in the "independent service" position, the elevator will bypass all landing calls and answer only car calls. The operator will have complete control over the operation of the car. E. Emergency Power Operation: (10-DOA) Upon loss of the normal power supply, building-supplied standby power is available on the same wires as the normal power supply. Once the loss of normal power is detected and standby power is available, the elevator is lowered to a pre-designated landing and the doors are opened. After passengers have exited the elevator, the doors are closed and the car is shut down. When normal power is restored, the elevator automatically resumes operation. F. Limited Access Features: None required. 2.10 HALL STATIONS A. Hall Stations, General: Provide butt ons with red-illuminating LED halos to indicate that a call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. Provide 1 set of pushbutton risers. Provide one set of pushbutton risers with faceplates having a brushed stainless steel finish. 1. Each terminal station shall contain one illuminating push button. 2. Each intermediate station shall consist of two illuminating pushbuttons, on e for the up direction and one for the down position. 3. Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructi ons, shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-10 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado B. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. C. Hall Position Indicator: Not Applicable D. Hall lanterns: Not required for this application. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS A. Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install an oil hydraulic silencer (muffler device) at the power unit location. The silencer shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing arranged for inspecting interior parts without removing unit from oil line. Rubber hose without blowout proof features will not be acceptable. B. Vibration Pads: Mount vibration pads under the power unit assembly to isolate the unit from the building structure. C. Sound Insulating Panels: When pump and motor are not submerged, provide panels manufactured of reinforced 14 gauge steel with 1 inch (25 mm) thick 1-1/2 pound fiberglass core attached to interior and mounted on all four open sides of the power unit frame. D. Sound Isolating Couplings: When pump and motor are not submerged, install a minimum of two isolation couplings in the oil line in the machine room between pump and jack. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before starting elevator installation, inspect ho istway, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms/control space, as constructed and verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install elevator systems component s and coordinate instal lation of hoistway wall construction. 1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation inst ructions and approved shop drawings. 2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation. B. Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the elevator manufacturer's experienced foreman. C. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, beari ng plates, brackets, supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. D. Jack unit excavation: Drill or otherwise excavate below elevator pit construction as required to install the jack unit. 1. Install casing for jack unit. 2. Provide HDPE jack protection system for all in ground jacks. 3. Set casing for jack unit assembly plumb, an d partially fill with water-settled sand, eliminating voids. Back fill depth shall be sufficient to hold the bottom of the jack in place over time. E. Set jack unit-cylinder assembly plumb, centered accurately and shimmed to proper elevation, using
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-11 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado centering lugs to prevent dislocation during filling. Fill space between casing and cylinder with clean, dry, compacted sand. F. Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn Parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualification of welding operators. G. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work. H. Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet, smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration. I. Sound isolation: Mount rotating, vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration-absorption mounts, designed to effectively prevent the transmission of vibrations to the structure, and eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from the elevator system. J. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing. K. Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascias and toe guards after rough walls are finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above finish floor at landings. L. Lubricate operating parts of system where recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator, perform acceptance tests as required by A17.1 Code and local authorities having jurisdiction. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or agencies. B. Advise Owner, Contractor, Archi tect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on the elevator. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately. 3.05 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless stall shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; shall not be cleaned with bleached-based cleansers. B. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. 3.06 PROTECTION A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS14240-12 L ION S QUARE L ODGE E AST Vail, Colorado coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. 3.08 ELEVATOR SCHEDULE A. Elevator: ThyssenKrupp Holeless Hydraulic 1. Elevator Model: AMEE 25C 2. Rated Capacity: 2500 lbs. 3. Rated Speed: 100 ft./min. 4. Operation System: TAC20 5. Travel: 18'-0'' 6. Landings: 3 total 7. Openings: a. Front: 3 b. Rear: N/A 8. Clear Car Inside: 6' - 8'' wide x 0' - 0'' high 9. Cab Height: 8 nominal 10. Hoistway Entrance Size: 3' - 6'' wide x 7'-0 high 11. Door Type: Single Speed 12. Power Characteristics: 460 volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz. 13. Seismic Requirements: Zone 1 B. Elevator Finish Schedule: 1.Ceiling: Halogen downlight with bronze satin finish panel. 2.Handrails: 2” flat bar with returned ends bronze satin finish. 3.Walls: Formica Select Cherry (submit samples for rev iew with shops) with black laminate base/reveal/frieze. 4.Floor: install carpet to match elevator lobby 5.Door: elevator door bronze satin finish, aluminum sill 6.Front return: full width wrap around return bronze satin finish front with traditional fixtures 7.Cab height: standard 8.Controls: Traditional fixtures END OF SECTION 14240
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Protection Specification Page 1 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnishing of labor, materials, equipmen t, and service necessary for the complete installation and testing, adjusting, and placing into service of the fire protecti on systems as specified herein and as required by Vail Fire & Emergency Services. B. The scope of work included in this specification is: 1. Wet pipe sprinkler system, per NFPA 13 , throughout conditioned areas of building , to accommodate remodel. The existing system must be upgraded as necessary to comply with current standards . 2. Exterior sprinkler coverage, as spec ified herein, for each residential balcony, through sidewall mounted, dry sprinkler head. 3. Attic and roof overframe sprinklers, through an antifreeze loop or dry heads. 4. Upgrade of existing fire entry equipment. Existing 4” water entry shall remain 5. Installation of Class I , manual dry standpipes in stairwells, as reflected on the Drawings. C. Work included in this specification shall consist of, but is no t necessarily limited to, the following items: 1. O bt ain and bear the cost of necessary permits, bonds, and fees. 2. Installation of a complete, operable and code compliant fire sprinkler system. 3. Furnish and install waterflow and tamper switches. Coordinate l ocations and monitoring with fire alarm contractor. Outside horn/strobe to be provided by fire alarm contractor. 4. Complete required cutting and patching. 5. Include miscellaneous items as specified. D. Per recent Testing & Inspection records dated 4/26/06, the existing sprinkler system has a static pressure of 165 psi , a residual pressure of 135 psi and a flow rate of 392.4 gpm . Fire Protection Contractor is responsible for verifying all field pressures prior to construction. E. The complete installation shall b e in compliance all applicable codes and standards referenced herein. F. Fire protection contractor shall be properly licensed in the Town of Vail.
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Protection Specification Page 2 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 G. Coordinate work with other trades, building conditions and structural conditions prior to installation. 1.2 SUBM ITTALS A. Three sets of shop drawings, equipment submittals & hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to the project Fire Protection Engineer for review prior to commencement of construction. Submittal shall include product data for each type sprinkler h ead, valve, pip e, fittings, fire department connection, system accessories and miscellaneous equipment. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 including hydraulic calculations. B. Submit 3 sets of submittals, drawings and calculations t o the Vail Fire & Emergency Servi c es plan review office , along with appropriate permit applications. 1.3 SITE DOCUMENTATION A. Maintain at the site one record set of drawings, specifications, accepted shop drawings an d accepted submittals . Upon project complet ion, provide a complete set of reproducible as -built drawings to the owner . 1.4 REFERENCES /APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) C. Vail Fire & Emergency Services (VFES) Requirements D. T own of Vail Requirements E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13 F. International Building Code (IBC) 200 3 G. International Fire Code (IFC) 2003 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall be a complete, operable and code co mpliant fire sprinkler system in compli ance with all applicable requirements. B. Equipment, accessories, and products shall be: 1. UL Listed 2. Manufactured according to the latest standards, methods, techniques, and codes applicable at the time of bidding. 3. The product of experienced manufacturers, n ew and free from defects in manufacture or performance. 4. Each system component shall be installed in according to manufacturer's recommendations for the specific service conditions. 5. Permanently marked with manufact urer's identification showing (if
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Protection Specification Page 3 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 applicabl e): a) Manufacturer b) Capacity c) Service rating d) Type, grade, or class of each item e) Certificat ion or approval 1.6 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY A. T he fire protection contractor is responsible without reservation for their design and for cooperation and coordination with the design direction established by the Fire Protection Engineer . B. Any areas of disagreement must be resolved prior to commencing any work or ordering of materials. The system must be reviewed satisfactorily by the AHJ , all applicable agencies and owner’s r epresentative. C. Any contractor submitting a proposal for the fire protection systems accepts total responsibility for their systems both in their performance as stated above and herein and for their adequate protection from any damage and for the resultin g damage from failure of their system due to freezing. 1.7 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Fire Protection Contractor shall conduct a water flow test or obtain proper water model data , prior to completion of submittal drawings. Water supply data shall be included in submit tal package. B. System shall be designed per NFPA 13. C. All equipment used in the system shall be UL listed. D. Sprinkler system shall be wet pipe in all conditioned areas. In areas subject to freezing, an antifreeze loop shall be provided or dry heads shall be installed. The existing sprinkler risers shall remain. New areas shall be supplied by tapping off of existing sprinkler lines in the building. The entire system shall be hydraulically calculated. E. Standpipes shall be manual dry, separate from the spr inkler risers. New standpipe piping shall be buried underground as shown on the plans. PART 2 EQUIPMENT/MANUFACTURERS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Contractor shall choose equipment manufacturer, provided all specification
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Protection Specification Page 4 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 requirements are met. All equipment is su bject to approval by Fire Protection Engineer and Vail Fire & Emergency Services. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Steel Piping and Fittings: Per ASTM, ANSI standards; Schedule 40 or equivalent, UL listed for fire protection systems. B. Provide fittings, couplings, unions and o ther piping accessories as necessary. All equipment shall be UL listed for fire protection systems and supplied in accordance with NFPA 13 and other applicable standards. C. Existing backflow preventer may remain, provided it is in compliance with state and local requirements . The fire protection contractor shall inspect the existing fire entry to ensure compliance. D. Provide valves of the size and type appropriate for use in the fire protection system as specified herein. All valves shall be UL listed for their use and supplied in accordance with NFPA 13 and other applicable standards. All valves shall be new. E. S prinkler Heads: Provide UL listed sprinkler heads, upright, pendent or sidewall type. Indicate each type and location on submittal plans. PA RT 3 EXECUTION 3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ on the job a competent superintendent for the progress and execution of the work. Labor quality shall be of high standards, conforming to standard practice as stipulated by NFPA, ASTM, and ANSI recommendations, by skilled personnel. B. Contractor's Qualifications: Any installation, modification, or alteration of a sprinkler system shall be performed only by a person qualified to do so, as defined by the state and local regulations. C. The Contractor shall be respon sible for any damage to the work of other trades, the building and property of others due to leaks or defects in the fire protection system, piping and equipment. Contractor shall pay for necessary replacement or repair of work or items damaged due to the fire protection system. 3.2 TESTS A. Cleaning: Before conducting any tests , flush clean the complete system to remove dirt and debris .
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Protection Specification Page 5 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 B. Flow Test: At start of project, fire protection contractor shall be responsible for conducting site flow test. Include flow test data in project submittal. C. System tests: Conduct all required tests, as regulated by Vail Fire & Emergency Services. D. Hydrostatic test: The fire protection piping shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200 pounds psig for a dura tion of not less than 2 h ours with no drop in pressure. END OF SECTION
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 1 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 1 SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section covers the fire alarm system , including initiating devices, notification appliances, auxiliary controls, and supervisory devices. B. This section includes the furnishing of labor, equi pment, and materials for installation of the fire alarm system as specified herein . The scope of work for this project includes : 1. F urnishing of a new, complete fire alarm system for the remodeled Lions Square Lodge – East Building . The system currently re ports to the existing FACP in the South Building. This panel shall be replaced with a new Notifier NFS 3030 FACP. Project includes equipment, programming and installation. C. The Fire Alarm System shall perform the following functions: 1. Fire alarm and detecti on operations 2. Occupant Notification thr o ugh horns and strobes 3. Reporting to Central Monitoring Station 4. Monitoring of fire sprinkler system 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract . B. The system and all associated operations shall be in accordance with the following: 1. International Building Code (200 9 edition) 2. International Fire Code (200 9 edition) 3. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code (20 10 edition) 4. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code 5. Town of Vail and Vail Fire & Emergency Services requ irements 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Contractor is responsible for providing a compliant system in accordance with all applicable standards.
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 2 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 2 1. FACP – Provide an addressable fire alarm control panel. The panel shall be placed in the South Building at the existing FACP location. All required clearances (3’) must be maintained. The FACP shall be located in a dry, clean, heated location . All devices on the South building shall be placed on the new FACP. Demo existing FACP in South Building. 2. Smoke detectors (non -resident ial areas) – Provide addre ssable system smoke detectors as required by VFES Standards. 3. Smoke/heat /CO detectors (residential units) – Provide addressable multisensor detectors with sounder bases . A smoke sensor activation shall initiate a local alarm in th e unit only and annunciate a supervisory condition at the FACP. All sounder bases within a single unit must activate together for a local alarm. A heat sensor activation will initiate general alarm throughout the building. Detectors shall be located in all sleeping rooms (centered in the room) and in areas immediately outside of sleeping rooms. One device per unit shall be combination smoke, heat and carbon monoxide. 4. Manual pull stations – Provide addressable manual pull stations at all exits, includin g the stairwells on each floor. 5. Heat detectors – In areas not suitable for smoke detectors, provide heat detectors. 6. Occupant notification – Occupant notification shall be accomplished with horns and strobes. Provide sounder bases for general alarm in each residential unit. In addition, the system must be capable of providing a local alarm in the residential unit upon activation of a smoke detector in the unit. Provide horns and strobes in common areas (i.e. lobbies, corridors, public areas). ADA units s hall meet all accessibility requirements, including visual notification, properly mounted. 7. Sprinkler supervision – Fire alarm system shall supervise the sprink l er system, through addressable monitor modules connected to waterflow and tamper switches. Prov ide an outside horn/strobe, at the FD C , to indicate waterflow. 8. Elevator recall – Provide primary and secondary elevator recall. If necessary, provide elevator shunt trip interface through the fire alarm system. 9. System accessories – Provide control relay s and other accessory devices, as necessary to accommodate building features and systems. B. Coordination with Fire Protection Engineer – Prior to completion of fire alarm shop drawings, the fire alarm contractor shall conduct a mandatory coordination meetin g with the project Fire Protection Engineer.
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 3 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 3 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide a complete, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor -based fire alarm system with initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring and control devices as specified he rein. B. Wiring/Signal Transmission: 1. Transmission shall be addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only. 2. System connections for initiating (signaling) circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be Class B. 3. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation. C. Required Functions: The following are required system functions and operating features: 1. Priority of Signals: Alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received. Priority Two, Supervisory and Trouble events have second -, third -, and fourth -level priority respectively. Signals of a higher priority take precedence over signals of lower priority regardless of order received. Annunciate all events. 2. Noninterfering: The activation of an addressable device does not prevent the receipt of signa ls from subsequent activations. 3. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatica lly route alarm, supervisory, and trouble sign als to a remote central station. 4. Annunciation: Activation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP indicating the location and type of device. 5. General Alarm: A system gener al alarm shall include: a) Indication of alarm condition at the FACP b) Identification of the alarm device at the FACP c) Operation of audible and visual notification devices throughout the building until silenced at FACP. d) Notifiying the local fire department. 6. S upervisory /Pre Alarm Operations: Upon activation of a supervisory device (such as a tamper switch , unit smoke sensor ), the system shall operate as follows: a) Activate the system supervisory audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control unit b) Record the event in the FACP historical log.
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 4 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 4 c) Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. d) Restoring the cond ition restore system to normal. 7. Alarm Silencing: Pressing the Alarm Silence button shall cease operations of audible alarm signals. 8. Syste m Reset: The System Reset button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps as they occur. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed sta te. D. Analog Smoke Sensors: 1. Monitoring: FACP shall individually monitor sensors for status, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the se nsor value to the stored values. 2. Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor’s smoke chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection operations. 3. The FACP s hall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor’s average value reaches a predetermined value, a “DIRTY SENSOR” condition shall be indicated at the FACP. The sensor base LED shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a “DIRTY SENSOR” is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an “EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR” trouble condition shall be indicated at the control unit. E. Fire Suppression Monitoring: 1. Water f low: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm operations. 2. Sprinkler valve tamper switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate system supervisory operations. F. Audible Alarm Notification: By horns throughout the building, in accordance with the audibility requirements of NFPA 72. Visual Alarm Notification: By strobes in corridors, common areas, and ADA units. G. Power Requirements 1. Primary: The control unit shall receive 120 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconne ct circuit. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. 2. Secondary: The system shall be prov ided with sufficient battery capacity per NFPA 72. Vail Fire and Emergency Services requires 15 minutes of alarm battery backup.
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 5 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 5 3. Provide sufficient power supplies, either at the FACP or remotely, to accommodate system requirements, as represented by the d evice layout on the drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following to Fire Protection Engineer: 1. Product dat a sheets for system components, illustrating UL listing of each device. 2. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer. 3. Shop drawings showing system deta ils includin g location of FACP, all devices and circuiting . 4. System description including circuit supervision, auxiliary controls and sequence of operations. 5. Operating and Maintenance Manual: Provide data for each product, including all features and operat ing sequences. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations. 6. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of system components. 7. System test records. B. Submission to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Submit to the auth ority having jurisdiction copies of submittals as described in item A. Fire alarm contractor is responsible for obtaining and paying for the fire alarm permit. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A factory authorized installer is to perform the work of this section. The installation must be supervised or performed by a minimum of a NICET level II technician. B. The installing company must hold the proper and required license in the Town of Vail. C. All equipment shall be UL (Underwriter’s Laboratory) Listed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Notifier – specifically the NFS 3030 FACP to replace the existing AFP400
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 6 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 6 2. Alternate manufacturers are not allowed due to the presence of Notifier devices in the South Building (to remain). Compatibility must be proven. B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves obligation to provide all equipment and features in accordance with these specifications. 2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire -Protective Signaling Systems." B. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required for testing and maintenance are performed from the front of the enclos ure. C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and trouble messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. 2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Descri ption: Double -action type, red LEXAN or metal, with white raised -letter operating instructions. Station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset with a key common with the control units. 2.4 SMOKE SENSORS A. General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Device shall consist of a permanent base and a plug in sensor. Detectors shall be self -restoring, intelligent and analog. B. Type: Smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric type. Ionizatio n type sensors may not be used. C. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer. Detector includes rela y as required for fan shutdown. Each duct detector shall have a Remote Test Stati on with an alarm LED and test switch. Ionization detectors may not be used. 2.5 HEAT DETECTORS A. Thermal Sensor: Combination fixed -temperature and rate -of -rise unit with plug -in base and alarm indication lamp; 135 -deg F fixed -temperatu re setting except as indic ated. 2.6 ALARM -NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 7 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 7 A. Fire Alarm Horns: Electric vibrating polari zed type, operating on 24VDC. Audible level shall be 75db throughout or 15 db above ambient, per NFPA 72. B. Visual Notification Appliances: Multi c andela output, 24 VDC operatio n, wall mounted with "FIRE" printed vertically. Strobes shall be provided in candela as needed to comply with NFPA 72. C. Audible/Visual Units: Combination notification appliances consist of factory -combined, audible and visual notification units in a singl e mounting assembly. D. Mounting: Devices may be wall or ceiling mount. Fire Protection Engineer recommends ceiling mount in most locations. 2.7 ADDRESSABLE MODULES A. Addressable Modules: M onitor one or more system components that are not otherwise equipped for ad dressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve tamper, and non -addressable devices. B. Modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electrical box. Modules will include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. Modules will receive their operating power from the signaling line or a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply as required. C. The Module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control unit. Module identification shall b e transmitted to the control unit for processing according to the program instructions. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install system components and all associated devices in accordance with applicable NFPA Standards and manufacturer’s recommen dations. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans. Include sufficient equipment, wiring, terminations, electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete , operat ing system. B. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Shall be maintained fully operational until the new equipment has been tested and accepted. C. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, disconnect and remove the existing fire alarm equipm ent and restore damaged surfaces. D. Water -Flow and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve required to be supervised.
Lions Square Lodge – East Building Fire Alarm S pecification Page 8 Building Permit 2 -23 -12 16721 - 8 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. System Wiring: Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval agency acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate articles from the current approved edition of NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC). B. Color Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differen tly from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color -code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Paint fi re alarm system junction boxes and covers red. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory -authorized representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjus tment of the system. B. Pretesting: Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. C. System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72 and per the requirements of Vail Fire & Emergency Services. D. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written r ecord of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. E. Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy: 1. Test the system as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of oc cupancy. END OF SECTION
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220500 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BU ILDING RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBIN G PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fitt ings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equi pment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physi cal contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient tempe ratures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Plumbing Fixtures to the architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANC E A. Steel Suppor t Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel."
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -2 B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipme nt of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITT INGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or sp ecific material is indicated. C. Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water -flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -joi nt, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F . D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150 - or 300 -psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -3 E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F . F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F . 2.4 MECH ANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulat ed piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep -drawn, box -s haped brass with polished chrome -plated finish. C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. D. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -4 2.7 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi , 28 -day compressi ve strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indica te general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layo ut are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right ang les or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penet rations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diame ter. 2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -5 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for slee ves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations wit h firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water -flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder a lloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads ac cording to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry se al threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified pr ocesses and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bo lt threads.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -6 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materia ls of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATI ON - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specifi c mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenan ce, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at re quired slope. 3.5 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 i nches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000 -psi , 28 -day compressive -strength concrete and r einforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SU PPORTS AND ANCHORAGE S A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in loca tion, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -7 C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUP PORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Att ach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 22050 0
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 2205 23 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BU ILDING RENOVATION G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the fol lowing general -duty valves: 1. Copper -alloy ball valves. 2. Copper -alloy butterfly valves. 3. Bronze check valves. 4. Spring -loaded, lift -disc check valves. 5. Bronze gate valves. 6. Bronze globe valves. B. See Division 21 fire -suppression pi ping and fire pump Sections for fire -protection valves. C. See Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve de sign; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASM E Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers s pecified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -2 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. B. Br onze Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. F. Valve Actuators: 1. Handwheel: For valves oth er than quarter -turn types. 2. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast -iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze v alves. I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45. 2.3 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufactur ers: 1. One -Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Jamesbury, Inc. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Two -Piece, Copp er -Alloy Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Flow -Tek, Inc. e. Grinnell Corporation.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -3 f. Hammond Valve. g. Honeywell Braukmann. h. Jamesbury, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Red -White Valve Corp. l. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -110. C. One -Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome -plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400 -psig CWP rating. D. Two -Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full -port, chrome -plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CW P rating and blowout -proof stem. 2.4 COPPER -ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALV ES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flangeless, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: a. American Val ve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red -White Valve Corp. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Single -Flange, Copper -Allo y Butterfly Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red -White Valve Corp. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Produ cts Div. B. Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP -67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flang eless, 150 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one - or two -piece stem. D. Flangeless, 175 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one - or two -piece stem.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -4 E. Flangeless, 200 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy But terfly Valves: Wafer type with one - or two -piece stem. F. Flangeless, 250 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one - or two -piece stem. G. Single -Flange, 150 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one - or two -piece stem. H. Single -Flange, 175 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one - or two -piece stem. I. Single -Flange, 200 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one - or two -piece stem. J. Single -Flange, 250 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one - or two -piece stem. 2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Ty pe 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincin nati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Red -White Valve Corp. 3. Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell, Wm. Co. j. Red -White Valve Corp. k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. l. Milwaukee Valve Company. m. NIBCO INC. n. Red -White Valve Corp. o. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -5 B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP -80. C. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. D. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. E. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. 2.6 SPRING -LOADED, LIFT -DISC CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type I, Wafer Lift -Disc Che ck Valves: a. Mueller Steam Specialty. 2. Type II, Compact -Wafer, Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc. b. Flomatic Valves. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty. h. NIBCO INC. 3. Type III, Gl obe Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc. b. Flomatic Valves. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Metraflex Co. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Multiplex Manufacturing Co. h. NIBCO INC. 4. Type IV, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Check -All Valve Mfg. C o. b. Grinnell Corporation. c. Metraflex Co. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Mueller Steam Specialty. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Lift -Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74 -1, with spring -loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat. C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift -Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -6 D. Type I, Class 250, Wafer Lift -Disc Check Valves : Wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges. E. Type II, Class 125, Compact -Wafer, Lift -Disc Check Valves: Compact -wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. F. Type II, Class 250, Compact -Waf er, Lift -Disc Check Valves: Compact -wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. G. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast -iron shell and flanged ends. H. Type III, Class 250, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast -iron shell and flanged ends. I. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and threaded ends. J. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze she ll and threaded ends. 2.7 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising -Stem Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Cr ane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising -Stem, Solid -Wedge Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell, Wm. Co . j. Red -White Valve Corp. B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel. C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem an d bronze solid wedge. D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -7 E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge. F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Br onze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. 2.8 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co .; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. i. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Va lves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel. C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLIC ATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring -loaded, lift -disc check valves. B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One -piece, 400 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1 /2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. 4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze. 6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. 7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single -plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150, ferrous alloy. 8. Spring -Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Va lves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125 minimum. 9. Spring -Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron. 10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze. 11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, C lass 125, OS&Y, bronze -mounted cast iron. 12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze. 13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze -mounted cast iron. D. Sanitary Waste Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valv es, NPS 2 and Smaller: One -piece, 400 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125, bronze. 4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Cla ss 125, gray iron. 5. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze. 6. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze -mounted cast iron. 7. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze. 8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 a nd Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron. E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder -joint or threaded ends. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 : Flanged ends. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 : Flanged ends. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
AESI 27210 G ENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -9 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal withou t system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Dual -Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position , between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction. B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket , lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water -flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 ADJUST ING 1. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 22052 3
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220529 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes t he following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. C. See Division 21 Section "Water -Based Fire -Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire -suppression piping. D. See Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Pip ing" for pipe guides and anchors. E. See Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equi pment and connected systems and components. C. Design seismic -restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal -hanger shield inserts.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -2 3. Powder -actuated fastener system s. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding cer tificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offerin g products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS A ND SUPPORTS A. Des cription: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 3. Empire Industries, Inc. 4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 5. Grinnell Corp. 6. National P ipe Hanger Corporation. 7. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 8. PHS Industries, Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -3 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop - or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made from structu ral -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U -bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEM S A. Description: MFMA -3, shop - or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Coo per Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 THERMAL -HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100 -psig - minimum, compressive -strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water -repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. D. Ins ulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water -repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover l ower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -4 b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Faste ners. B. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Re d Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop - or field -fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes. 2.8 MISCELLANE OUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior application s. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi , 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT A PPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipm ent. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. D. Use nonme tallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -5 F. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and exc ept as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 . 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 , requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon - or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 , requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjus table, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 . 5. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 . 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 , w ith steel pipe base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 , from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Typ e 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 , if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system S ections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 . 2. Carbon - or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 , if longer ends are require d for riser clamps. H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Typ e 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C -Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar -joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom fla nge of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C -Clamps (M SS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb . b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb . c. H eavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb . 8. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -6 J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in w riting by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. S pring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1 -1/4 inches . 2. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder -actuated fasteners or mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 3.2 HANGER AN D SUPPORT INSTALLATI ON A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Vari ous Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being s upported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field -assembled met al framing systems. D. Thermal -Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder -actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder -actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder -actuated tool manufactu rer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -7 F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts , rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded -structural -steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will no t be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the f ollowing: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2 : 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4 : 12 in ches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 : 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 : 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 : 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Materi al: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipme nt above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -8 C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pi pe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc wel ding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or o verlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachm ents and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils . B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780 . END OF SECTION 22052 9
HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220533 L ION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing for freeze prevention, domestic hot -water -temperature maintenance, and snow and ice melting on roofs and in gutters and downspouts with the following electric heat ing cables: 1. Plastic insulated, series resistance. 2. Self -regulating, parallel resistance. B. See Division 21 Section "Heat Tracing for Fire -Suppression Piping." C. See Division 23 Section "Heat Tracing for HVAC Piping." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capa cities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. 1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for each electric heating cable required. B. Shop Drawings: Fo r electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in th is Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 2 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer 's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SELF -REGULATING, PARALLEL -RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. BH Thermal Corporation. 2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Divi sion; Emerson Electric Company. 3. Delta -Therm Corporation. 4. Easy Heat Inc. 5. Nelson Heat Trace. 6. Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls. 7. Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls. 8. Thermon Manufacturing Co. 9. Trasor Corp. 2.2 CONTROLS A. Pipe -Mounting Thermostats for Freeze Protection: 1. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F . 2. Snap action; open -on -rise, single -pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for connected cable. 3. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipe -wall temperature. 4. Corrosion -resistant, waterproof control enclosure. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat -conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished b y manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 3 C. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with pressure -sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self -adhesive back. 1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches : 3/4 inch minimum. 2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD , Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1 -1/2 inches minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described: 1. Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Self -regulating, parallel -resistance heating cable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install electric heat ing cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack cable to allow movement without damage to cable. B. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Snow and Ice Melting on Roofs and in Gutters and Downspouts: Install on roof and in gutters and downspouts with clips furnished by manufacturer that are compatible with roof, gutters, and downspouts. C. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Freeze Protection for Piping : 1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed. 2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1. 3. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insul ation." 4. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables. D. Electric Heating Cable Installation for Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water: 1. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested an d before insulation is installed. 2. Install insulation over piping with electric heating cables according to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 3. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables. E. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges. F. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage. G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 4 H. Connect wiring according to D ivision 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete. 1. Test cables f or electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing. 2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultaneously. B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe -mounting cables. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 220533
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220700 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. d. Polyolefin. e. Polystyrene. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory -applied jackets. 7. Field -applied fabric -reinforcing mesh. 8. Field -applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles. B. Relat ed Sections include the following: 1. Division 21 Section "Fire -Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each typ e of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specia lties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field -applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for eac h equipment type.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -2 C. Field quality -control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determine d by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate ma rkings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shal l be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stain less steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory -Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Clos ed -cell, sponge - or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -3 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180. H. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Blanket I nsulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin -Glas. b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations. I. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Ma nville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas. c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. J. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A,with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Fa ctory -Applied Jackets" Article. K. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material wi th factory -applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k -value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulati on.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -4 L. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k -value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam. b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insula tion Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik -Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular -Glass Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F . 1. Products: Subject to compliance with r equirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33. C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. c. ITW TACC, Div ision of Illinois Tool Works; S -90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -5 E. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent - or water -based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F . 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. F oster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97 -13. F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S -90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25. G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns -Manville; Zeston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Solvent We lding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible w ith insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL -C -19565C, Type II. B. Vapor -Barrier Mast ic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to c ompliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon -Eco Industries, I nc.; 55 -40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weig ht. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -6 b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35 -00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -05/15. d. Marathon Industrie s, Inc.; 550. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC -1/WC -5. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F . 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Pittsburgh Cor ning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -70. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45/30 -46. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750 . 3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F . 6. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to complianc e with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95 -44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire - and water -resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: Aluminum. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flash ing Sealants:
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -7 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Produc ts, Division of ITW; CP -76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire - and water -resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: White. 2.6 FACTORY -APPLIED J ACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil - thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 5. PVDC Jac ket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil - thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 8 4. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 6. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retar der Film. 2.7 FIELD -APPLIED FABRIC -REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch , in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -8 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast -A -Fab. b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. PVC Jacket: High -impact -resistant, UV -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As reco mmended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory -fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45 - and 90 -degree, s hort - and long -radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory -fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H -14. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, p rovide the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate. 2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied j acket schedules. 4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil - thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper . 5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3 -mil - thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 6. Factory -Fabricated Fitting Covers: a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45 - and 90 -degree, short - and long -radius el bows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory -fabricated fitting covers are not available.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -9 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., In c., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils . 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width . 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111 . c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils . 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in w idth. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching field -applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compa c Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches . 3. Thickness: 6 mils . 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in widt h. D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -10 a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches . 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils . 4. Adhesion : 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. E. PVDC Tape: W hite vapor -retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches . 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils . 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils . 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Ba nds: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H -14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insu lation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul -Hangers, Series T. 2) GE MCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper - or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch - diameter shank, length to su it depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -11 2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Att ached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements : a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwe st Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch - diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2 -1/2 inches . d. Adhesive: Recom mended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 3. Self -Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spi ndle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul -Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Sel f Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper - or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch - diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive -backed bas e with a peel -off protective cover. 4. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self -locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch - thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diamet er. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150. 2) GEMCO; R -150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self -locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 5. Nonmetal Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self -locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch - thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -12 C. Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -i nch - wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.080 -inch nickel -copper alloy. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire. b. Childers Products. c. PABCO M etals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc. 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch , PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 b y 1 inch , aluminum according to ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordina te insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless -steel surface s, use demineralized water. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and spec ialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials an d suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of i nsulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -13 H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal s eams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at han gers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from po int of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation i nserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, suppor t, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch - wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches . Install insulation with longitu dinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self -sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressin g insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over da maged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stam ps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -14 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation fl ush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiri ng only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint wi th joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches . 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not F ire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirem ents in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assem blies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULAT ION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in vario us pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seam s, voids, and irregular surfaces
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -15 with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material an d thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulatio n of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer b asket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions usin g a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cem ent and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing se alant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that o n adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pip e insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges excep t divide the two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -16 3.5 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INS TALLATION A. Insulation Inst allation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -b arrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitud inal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of p ipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe F ittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered secti ons of cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLAT ION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended a dhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of f lange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -17 C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to a llow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in i nsulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INS TALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without d eforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with out ward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -ba rrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe ins ulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not av ailable, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -18 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insul ation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 POLYSTYRENE INSULATI ON INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without defor ming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. 2. For insulation with factory -applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor -barrier system. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not t o exceed 1 -1/2 -inch thickness. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. C. Insulation Install ation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install pre formed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FIELD -APPLIED J ACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket wi th 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3 -inch - wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor -retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor -barrier mastic. B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 -inch over lap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -19 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, on e bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof seal ant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory -presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhes ive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along len gth of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33 -1/2 inches or less. The 33 -1/2 -inch - circumference limit allows for 2 -inch - overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to av oid damage to tape edges. 3.10 FINISHES A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish C oat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary f irst and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections:
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -20 1. Inspect field -insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequ ate to determine compliance. 2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three lo cations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each p ipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heat -Exchanger (Water -to -Water for Domestic Water Heating Service) Insulation: Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick. D. Domestic water, domestic chilled -water (potable), and domestic hot -water hydropneumatic tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thic k. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. E. Domestic Hot -Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. F. Piping System Filter -Housing Insulation: Mineral -F iber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick. 3.13 PIPING INSULATION SC HEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULA TION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
AESI 27210 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -21 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. B. Domestic Chilled Water (Potable): Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. END OF SECTION 22070 0
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221116 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water pipin g inside the building. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company. C. See Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. D. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialtie s" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," f or plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping an d components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. C. Soft Coppe r Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L , water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Cl ass 150, with solder -joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball -and -socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends.
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -2 D. Hard Co pper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M , water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, C lass 150, with solder -joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball -and -socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends. E. A QUA PEX Tube: ASTM F876 and F877 and NSF Standard 14 & 61. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought - copper fittings if indicated. 2.2 VALVES A. Bronze and cast -iron, general -duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APP LICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherw ise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded -tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. D. Under -Building -Slab, Wat er -Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping." E. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 4 to NPS 6 : Steel pipe; gray -iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints. F. Under -Building -Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type M ; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -3 G. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L ; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 6 : Steel pipe; gray -iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast -iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast -iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for pipi ng NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Hot -Water -Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of e ach water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop -and -waste drain valves where indicated. D. Install balancing valve in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valve s for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. Balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Install under -building -slab copper tubing according to CDA 's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mech anical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." D. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressu re gages are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -4 E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downw ard toward drain and plumb. F. Rough -in domestic water piping for water -meter installation according to utility company's requirements. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirem ents are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water -flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Extruded -Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. 3.6 ROUGHING -IN FOR WATER METERS A. Rough -in domestic water piping for wa ter meter installation according to utility company's requirements. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT I NSTALLATION A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plum bing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet : MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet : MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertica l Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch . E. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum hor izontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 -1/2 : 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2 : 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod.
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -5 4. NPS 2 -1/2 : 11 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3 -1/2 : 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 : 12 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet . G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 -1/4 : 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2 -1/2 : 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 : 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet . I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. B. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water -serv ice piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect domestic water piping to water -service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold -water supply and hot -water outlet piping in si zes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold - and hot -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold - and hot -water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping int o operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
AESI 27210 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -6 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports a nd have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic w ater piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure ra ting of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satis factory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping using purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 22111 6
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221119 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure -reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water hammer arresters. 8. Pro Set trap Guards . B. See Division 2 2 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. C. See Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers. D. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water piping . 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig , unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product in dicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe -Applied, Atmospheric -Type Vacuum Breakers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work in clude, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -2 a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Produ cts Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 , as required to match connected piping. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough bronze. B. Hose -Connection Vacuum Breakers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance w ith requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Woodford Manufacturing Company. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Produc ts Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric -Vent Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Ma nufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Stand ard: ASSE 1012. 4. Operation: Continuous -pressure applications. 5. Size: NPS 3/4 . 6. Body: Bronze. 7. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 8. Finish: Chrome plated. 9. B. Reduced -Pressure -Princ iple Backflow Preventers:
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -3 1. Avai lable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Prod ucts Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 4. Standard: ASSE 1013. 5. Operation: Continuous -pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 9. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. b. Air -Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow -preventer connection. C. Double -Check Backflow -Prevention Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeri ng products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 4. Standard: ASSE 1015. 5. Operatio n: Continuous -pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 8. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 9. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 10. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and small er; outside screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. D. Backflow -Preventer Test Kits: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -4 a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group ; Wilkins Div. 4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test -procedure instructions. 2.3 WATER PRESSURE -REDUCING VALVES A. Water Regulators: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpor ated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Honeywell Water Controls. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plum bing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Standard: ASSE 1003. 4. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig . 5. Body: Bronze with chrome -plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved f or NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3 . 6. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3 . 2.4 BALANCING VALVES A. Memory -Stop Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Hammond V alve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red -White Valve Corp. 3. Standard: MSS SP -110 for two -piece, copper -alloy ball valves. 4. Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP. 5. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 6. Body: Copper alloy. 7. Port: Standard or full port. 8. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. 9. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 10. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -5 11. Handle: Vinyl -covered steel with memory -setting device. 2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMEST IC WATER PIPING A. Y -Pattern Strainers: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA -approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch . b. Strainers NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 : 0.045 inch . c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch . 6. Drain: Factory -installed, hose -end drain valve. 2.6 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball -Valve -Type, Hose -End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP -110 for standard -p ort, two -piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 . 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl -covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nip ple with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTE RS A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of S mith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -6 3. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI -WH 201. 4. Type: Metal bellows. 5. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI -WH 201, Siz es A through F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Loc ate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric -vent drain connection with air -gap fitting, fixed air -gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe dia meters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air -gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. C. Install water regulators wi th inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. E. Install temperature -actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet -type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. F. Install Y -pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure -red ucing valve, solenoid valve, and pump. G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201. H. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Dra wings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Intermedi ate atmospheric -vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced -pressure -principle backflow preventers. 3. Double -check backflow -prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure -reducing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply -type, trap -seal primer valves.
AESI 27210 DOMES TIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -7 K. Disting uish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Ide ntification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1. Test each reduced -pressure -principle backflow preventer and double -check backflow -prevention assembly according to authorities havin g jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable pressure set points of water pressure -reducing valves. B. Set field -adjustabl e flow of balancing valves. C. Set field -adjustable temperature set points of temperature -actuated water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 22111 9
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221316 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATION SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following s oil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless othe rwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30 -foot head of water . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control inspection and test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; and "NSF -drain" for plastic d rain piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Hub -and -Spigot, Cast -Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 1. G askets: ASTM C 564, rubber. B. Hubless Cast -Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast -iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings. 2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion -resistant fasteners, and rubber sle eve with integral, center pipe stop.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -2 a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless -steel corrugated shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. b. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Coupl ings: With stainless -steel shield, stainless -steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Special pipe fittings with p ressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and hubless -coupling joints. D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Service class, hub -and -spigot, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gas kets; and compression joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. C. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each serv ice pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." D. Install wall p enetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." E. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Stra ight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -3 G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according t o manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unle ss otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. I. Sleeves are not required for cast -iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs -on -grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Div ision 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Cast -Iron, Soil -Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with r ubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General -duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Backwater Valves: Instal l backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Backwater valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT I NSTALLATION A. Seismic -restraint devices are specified in D ivision 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Typ e 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -4 a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet : MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet , if Ind icated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Divisi on 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3 : 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 : 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. Spacing for 10 -foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet . Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches . G. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet . H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimi lar piping materials. B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes in dicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 221316 -5 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having juris diction. 1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as wor k progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTIO N 221316
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221319 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the foll owing sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each t ype of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATE R VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requ irements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Su bject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts D rainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME A112.14.1. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Body: Cast iron.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -2 7. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 8. End Connections: Hub and spig ot or hubless. 9. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang closed. 10. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full -size, cast -iron, soil -pipe extension to field -installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater v alve cover. B. Drain -Outlet Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufac turers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drai n. 5. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast -Iron Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provi de products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 6. Body Material: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 7. Closure: Countersunk, cast -iron plug. 8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Cast -Iron Floor Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -3 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawi ngs or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Produc ts Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 5. Size: Same as connected branch. 6. Type: Adjustable housing. 7. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 8. Clamp ing Device: Required. 9. Outlet Connection: Spigot. 10. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 11. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel -bronze, copper alloy. 13. Frame and Cover Shape: Round . 14. Top Loading Classification: Heavy] Duty. 15. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to comp liance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFA B, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 6. Body: Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 7. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug. 8. Closure Plug Si ze: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 9. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome -plated bronze cover plate with screw. 10. Wall Access: Round, nickel -bronze, wall -installation frame and cover. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast -Iron Flo or Drains: 1. Available Manufactu rers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -4 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the f ollowing: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smit h, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMB LIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0 -lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch - thick, lead flashing co llar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized -steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open -Top Vent C ap: Without cap. 2. Low -Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal -proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field -installed, vandal -proof vent cap. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, wi th the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4.0 -lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0 -lb/sq. ft., 0.0469 -inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6 -lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. I nstall backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. C. Install cleanouts in aboveground p iping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 . Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greate r than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the followi ng drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4 -inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches : Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not gr eater than 1 -inch total depression. 3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected t o sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent s tacks that extend through roof. I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor. J. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -6 K. Install floor -drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor dr ains that require trap -seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. L. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping discharg e into sanitary drainage system. M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. O. Install t raps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to al low service and maintenance. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATIO N A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing accord ing to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0 -lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0 -lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and speci alties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches , and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, w ith skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flash ing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashin g and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast -iron sleeve having calking recess.
AESI 27210 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTI ES 221319 -7 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIF YING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment n ameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Na meplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or constr uction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 22131 9
AESI 27210 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 2213 2 9 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible sewage pumps. 2. Sewage -pump basins and basin cove rs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, a nd marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor -operated water pumps. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE P UMPS A. Submersible, Quick -Disconn ect, Double -Seal Sewage Pumps: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. ABS Pumps Inc. b. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. d. BJM Pumps, LLC. e. Chicago Pump Company; a division of Yeomans Chicago Corporation. f. EBARA Fluid Handling. g. E.I.M. Electric Co., Ltd. h. Federal Pump Corp. i. Gorman -Rupp Company (The). j. Goulds Pumps; ITT Corporation.
AESI 27210 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 -2 k. HOMA Pump Technology Inc. l. ITT Flygt Corporation. m. KSB Inc. n. PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, U.S.A. o. Pentair Pump Group; Fairbanks Morse. p. Pentair Pump Group; Hydromatic Pumps. q. Pentair Pump Group; Myers. r. PX Pumps USA. s. Stancor, Inc. t. Sta -Rite Industries, Inc. u. Swaby Manufacturing Company. v. Tsurumi America, Inc. w. Weil Pump Company, Inc. x. Weinman Division; Crane Pumps & Systems. y. WILO -EMU USA LLC. z. Zoeller Company. aa. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested sewage -pump unit with guide -rail supports. 4. Pump type: Submersible, end -suction, single -stage, close -coupled, overhung -impeller, centrifugal sewage pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3. 5. Pump Casing: C ast iron, with open inlet, and discharge fittings for connection to guide -rail support. 6. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A cast iron, nonclog, open, or semiopen design for solids handling, and keyed and secured to shaft. 7. Pump and Motor Sh aft: Stainless steel or steel, with factory -sealed, grease -lubricated ball bearings. 8. Seals: Mechanical. 9. Moisture -Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moist ure alarm. 10. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor -start type; with built -in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three -conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable -sealing assembly for connection at pump. a. Motor Housing Fluid: Oil. 11. Controls: a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Switch Type: Pedestal -mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons. c. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load. d. Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 60 inches . e. High -Water Alarm: Cover -mounted, compression -probe alarm, with electric bell; 120 -V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell. 12. Controls: a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1; wall -mounted. b. Switch Type: Mechanical -float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures with mounting rod and e lectric cables. c. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load. d. High -Water Alarm: Rod -mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mechanical -float, switch matching control and electric bell; 120 -V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
AESI 27210 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 -3 13. Control -Interface Features: a. Remote Ala rm Contacts: For remote alarm interface. b. Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in pump controls for interface to building automation system and capable of providing the following: 1) On -off status of pump. 2) Alarm status. 14. Guide -Rail Support s: a. Standard: SWPA's "Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook." b. Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized steel or other corrosion -resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover. c. Baseplate: Corro sion -resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide rails and stationary elbow. d. Pump Yoke: Motor -mounted or casing -mounted yokes or other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges. e. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge -elbow fi tting with flange, seal, and positioning device. f. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge -elbow fitting with flange that mates to movable -elbow flange and support attached to baseplate. g. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole. B. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Number of Pumps: Two. 2. Each Pump: a. Capacity: 65 gpm. b. Solids Ha ndling Capability: 2 inches minimum. c. Discharge Pipe Size: 2 NPS . d. Motor Horsepower: ½. e. Electrical Characteristics: 1) Volts: 208. 2) Phases: Three. 3) Hertz: 60. 2.2 SEWAGE -PUMP BASINS AND BASI N COVERS A. Basins: Factory -fabricated, watertight, cylindrical, basi n sump with top flange and sidewall openings for pipe connections. 1. Material: Fiberglass. 2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, guide -rail supports if used, and accessories. 3. Anchor Flange: Same ma terial as or compatible with basin sump, cast in or attached to sump, in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab. B. Basin Covers: Fabricate met al cover with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables. 1. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot -traffic areas.
AESI 27210 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329 -4 C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Diameter: 30”. 2. Depth: 3 6”. 3. Inlet No. 1: a. Drainage Pipe Size: 4 NPS . b. Type: Hubbed outside. 4. Sidewall Outlet: a. Discharge Pipe Size: 4 NPS . b. Type: Hubbed outside. 5. Manhole Required in Cover: No. 6. Vent Size: 2 NPS . 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equi pment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devic es and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pump Installation Standard: Compl y with HI 1.4 for installation of centrifugal pumps. END OF SECTION 22132 9
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221 413 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. NOT USED. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Syst em Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF -sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Arti cle for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUB -AND -SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND F ITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -2 B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND F ITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 3 01. B. CISPI, Hubless -Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO -Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco -Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. C. Heavy -Duty, Hubless -Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO -Husky. b. Clamp -All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless -steel shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.4 C OPPER TUBE AND FITTI NGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast -copper fittings or ASME B 16.29, wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings. C. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder -joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full -face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -3 D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813 , water -flushable flux. 2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTING S A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: AS TM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Cellular -Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 1. Use ABS solvent cement that has a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTING S A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular -Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665 , made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTI NGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end co nnections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified -piping -system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -4 b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve -type, reduc ing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926 , PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Cou plings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may b e incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full -length, corrosi on -resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING IN STALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping syste ms. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -5 H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low p oint of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and oth er installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal Storm -Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. K. Install cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." M. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. N. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. O. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. P. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves sp ecified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug ins ide the building in storm drainage force -main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains s pecified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." S. Install sleeve seals for pipi ng penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply wit h requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub -and -spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compr ession joints.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -6 B. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless -piping coupling joints. C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water -flushable, lead -free flux and ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bo lt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. E. Plastic, Nonpressure -Piping, Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, a nd solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTI NG INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at join ts of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. 2. I nstall backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT I NSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic -restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet : MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS T ype 49, spring cushion rolls. 5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -7 6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inc hes of each fitting, valve, and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3 : 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 : 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 0 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10 -foot pipe lengths may be incre ased to 10 feet . Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches . G. Install supports for vertical cast -iron soil piping every 15 feet H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet . I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Dra wings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Comply with requirements for clea nouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -8 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of pi ping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jur isdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to proce dures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit s eparate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed bef ore it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water . From 15 minutes befor e inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on abo veground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets ; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless -piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless -piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 22141 3
AESI 27210 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 -9
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221 4 2 3 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON STORM DRAINAGE PIPIN G SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof drains. 2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Flashing materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS A. Cast -Iron, Small -Sump, Ge neral -Purpose Roof Drains: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general -purpose roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cast iron. 3. Dimension of Body: Nominal 8 -inch diameter. 4. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 5. Outlet: Bottom. 6. Extension Collars: Not req uired. 7. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 8. Expansion Joint: Not required. 9. Sump Receiver Plate: Not required. 10. Dome Material: Cast iron. 11. Wire Mesh: Not required. 12. Vandal -Proof Dome: Not required. B. Metal, Parapet Roof Drains: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for parapet roof drains. 2. Body Material: Cas t iron. 3. Outlet: Angle. 4. Grate Material: Nickel -bronze alloy. 5. Vandal -Proof Grate: Not required.
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -2 C. Metal, Small -Sump, Deck Roof Drains: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for deck roof drains; ASME A112.6.3, for floor drains. 2. Body Material: Metal. 3. Flange: Not required. 4. Clamping Device: Not required. 5. Integral Backwater Valve: Not required. 6. Outlet: Bottom. 7. Grate Material: Nickel bronze. 8. Grate Finish: Not required. 9. Overall Dimension of Frame and Grate: No minal 8 inches round. 10. Top -Loading Classification: Light Duty. 11. Vandal -Proof Frame and Grate: Not required. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPEC IALTIES A. Downspout Adaptors: 1. Description: Manufactured, gray -iron casting, for attaching to horizontal -outlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout. 2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet. B. Downspout Boots: 1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray -iron casting, with strap or ears for attaching to building; NPS 4 outlet; and shop -applied bituminous coating. 2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 outlet. C. Conductor Nozzles: 1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. 2. Siz e: Same as connected conductor. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanouts: 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for adjustable housing cleanouts. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Adjustable housing. 4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron. 5. Clamping Device: Not required. 6. Outle t Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set -screws or other device. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel -bronze, copper alloy. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 11. Top -L oading Classification: Medium Duty. 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. B. Test Tees: 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees.
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -3 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hub -and -spigot, cast -iron soil -pipe T -branch or hubless, cast -iron soil -pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head, brass. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size sma ller than cleanout size. C. Wall Cleanouts: 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hub -and -spigot, cast -iron soil -pipe T -branch as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised -head, drilled -and -threaded cast -iron plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome -plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft. B. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04 -inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill -ph osphatized finish for painting if indicated. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips , clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof memb rane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07 Sections. 1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membr anes where penetrated. 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back -outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal downspouts. C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inches above grade. Se cure to building wall. D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -4 E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanout s the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4 . 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated , with frame and cover flush with finished wall. H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. I. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. J. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing t hrough floors with waterproof membrane. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATIO N A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0 -lb/sq. ft .lead sheets, 0.0938 -inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0 -lb/sq. ft.lead sheets, 0.0625 -inch thickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or em bedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flang e extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve an d specialty clamping ring or device. E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
AESI 27210 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 -5 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 22142 3
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 23 0500 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielect ric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. HVAC demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and e lectrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finish ed occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concea led from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants b ut subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel."
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -2 B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify proce sses and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITT INGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe -Flang e Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free , 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufa cturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water -flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with thre aded, solder -joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F .
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -3 D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150 - or 300 -psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel co upling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F . F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, th readed, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F . 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SE ALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elem ents : EPDM and NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Plastic , Carbon steel], and Stainless steel]. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bo lts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating and s tainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet : 0.0239 -inch minimum thicknes s; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to duc tile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring an d bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, wit h nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and c eiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated finish. C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -4 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated . D. Split -Casting, Cast -Bra ss Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated . 2.7 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, n ongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi , 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the foll owing requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms a nd service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible c eilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install pipi ng to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -5 N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installat ion: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that ca use sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annul ar clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sl eeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify fina l equipment locations for roughing -in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRU CTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sectio ns specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water -flush able flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "P ipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corro ded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -6 G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select ap propriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fitting s according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and P VC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use bu tt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to t he following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves an d at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATI ON - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Conn ect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -7 D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.5 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than sup ported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that ex tend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Inst all anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000 -psi 28 -day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as speci fied in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SU PPORTS AND ANCHORAGE S A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUP PORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equip ment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
AESI 27210 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -8 E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 23050 0
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230519 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Gages. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. B. Case: Die -cast aluminum, brass or Chrome -plated brass 7 inche s or 9 inches ] long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic -liquid filled, with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin -faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Window: Glass or plastic. F. Connector: Adjustable type, 1 80 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device, rigid, straight or angle type, type]. G. Stem: Copper -plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. H. Accuracy: Plus or minu s 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range.
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -2 2.2 DUCT -TYPE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Miljoco Corp. 2. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc. 3. Treric e, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Case: Die -cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 7 inches long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin -faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Window: Glass or plastic. F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device, rigid or angle type. G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installati on. H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem. I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.3 BIMETALLIC -ACTUATED DIAL THERMO METERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with re quirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Ernst Gage Co. 3. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 4. Tel -Tru Manufacturing Company. 5. T rerice, H. O. Co. 6. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Description: Direct -mounting, bimetallic -actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3. C. Case: Dry or Liquid -filled type, stainless steel with 3 -inch to 5 -inch diameter. D. Element: Bimetal coil. E. Dial: Satin -faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. F. Pointer: Red or other dark -color metal. G. Window: Glass or plastic. H. Ring: Stainless steel.
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -3 I. Connector: Adjustable angle, rigid, back or bottom type. J. Stem: Metal, for thermowell insta llation and of length to suit installation. K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.4 THERMOWELLS A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used. B. Description: Pressure -tight, socket -type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer. 2.5 PRESSURE GAGES A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. 2. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Direct -Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: Indicating -dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case: Dry or Liquid -filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, metal or plastic, 4 -1/2 -inch to 6 -inch diameter. 2. Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 , bottom -outlet type unless back -outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressu re element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin -faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red or other dark -color, metal. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Ring: Brass, Stainless steel or plastic. 9. Accuracy: Grade A, (plu s or minus 1 percent of middle half) or B (plus or minus 2 percent of middle half) scale. 10. Vacuum -Pressure Range: 30 -in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure . 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. C. Pressure -Gage Fittings: 1. Valves: N PS 1/4 brass or stainless -steel needle type. 2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends. 3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion -resistant, porous -metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. PART 3 - EXE CUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICAT IONS A. Install liquid -in -glass thermometers in the following locations:
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -4 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 3. Outside -air, return -air, and mixed -air ducts. B. Install b imetallic -actuated dial thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 3. Outside -air, return -air, and mixed -air ducts. C. Install dry or liquid -filled -case -type, b imetallic -actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each pump. D. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 1. Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 d eg F, with 2 -degree scale divisions 2. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2 -degree scale divisions 3. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2 -degree scale divisions 3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry -case -type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure -re ducing valve. B. Install dry or liquid -filled -case -type pressure gages at chilled - and condenser -water inlets and outlets of chillers. C. Install dry or liquid -filled -case -type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump. 3.3 INSTALLATIONS A. Install direct -mo unting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. C. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct w here duct thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws. D. Install direct -mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position. E. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam). F. Install needle -valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam. G. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow -measuring elements and flowmeters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions. H. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
AESI 27210 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 -5 B. C onnect flowmeter -system elements to meters. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation. B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 23051 9
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230523 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENE RAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves: 1. Copper -alloy ball valves. 2. Ferrous -alloy butterfly valves. 3. Bronze check valves. 4. Gray -iron swing check valves. 5. Spring -loaded, lift -disc check valves. 6. Bron ze gate valves. 7. Cast -iron gate valves. 8. Bronze globe valves. B. See Division 21 fire -suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire -protection valves. C. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control valves and actuators. D. See Divi sion 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagra ph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -2 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A. Refe r to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. B. Bronze Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ferrous Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, un less otherwise indicated. F. Valve Actuators: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types. 2. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast -i ron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. I. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 d eg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45. 2.3 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. One -Piece, Full Port Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. DynaQuip Controls. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Jamesbury, Inc. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. i. NIBCO INC. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Safety -Exhaust, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. b. DynaQuip Controls. c. Grin nell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -3 e. Jamesbury, Inc. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. B. Full Port Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -110. C. One -Piece, Cop per -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome -plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400 -psig minimum CWP rating. D. Safety -Exhaust, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Two -piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening, chrome -plated ball with vent, blowo ut -proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating of 400 -psig CWP. 2.4 FERROUS -ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALV ES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flangeless, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. Mueller Steam Specialty. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products D iv. 2. Single -Flange, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. Mueller Steam Specialty. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Va lve Corp. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP -67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flangeless, 150 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one - or two -piece stem. 2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -4 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Kitz Corporation of America. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. 3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane C o.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red -White Valve Corp. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP -80. C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. E. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. 2.6 GRAY -IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. 3. Mueller Co. 4. Watts Indus tries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Gray -Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP -71. C. Type II, Class 125, gray -iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats. D. Type II, Class 250, gray -iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats. 2.7 SPRING -LOADED, LIFT -DISC CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type I, Wafer Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Mueller Steam Specialty.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -5 2. Type II, Compact -Wafer, Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc. b. Grinnell Corporation. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Mueller Steam Specialty. f. NIBCO INC. 3. Type III, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Hammo nd Valve. c. Metraflex Co. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 4. Type IV, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: a. Check -All Valve Mfg. Co. b. Grinnell Corporation. c. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Mueller Steam Specialty. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Industrie s, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Lift -Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74 -1, with spring -loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat. C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift -D isc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges. D. Type II, Class 125, Compact -Wafer, Lift -Disc Check Valves: Compact -wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. E. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast -iron shell and flanged ends. F. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and threaded ends. 2.8 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type 2, Bronze, Rising -Stem, Solid -Wedge Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -6 i. Red -White Valve Corp. j. Walworth Co. 2. Type 3, Bronze, Rising -Stem, Split -Wedge Gate Valves: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Gri nnell Corporation. d. NIBCO INC. B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel. C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and union -ring bonnet. D. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge[ and union -ring bonnet]. E. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge a nd union -ring bonnet. 2.9 CAST -IRON GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Type I, Cast -Iron, Nonrising -Stem Gate Valves: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane C o.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red -White Valve Corp. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Type I, Cast -Iron, Rising -Stem Gate Valves: a. Cinci nnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red -White Valve Corp. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Cast -Iron Gate Valves, Gen eral: MSS SP -70, Type I. C. Class 125, NRS, Bronze -Mounted, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: Cast -iron body with bronze trim, nonrising stem, and solid -wedge disc. D. Class 125, OS&Y, Bronze -Mounted, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: Cast -iron body with bronze trim, rising stem, and solid -wedge disc.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -7 2.10 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Manufa cturers: 1. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milw aukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red -White Valve Corp. j. Walworth Co. B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel. C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic PTFE or TFE disc and union -ring bonnet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring -loaded, lift -disc check valves. B. If valves with specified SWP c lasses or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Chilled -Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, or Two 15 0 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150 ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single -flange 150 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. 4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150 horizontal or vertical, bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves, N PS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. 6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron. 7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single or Dual -plate, wafer, wafer -lug, or double -flanged, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy. 8. Spring -Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150. 9. Spring -Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, II or III, Class 125, cast iron. 10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 150, bronze. 11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, NRS, OS&Y, bronze -mounted cast iron. 12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -8 13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze -mounted cast iron. D. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, or Two 15 0 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150 ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single -flange 150 -psig CWP rating, fer rous alloy, with EPDM liner. 4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150 horizontal or vertical, bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. 6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray ir on. 7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single or Dual -plate, wafer, wafer -lug, or double -flanged, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy. 8. Spring -Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150. 9. Spring -Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves , NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, II or III, Class 125, cast iron. 10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 150, bronze. 11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, NRS, OS&Y, bronze -mounted cast iron. 12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smal ler: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze -mounted cast iron. E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder -joint o r threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 : Flanged or threaded ends. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, N PS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 : Flanged or threaded ends. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and pr ovide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Dual -Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem uprigh t and plumb.
AESI 27210 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 -9 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping joint construction. B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water -flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 23052 3
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230529 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. See Division 05 Section "Meta l Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. C. See Division 21 Section "Water -Based Fire -Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire -protection piping. D. See Division 23 Section "Expansion Fitti ngs and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. E. See Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. F. See Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts” for duct hange rs and supports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system co ntents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Design seismic -restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from a uthorities having jurisdiction.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder -actuated fastener systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabr ication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANC E A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be inco rporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS A ND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for wher e to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen -Power Pipe Supports. 3. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corp oration. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -3 C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop - or field -fabricated pipe -support assemb ly made from structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U -bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEM S A. Description: MFMA -3, shop - or field -fabricated pipe -suppo rt assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc .; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless b are metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 THERMAL -HANGER SHIELD INSERT S A. Description: 100 -psig - minimum, compressive -strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufact uring Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water -repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Pipin g: Water -repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -4 F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cove r lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fa steners. B. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type zinc -coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, In c. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop - or field -fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel sh apes. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERI ALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exte rior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi , 28 -day compressive strength.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT A PPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping sy stems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied f inish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise in dicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 . 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): Fo r suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 , requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon - or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 , requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of in sulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 . 5. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 . 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 , with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 , from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 , if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 . 2. Carbon - or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 , if longer e nds are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Cl evises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -6 I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For up per attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C -Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar -joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attach ing to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are l arge. 6. C -Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb . b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb . c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb . 8. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicat ed and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the f ollowing types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1 -1/4 inches . 2. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Pre set to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Secti ons. M. Comply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder -actuated fasteners or mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete constr uction.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -7 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT I NSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated trapeze pipe hang ers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on f ield -assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal -Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder -actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder -actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder -actua ted tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necess ary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded -structural -steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hange rs and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger and at changes in di rection of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses fro m movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) ar e not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -8 b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger sh ield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2 : 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4 : 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 : 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 : 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 : 24 inches lon g and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate struct ural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 ME TAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size lim itations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop s trength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
AESI 27210 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 -9 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by br ush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils . B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 23052 9
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FO R HVAC PIPING 230548 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230548 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Housed spring mounts. 4. Elastomeric hangers. 5. Spring hangers. 6. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops. 7. Pipe riser resilient supports. 8. Resilient pipe guides. 9. Restraining braces and cables. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. C. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to s izes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil - and water -resistant neoprene, rubber and/or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass. D. Mounts: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory -drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range .
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FO R HVAC PIPING 230548 -2 1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neopr ene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. E. Restrained Mounts: All -directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -bearing neopr ene as defined by AASHTO. F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open -spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated l oad. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch - thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig . 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. G. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic or limit -stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory -drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch - thick, neoprene or rubber isolato r pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Suppo rt 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. H. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all -directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for boltin g to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar. I. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double -deflection type, fitted with molded, oil -resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded c onnections for hanger rods. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FO R HVAC PIPING 230548 -3 J. Spring Hangers: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resista nt rubber or neoprene. Steel -washer -reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. K. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misa lignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Sti ffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: S teel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All -directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a mi nimum of 1/2 -inch thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical -limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions. M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory -set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motio n due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports : Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC -ES, OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
AESI 27210 VIBRATION ISOLATION FO R HVAC PIPING 230548 -4 B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prev ent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic -Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loa ding limits. 3.2 VIBRATION -CONTROL DEVICE INSTA LLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. B. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch . C. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP -127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet . D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. E. Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC -ES, OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required subm ittals for component. F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, an chor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. H. Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing rei nforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas li nes. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engag ed in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior and stainless -steel anchors for exterior applications. END OF SECTION 23 0548
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230593 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC GENERAL 1.1 SUMM ARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant -volume air systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant -flow hydronic systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Counci l. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qua lifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. B. C ertify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -2 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by consulting engineer. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLIC ABLE) PART 3 - E XECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may precl ude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these bal ancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditio ns and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including sys tem effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the con ditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditio ns. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality -control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, s uch as heat pumps , and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -3 K. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. L. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. O. Report deficienci es discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. B. Complete system -readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 4. Equipm ent and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and ac cess to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES F OR TESTING AND BALAN CING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedure s contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Secti on "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper -control positions, valve position indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show f inal settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -4 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES F OR BALANCING AIR SYS TEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedure s. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. D etermine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct -airflow measurements. D. Check airflow p atterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return - and exhaust -air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters a re equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling -uni t components. K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONST ANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufactu rer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual sta tic pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that h ouses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air -handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure stat ic pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat -recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -5 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Consulting Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air -handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley siz es to achieve indicated air -handling -unit performance. 7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no over load will occur. Measure amperage in full -cooling, full -heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submai n and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adj ust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES F OR HYDRONI C SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch -circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepar e schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liq uid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water -station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow -control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -6 5. Set differential -pressure control valves at the specifie d differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive -displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump -motor load. If motor i s overloaded, throttle main flow -balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONST ANT -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEM S A. Measure water flow at pumps. U se the following procedures except for positive -displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heigh ts. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Consulting Engineer and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps." 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head -capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horse power with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify th at valves are functioning as designed. C. Measure flow at all pressure -independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculate d presettings. E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow -pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow -indicating device. F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest per centage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -7 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. H. M easure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. I. Measure the differential -pressure -control -valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTOR S A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor h orsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONDE NSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering - and leaving -air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR BOILE RS A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering - and leaving -water temperatures and water flow. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT -TRANSFER COIL S A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering - and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cool ing coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -8 B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. Dry -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant s uction pressure and temperature. 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 1 0 percent. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.13 REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construc tion to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in system s being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.14 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified wr itten report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a lis t of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and e quipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contr actor. 3. Project name.
AESI 27210 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -9 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Docum ents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet - and dry -bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable -air -volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air an d hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locat ions. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. 3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasona l Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 23059 3
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230700 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation f or boiler breeching, ductwork, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. d. Polystyrene. 2. Fire -rated insulation systems. 3. Insulating cements. 4. Adhe sives. 5. Mastics. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory -applied jackets. 8. Field -applied fabric -reinforcing mesh. 9. Field -applied jackets. 10. Tapes. 11. Securements. 12. Corner angles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following : 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Application of field -applied jackets. 7. Application at linkages of control de vices. 8. Field application for each equipment type. C. Field quality -control inspection reports.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical produ cts per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and in specting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, a nd smoke -developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work in clude, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be inc orporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when test ed according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass : Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -3 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Ja cket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory -Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge - or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for shee t materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180. H. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory -applied vinyl jacket. F actory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All -Service Duct Wrap. I. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded wi th a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Pro ducts: a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin -Glas. b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations. J. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provid e insulation with factory -applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin -Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulati on Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -4 K. High -Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory -applied jacket. 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas. c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; T hermafiber Industrial Felt. L. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulat ions Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory -applied ASJ. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. M. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wick ing System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation u nder insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor -retarder jacket with self -sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth. 1. Products: a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation. b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation. N. Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory -applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k -value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified i n Part 2 "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manv ille; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. O. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k -value) shall not exceed 0.26
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -5 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemica l Company (The); Styrofoam. b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene. 2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Ins ulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1. Products: a. Insulco, Division of M FS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik -Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular -Glass and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent -based res in adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F . 1. Products: a. Childer s Products, Division of ITW; CP -96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33. C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesiv e. D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: a. Childers Prod ucts, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S -90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25. E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Co mply with MIL -A -3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -6 1. Pr oducts: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S -90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25. F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatib le with PVC jacket. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns -Manville; Z eston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.5 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates: Comply with MIL -C -19565C, Type II. B. Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services . 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B . Fuller Company; 35 -00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC -1/WC -5. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness. 3. S ervice Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F . 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -7 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -70. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -45/30 -4 6. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F . 6. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95 -44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon -Eco Industri es, Inc.; 44 -05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire - and water -resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: Aluminum. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Chi lders Products, Division of ITW; CP -76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire - and water -resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: White.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -8 2.7 FACTO RY -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft -paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing; complying with AST M C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread in dex of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 7. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 8. Vinyl Jacket: UL -rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil -face, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High -impact -resistant, UV -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. 1. Products : a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory -fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45 - and 90 -degree, short - and long -radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanic al joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -9 5. Factory -fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H -14. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate. 2. Sheet and r oll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. 4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil -thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3 -mil -thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 6. Factory -Fabricated Fitting Covers: a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45 - and 90 -degree, short - and long -radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End ca ps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory -fabricated fitting covers are not available. E. Self -Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60 -mil -thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum -foil facing. 1. Products: a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60. F. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 20 whe n tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarde r Film. G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil -thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -spread index of 5 and a smoke -developed index of 25 when tested accord ing to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. H. PVDC -SS L Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self -sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -10 2.9 TAPES A. AS J Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Width: 3 inches . 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils . 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Width: 3 inches . 2. Thickness : 6.5 mils . 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching field -applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Width: 2 inches . 2. Thickness: 6 mils . 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder ta pe with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1. Width: 2 inches . 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils . 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor -retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 3 inches . 2. Film Thickness: 4 mils . 3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils . 4. Elongation at Bre ak: 145 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H -14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -11 B. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Han gers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized ca rbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper - or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. C. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is c apable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. 2. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2 -1/2 inches . 3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without dam aging insulation, hangers, and substrates. D. Self -Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self -locking washer is in place. C omply with the following requirements: 1. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper - or zinc -coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch -diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicat ed. 3. Adhesive -backed base with a peel -off protective cover. E. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self -locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch -thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self -locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. F. Nonmetal Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self -locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch -thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter. G. Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -inch -wide, stainless steel or Monel. H. Wire: 0.062 -inch soft -annea led, stainless steel. 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch , PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch , alumin um according to ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation in stallation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless -steel surfaces, use demineral ized water. 3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation with tightly butted joints free of voids and gaps. Vapor barriers shall be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor -barrier system. C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jack ets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corr ode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recomme nded by insulation material manufacturer. J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. K. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other project ions with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to poi nt of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound r ecommended by insulation material manufacturer.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -13 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. L. Apply adhesives, mastics, a nd sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. M. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch -wide strips, of same material as in sulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches . Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and d ry surface to receive self -sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manu facturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at le ast 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Ma nholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insul ation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -14 B. Insulation Installation at Below -Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal termin ations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously t hrough wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install i nsulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches . 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing s ealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches . 1. Firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations t hat are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches . 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLAT ION A. Blanket Insulation Insta llation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -d ischarge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, an d 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches , place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -15 c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insula tion surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation b y removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory - or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops s hall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z -shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less t han 3 inches . 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulati on section for each surface. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch - wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spa ced 6 inches o.c. B. Board Insulation I nstallation on Ducts : Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum fr om insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches , space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover expos ed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory - or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at jo ints, seams, and protrusions.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -16 a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barr ier mastic applied in a Z -shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches . 5. Install insu lation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protru de beyond insulation surface with 6 -inch - wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION IN STALLATION A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possibl e to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self -sticking insulation hangers and speed washer s on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME -labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor -pin spacing i s 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless -steel or alu minum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circ umferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches . 8. Install insulation in removable segments on eq uipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -17 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below am bient, apply vapor -barrier mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory - or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. Repair punctures, tears , and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels. 1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surfa ce with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints. C. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate join ts with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6 -inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8 -inch -diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, a t least 0.040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.6 PIPE INSULATION INST ALLATION A. Requirements in this Article gene rally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Secure single -layer insulation with bands at 12 -inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. C. Install 2 -layer i nsulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches . Secure inner layer with 0.062 -inch wire spaced at 12 -inch intervals. Secure outer layer with bands at 12 -inch intervals. D. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, u nions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. E. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of insulating cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient serv ices and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. F. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. G. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each un ion with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. H. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -18 1. Secure each layer of preformed insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Orient lon gitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jacke ts on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by ins ulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic. 5. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufact urer and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. I. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twic e the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of same insulation material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket materi al with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant. 5. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage o f air to surface being insulated. J. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 2. Insulate tee fittings with p reformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. K. In sulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, dens ity, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seam s, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient servic es, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 5. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -19 L. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sen sors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. M. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness a s that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adja cent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flang es except divide the two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insu lation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. N. Special Installation Requirements for Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Insulation: 1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: a. Insta ll pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. b. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. c. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumferenc e of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. d. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: a. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. b. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that a llow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTA LLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulat ion with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3 -inch -wide joint strips at end joints.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -20 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor -retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor -retarder ma stic. B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separat e wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory -presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Insta ll presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a perma nent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33 -1/2 inches or less. The 33 -1/2 -inch -circumference limit allows for 2 -inch -overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows fo r longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. 3.8 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Apply two finish coats of interior, flat, latex -emulsion size over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fab ric mildew proof. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow vis ual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum jackets. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -21 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of the ir installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. 2. Inspect field -insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. 3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe ser vice defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work. C. Install new insulation and jackets to rep lace insulation and jackets removed for inspection. Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed. 3.10 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed s upply and plenums. 2. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 2. Factory -insul ated flexible ducts. 3. Factory -insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration -control devices. 6. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 3.11 INDOOR DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Conce aled, Supply -Air Duct Insulation: Mineral -fiber blanket, 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75 -lb/cu. ft. nominal density. B. Conce aled, Return -Air Duct Insulation: Mineral -fiber blanket, 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75 -lb/cu. ft. n ominal density. C. Concea led, Outdoor -Air Duct Insulation Wrapped : Foil backed Mineral -fiber blanket, 1 -1/2 inches thick and 0.75 -lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -22 B. Insulate indoor equipment in p aragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heating -Hot -Water Pump Insulation: Mineral -fiber board, 2 inches thick. D. Heating -Hot -Water Expansion/Compression Tank Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 1 inch thick. E. Heating -Hot -Water Air -Separator Ins ulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 2 inches thick. F. Domestic Hot -Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 4 inches thick. G. Domestic Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral -fiber pipe and tank, 4 inches thick. 3.13 PIPING INSULATION SC HEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire -suppression piping. 2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 3. Below -gra de piping. 4. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULA TION SC HEDULE A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick. B. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick. C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Wat er, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Flexible elastomeric, 1/2 inch thick. D. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Mineral -fiber pipe insulation, Type I, 1 -1/2 inches thick. E. Heating -Hot -Wate r Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: Mineral -fiber, preformed pipe, Type I, 1 inch thick. 3.15 INDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHED ULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field -applied jacket ove r the factory -applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts , Concealed: 1. None.
AESI 27210 HVAC INSULATION 2307 00 -23 2. PVC, 20 mils thick. 3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick. D. Ducts , Expose d: 1. None. 2. PVC, 20 mils thick. 3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick. E. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches : 1. None. 2. PVC, 20 mils thick . 3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick. F. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches : 1. None. 2. Painted aluminum, smooth with 1 -1/4 -inch -deep corrugations thick. G. Piping , Concealed: 1. None. 2. PVC, 20 mils thick. 3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick. H. Piping, Exposed: 1. None. 2. PVC, 20 mils thick. 3. Aluminum, smooth, 0.016 inch thick. END OF SECTION 23070 0
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230900 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes contr ol equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory -wired controls. B. See Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to t his Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. Valve schedule. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities havi ng jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufac turers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -2 2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Alerton Inc. 2. Andover Controls Corporation. 3. Automated Logic Corporation. 4. Heat -Timer Corporation. 5. Honeywell Internation al Inc.; Home & Building Control. 6. Invensys Building Systems. 7. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 8. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company. 9. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 10. Staefa Control System Inc.; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 11. tekmar Cont rol Systems, Inc. B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token -passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point -and -click g raphics. 2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand -alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and d isplay; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed contro llers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real -time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F . 2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6 - or 10 -stage type, with heavy -duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor -Reset Controllers: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod -and -tube type, proportioning action wi th adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg , and single - or double -pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone -bridge -amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote -resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -3 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Fan -Speed Controllers: Solid -state model providing field -adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on -off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall brie fly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. 2.5 TIME CLOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. ATC -Diversified Electronics. 2. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. 3. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc. 4. SSA C Inc.; ABB USA. 5. Time Mark Corporation. B. Seven -day, programming -switch timer with synchronous -timing motor and seven -day dial; continuously charged, nickel -cadmium -battery -driven, eight -hour, power -failure carryover; multiple -switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts. 2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. c. Heat -Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems , Inc. f. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smalle r than 9 sq. ft. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft . 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless -steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2 -1/2 inches . 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed. b. Set -Point Indication: Exposed. c. Thermometer: Exposed Red -reading glass. d. Color: White. e. Orientation: Vertical.
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -4 8. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless -steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Cor p. e. TCS/Basys Controls. f. Vaisala. 2. Static -Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Sta tic -Pressure Range: 0 - to 0.25 -inch wg . d. Duct Static -Pressure Range: 0 - to 5 -inch wg . 3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Water Different ial -Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure and tested to 300 -psig ; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 5. Differential -Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set -Point Adjustment: Exposed. 2. Set -Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Exposed. 4. Color: White. 5. Orientation: Vertical. E. Room sensor accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls. 2. Guards: Locking; heavy -duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required f or calibration and cover screws. 2.7 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential -pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable range of 0 - to 5 -inch wg . B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential -pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and wit h adjustable pressure -differential range of 8 to 60 psig , piped across pump.
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -5 C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current -sensing fixed - or split -core transformers with self -powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 perc ent of rated motor current. D. Voltage Transmitter (100 - to 600 -V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single -loop, self -powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full -scale accuracy. E. Power Monitor: 3 -phase type with disconnect/shorting s witch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4 - to 20 -mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. F. Current Switches: Self -powered, solid -state wit h adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2 - to 10 -V dc, feedback signal. H. Water -Flow Switches: Bellows -actuated mercury o r snap -acting type with pilot -duty rating, stainless -steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. I. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual -level detectors using solid -state plug -in sensors with a 3 -year minimum lif e; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104 deg F ; with 2 factory -calibrated alarm levels at 35 and 200 ppm. 2.8 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat -Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. B. Electric, solid -state, ro om thermostat . 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short -cycle protection. 6. Programming based on weekday, Saturday, and Sunday. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12 - or 24 -hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on -auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following:
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -6 a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." C. Low -Voltage, On -Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24 -V, bimetal -operated, mercury -switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set -point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set -point range, and 2 deg F. maximum differential. D. Remote -Bulb Th ermostats: On -off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with fl anges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single - or multiple -unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. 5. On -Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without dis turbing calibration of instrument. E. Immersion Thermostat: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod -and -tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. F. Airstream Thermostats: Two -pipe, fully proportional, single -temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug -in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element. G. Heatin g/Cooling Valve -Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded -rubber diaphragm, remote -bulb liquid -filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig , and cast housing with position indicator and adj usting knob. 2.9 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requi rements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split -Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring -return motors with integral spiral -spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment o f limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Spring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2 : Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf . 4. Spring -Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf .
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -7 B. Electronic Actuators: Direct -coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full -stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Opposed -Bla de Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch -lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Dampers with 2 - to 3 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm : Increase running torque by 1.5. 4. Coupling: V -bolt and V -shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation -sensing circuitry. 6. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring -return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring -return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two -Position Spring Retur n): 24 -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 -V ac or 8 W at 24 -V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2 - to 10 -V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2 - to 10 -V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: [Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F . 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F . 12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.10 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Neles -Jamesbury. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug -type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless -steel or brass seats. a. Single -Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double -Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -8 4. Sizing: 5 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two -Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three -Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way valves shal l have linear characteristics. 6. Close -Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close -off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two -way valves and 100 percent of pressure differentia l across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. D. Butterfly Valves: 200 -psig , maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast -iron or ASTM A 536 ductile -iron body a nd bonnet, extended neck, stainless -steel stem, field -replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer. 2. Disc Type: Nickel -plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing: 1 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psi g and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three -way valves shall have linear char acteristics. F. Self -Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Thermostatic O perator: Wax -filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial. 2.11 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Bala nce Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Dampers: AMCA -rated, opposed -blade design; 0.108 -inch -minimum thick, galvanized -steel or 0.125 -inch -minimum thick, extruded -aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064 -inch - thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches .
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -9 1. Secure blades to 1/2 -inch - diameter, zinc -plated axles using zinc -plated hardware, w ith nylon blade bearings, blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring -stainless -steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 25 to plus 200 deg F . 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed -cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low -Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring -loaded stainless -steel side seals, rated for l eakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 -inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf ; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 2.12 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber -optic cables for control wiring are specifie d in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify location o f thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices to be ADA compliant. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. B. Install guards on thermostats in the f ollowing locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in l ocations exposed to outdoor temperatures. E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories accordi ng to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." G. Install duct volume -control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts. H. Install electronic and fiber -optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 3.2 ELECTRI CAL WIRING AND CONNE CTION INSTALLATION A. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
AESI 27210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 2309 00 -10 B. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizonta l Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables w here several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification and service of contro l system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. C. Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual -control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. D. Connect hand -off -auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Manufacture r's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, provide factory start -up and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in wr iting. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set point s are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to D ivision 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 23090 0
AESI 27210 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 230993 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes contro l sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements. 1.2 SNOWMELTING CONTROL SEQUENCE A. The snowmelting system shall be controlled by a Tekmar controller and an associated combination socket/sensor. B. When the outdoor temperature is below 40 deg F, the boiler, B -1, shall be enabled and pumps, P -1 & P -2 shall cycle to maintain a slab temperature of 28 deg F. C. When the outdoor temperature is below 32 deg F and moistur e is detected on the slab, pump , P -2 , shall start and run continu ously and P -1 shall cycle to maintain a slab temperature of 38 deg. F until the slab is dry. 1.3 FAN COIL CONTROL SEQ UENCE A. The fan coil, FC -1, and the condensing unit, CU -1, shall be controlled by a wall mounted thermostat in the laundry . The heating coil, HC -1, shall be controlled by a separate wall mounted heating only thermostat in the housekeeping office . B. During occupied hours, the fan on FC -1 shall run continuously. On a call for unoccupied heating from either thermostat, the fan on FC -1 shall start and run. C. On a call for heating from the laundry room thermostat , the 2 -way control valve shall open until the setpoint is reached. D. On a call for cooling from the laundry room thermostat , CU -1 shall start and run until the setpoint is reached. E. On a call for hea ting from the office thermostat, the 2 -way control valve on HC -1 shall open until the setpoint is reached. 1.4 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY S EQUENCE A. The dryer booster fan, EF -3, and the dryer make up air fan, SF -1, shall have variable speed drives and be controlled by a dryer exhaust controller. B. Whenever any dryer turns on, both EF -3 and SF -1 shall start and run. C. EF -3 shall modulate its speed to maintain a constant negative pressure in the dryer exhaust duct. D. SF -1 shall modulate its speed to maintain a constant pressure in the laundry room.
AESI 27210 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 -2 1.5 RESIDENTIAL LAUNDRY SEQUENCE A. The residential dryer booster fans and the residential dryer supply fan, SF -3, shall be interlocked with the dryers. B. Whenever any dryer turns on, the associated dryer booster fan and SF -3 shall start. C. When SF -3 starts, t he 2 -way control valve on heating coil, HC -2, shall modulate to maintain 65 deg F discharge air temperature. 1.6 ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT R OOM SEQUENCE A. The packaged terminal units, PTAC -1, shall be controlled by a wall mounted thermostat. The exhaust fans shall be controlled by a wall mounted timer switch. B. On a call for heating or cooling from the wall mounted thermostat, PTAC -1 shall start and run to meet the setpoint. 1.7 BOILER COMBUSTION AI R SUPPLY A. The supply fan, SF -2, shall be interlocked with the e xisting boilers. B. Whene ver either boiler turns on, SF -2 shall start. PART 2 - P RODUCTS (NOT APPLICA BLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLI CABLE) END OF SECTION 23099 3
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 231123 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fuel gas piping with in the building. Products include the following: 1. Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials. 2. Protective pipe and fitting coating. 3. Piping specialties. 4. Specialty valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other work. 1. Include wiring diagrams. C. Field quality -control test repor ts. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. N FPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 article s where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limi ted to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -2 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and jo ining materials. B. Corrugated, Stainless -Steel Tubing Systems: Comply with AGA LC 1 and include the following: 1. Tubing: Corrugated stainless steel with plastic jacket or coating. 2. Fittings: Copper alloy with ends made to fit corrugated tubing. Include ends with threads according to ASME B1.20.1 if connection to threaded pipe or fittings is required. 3. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; Type E or S; Grade B; black. Wall thickness of wrought -stee l pipe shall comply with ASME B36.10M. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 4. Cast -Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 5. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 2.3 PROTE CTIVE COATING A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory -applied, corrosion -resistant polyethylene coating for use in contact with materials that may corrode the pipe. 2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. B. Quick -Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector. 2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Valve End Connections: Threaded, according to ASME B1.20.1. B. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed. C. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome -plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless -steel disc and fluoro carbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2 -psig minimum pressure rating. D. Gas Valves: ASME B16.33 and CSA International -listed bronze body and 125 -psig pressure rating.
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -3 E. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical operator for actuation by applian ce automatic shutoff device. 1. Manufacturers: a. ASCO General Controls. b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd. c. ASCO Powe r Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. d. Dungs, Karl, Inc. e. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. f. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. g. GPS Gas Protection Systems Inc. h. Honeywell International Inc. i. Johnson Controls. F. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast -iron body solenoid valve; 120 -V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous -duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be closed. 1. Manufacturers: a. ASCO General Controls. b. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. c. Dungs, Karl, Inc. d. Eclipse Combustion, I nc. e. Goyen Valve Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems. f. Magnatrol Valve Corp. g. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div. h. Watts Industries, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Close equi pment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Use flang es, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fuel Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less: 1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 : Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fit tings, and threaded joints. 3. NPS 1 -1/4 to NPS 2 : Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. C. Fuel Gas Piping 2 to 5 psig : 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -4 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Appli ance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop. B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig : Gas stop or gas valve. C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. D. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Sm aller: Gas valve. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements and piping joint construction are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Install pressure gage downstream from each service pressure regulator. Pres sure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages." C. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit t o outside and terminate with screened vent cap. 1. Above -Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings. 2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. 3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in Part 2 "Prot ective Coating" Article may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where con densate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum -length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. E. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings unless specifically shown to be exposed to view. F. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent sl ope upward toward risers. G. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. H. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. I. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valv e, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
AESI 27210 NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123 -5 J. Install corrugated, stainless -steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Include striker plates to prote ct tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move. K. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve. L. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages." M. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2 -1/2 and larger connections. N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to at mosphere. Terminate vents with turned -down, reducing -elbow fittings with corrosion -resistant insect screens in large end. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT I NSTALLATION A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 2. NPS 1 -1/4 : Maximum span, 108 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 : M aximum span, 108 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . C. Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless -steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 : Maximum span, 48 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 : Maximum span, 72 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect pipin g to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L 1. Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. END OF SECTION 23112 3
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 232113 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Hot -water heating piping. 2. Radiant floor and snow melt piping. 3. Condensate -drain piping. B. See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pump s, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pressure -seal fittings 2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated -orifice balancing valves and auto matic flow -control valves. 3. Air control devices. 4. Chemical treatment. 5. Hydronic specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loo ps, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with AS ME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vess el Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITT INGS A. Drawn -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L .
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -2 B. Ann ealed -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K . 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTI NGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, g rade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18 .2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water -flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg -1, silver a lloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materia ls with threaded, solder -joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering produc ts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Indus tries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division. 3. Factory -fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F .
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -3 D. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 3. Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F . 2.5 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirem ents specified in Division 23 Section "Valves." B. Automatic Temperature -Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." C. Bronze, Calibrated -Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject t o compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Geran d Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America 4. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 6. Plug: Resin. 7. Seat: PTFE. 8. End Connections: T hreaded or socket. 9. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 10. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 11. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig . 12. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . D. Cast -Iron or Ste el, Calibrated -Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, pr ovide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -4 a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a divi sion of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. 4. Body: Cast -iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 5. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 6. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 7. Disc: Gla ss and carbon -filled PTFE. 8. Seat: PTFE. 9. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 10. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 11. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 12. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig . 13. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . E. Diaphragm -Operated, Pressure -Reducing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacture rs: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Amtrol, In c. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Body: Bronze or brass. 5. Disc: Glass and carbo n -filled PTFE. 6. Seat: Brass. 7. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 8. Diaphragm: EPT. 9. Low inlet -pressure check valve. 10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown. 11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 12. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F. Diaphragm -Operated Safety Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparab le product by one of the following:
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -5 a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Body: Bronze or brass. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon -filled PTFE. 6. Seat: Brass. 7. Stem Seals: EPDM O -rings. 8. Diaphragm: EPT. 9. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 10. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown. 11. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 12. V alve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. G. Automatic Flow -Control Valve s: 1. Available Manufacturers: Su bject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 4. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 5. Piston and Spring Assembly: S tainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 6. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass -alloy ball valve. 7. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 8. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 9. Perform ance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 10. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig . 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F . 2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be inc orporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco.
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -6 C. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 . 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 . 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig . 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F . D. ASME Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 1 5 0 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Air -Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper -pl ated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless -steel ball check, 100 -gal. unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 1 5 0 -psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, non ferrous internal parts; 1 5 0 -psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. 4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4 -inch -diameter gage glass, and slotted -metal glass guard. E. In -Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig . 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F . 2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125 -psig working pressure; 5 -gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment. B. Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inh ibitors and environmental -stabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions. 2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPEC IALTIES A. Y -Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain c onnection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig .
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -7 B. Stainless -Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing protective jacket. 2. E nd Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig . 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F . C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fit tings and Loops." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Type L , drawn -temper copper tu bing, wrought -copper fittings, and soldered joints. B. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fittings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. C. Hot -Water Heating Piping Installed Belowgrou nd and within Slabs: Type K , annealed -temper copper tubing, wrought -copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints. D. Condensate -Drain Piping: Type M , drawn -temper copper tubing, wrought -copper fittings, and soldered joints. E. A hybrid combination of copper / HePex system is an acceptable deduct alternate hydronic piping system. All piping 1 -1/2” and larger shall be installed in type “L” copper. All piping ion areas where rigidity is required shall be installed in copper, i.e., at shower heads. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated -orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated -orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot -water generators and elsewhere as re quired by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip -pan elbow on safety -valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: S ection VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure -reducing valves at makeup -water connection to regulate system fill pressure.
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -8 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordi nation Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to buildi ng walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Ins tall piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Insta ll groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and e lsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "Valves." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure -reducing v alve, solenoid valve, in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 . T. Install expansion loop s, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -9 U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with the following requirements fo r maximum spacing of supports. B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 fee t or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 : Maximum span, 7 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 7 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 3. NPS 1 -1/2 : Maximum span, 9 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 4. NPS 2 : Maximum span, 10 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 5. NPS 2 -1/2 : Maximum span, 11 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 6. NPS 3 : Maximum span , 12 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 7. NPS 4 : Maximum span, 14 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch . E. Install hangers for drawn -temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 : Maximum span, 5 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 2. NPS 1 : Maximum span, 6 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch . 3. NPS 1 -1/2 : Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 4. NPS 2 : Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 5. NPS 2 -1/2 : Maximum span, 9 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . 6. NPS 3 : M aximum span, 10 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch . F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCT ION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specify ing piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water -flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -10 E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tu be" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or dam aged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Mechanically Formed, Copper -Tube -Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer -recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install man ual air vents at high points in piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in -li ne air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full -size, full -port, ball valve in the main between b ypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full -size, full -port, ball valve. E. Install ASME expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full o f water. Do not overload building components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT C ONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations cl ose to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections accordin g to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -11 3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water. B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation. C. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations: 1. Hot -Water Heating Piping: Minimum 30 percent propylene glycol. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave jo ints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testin g. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to v alve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the f ollowing tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of wate r. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minu tes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating th e system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure -reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -12 END OF SECTION 23211 3
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 232123 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Close -coupled, in -line centrifugal pumps and wet rotor circulators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensi ons, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. UL C ompliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor -operated water pumps. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articl es where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lim ited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 -2 2.2 CLOSE -COUPLED, IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUM PS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 3. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. 4. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 5. Taco, In c. B. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung -impeller, close -coupled, in -line pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125 -psi g minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 200 deg F . C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion -flange connections. 2. Im peller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless -steel spring, and bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on sh aft between motor and seal. 5. Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite -impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring betw een center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland. 6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Single speed, wi th permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors." 2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTI NGS A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump -inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless -steel straighteni ng vanes; drain plug; and factory -fabricated support. B. Triple -Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast -iron body, pump -discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze -fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass ga ge ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently suppo rt pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
AESI 27210 HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 -3 D. Install continuous -thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are spec ified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." E. Suspend vertically mounted, in -line centrifuga l pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous -thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mech anical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." 3.2 ALIGNMENT A. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructio ns. B. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1 -1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate gener al arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equ al to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure -gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selecto r valve. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." END OF SECTION 23212 3
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 232500 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION HVAC WATER TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Sec tion includes the following boiler water -treatment systems: 1. Bypass chemical -feed equipment and controls. 2. Chemical treatment test equipment. 3. HVAC water -treatment chemicals. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Water quality for boiler systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growt h for opti mum efficiency of boiler equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment. B. Base boiler water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, the boiler system equipment material characteristics and functional performan ce characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clos ed hydronic systems, including h ot -water heating, shall have the following water qualities: 1. pH: Maintain a value within 7 to 9 . 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value w ithin 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. Soluble Copper: M aintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 9. Microbiological Limits: a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximu m value of 1000 organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Mainta in a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated . B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 2 C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Other Informational Submittals: 1. Water -Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to ac hieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above. 2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site. 3. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized -steel surfaces, and confirm this observation in a letter to Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. H VAC Water -Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water -treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water -treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section. B. Electrical Com ponents, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manuf acturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ampion Corp. 2. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc. 3. Aqua -Chem, Inc.; Cleaver -Brooks Div. 4. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc. 5. Boland Trane Services. 6. GE Betz. 7. GE Osmon ics. 8. H -O -H Chemicals, Inc. 9. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div. 10. ONDEO Nalco Company. 11. Watcon, Inc.
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 3 2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL -FEED EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion -resistant exterior coating, minimum 3 -1/2 -inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel. 1. Capacity: 5 gal . 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 1 5 0 psig . 2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test Kit: Manufacturer -recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall -mounting cabinet for testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests for high -pressure boilers, and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems. B. Corrosion Test -Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive -resistant material, complete with piping, valve s, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test -coupon assembly. 1. Two -station rack for closed -loop systems. 2.4 CHEMICALS A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water -treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. B. Water Softener Chemicals: 1. Mineral: High -capacity, sulfonated -polystyrene ion -exchange resin that is stable over entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock. Re sin exchange capacity minimum 30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when regenerated with 15 lb of salt. 2. Salt for Brine Tanks: High -purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and granulated forms are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXE CUTION 3.1 WATER ANALYSIS A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install che mical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor -mounting accessories to substrat e. B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 4 C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors. D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits. E. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hyd ronic systems, including hot -water heatin g , and equipped with the following: 1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Install water meter in makeup water supply. 3. Install test -coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full -port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feede r inlet. 5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacen t to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Make piping connections between HVAC water -treatment equipment and dissimilar -metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water -treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general -duty valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." E. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup water connections to potable -water systems. F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for E lectrical Systems." H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manu facturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
AESI 27210 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 5 C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water -treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water -treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures. 4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pres sure constitute defects. 8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E. At eight -week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical -feed systems are maintaining water quality w ithin performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. F. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards: 1. Silica : ASTM D 859. 2. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 3. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 4. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water -treat ment systems and equipment. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 232500
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 233113 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts an d fittings for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air -distribution s ystems in low pressure classes . B. See Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct -mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.2 S UBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. 1. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 2. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Ai r Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may b e incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIAL S A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Co nstruction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and othe r imperfections.
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113 -2 B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill -phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches . 2.3 DUCT LINER A. Vinyl coated fiberglass, “K” value of 0.29 at 75° F, 2 lb/cu. ft. density, secured to the metal with a solid coat of adhesive, vinyl coated side to the air stream. B. Insulation thickness: 1” unless otherwise noted on drawings. 2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; gl ass -fiber -reinforced fabric. B. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. C. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhe sive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. D. Solvent -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 7 5 percent solids. E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.5 HANGERS AND SU PPORTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Use powde r -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. B. Hanger Materia ls: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACN A's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113 -3 D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FAB RICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --M etal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class r equired for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufa cturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed -On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," Figure 1 -4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up t o 2 -inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static -Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 2 -inch wg . 2. Supply Ducts (in Mechanica l Equipment Rooms): 2 -inch wg . 3. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 -inch wg . 4. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 -inch wg . 5. Laundry clothes dryer venting: .5 - inch wg.
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113 -4 3.2 DUCT LINER A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are clear opening inside lining . B. Internally line the following duct: 1. All concealed supply air duct. 2. All transfer ducts. 3. Other locations as shown on drawings. 3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install ducts with fewest possible jo ints. C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches , with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, co lumns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch , plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unle ss specifically indicated. I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire - and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover ent ire joint and sheet metal screws. K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. L. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1 -1/2 inches . M. Fire -Rated Partition Penetr ations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." N. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
AESI 27210 METAL DUCTS 233113 -5 O. All laundry clothes dryer vent ductwork shall be constructed fro m aluminum sheet metal. 3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALI NG A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower than 2 -inch wg , seal transverse joints. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. C. Laundry clothes dryer vent shall be connected and sealed without the use of penetrating sheet metal screws. 3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTI NG A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inche s of each branch intersection. B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor. C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one -fourth of failure (proof -test) load. D. Install concrete inserts before p lacing concrete. E. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 1. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." a. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. END OF SECTION 23311 3
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 233300 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure r elief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Motor operated Control dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct -mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabricatio n and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installa tions. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire -damper and smoke -damper installations, including sleeves; and duct -mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500 -D testing for damper rating.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sh eet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 . 2. Exposed -Surface Finish: Mill phosphatize d. C. Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1 -side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum a nd stainless -steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches . 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSU RE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. SEMCO Incorporated. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm . D. Maximum System Pressure: 1 -i nch wg . E. Frame: 0.052 -inch -thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -3 F. Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center -pivoted, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025 -inch -thick, roll -formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Paralle l. H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch . J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball. M. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setti ng for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring -assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Front of rear screens. 6. 90 -degree stops. N. Sleeve: Minimum 20 -gage thickness. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER S A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METAL AIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat -shaped, galvanized -steel channel s, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -4 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel - or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Stainless -steel sleeve. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance In c.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent P roducts Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.10 -inch -thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades : a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel - or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll -Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10 -inch -thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded -Aluminum Blades: 0.050 -inch -thick extru ded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Stainless -steel sleeve. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -5 C. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 1 -inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple -damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple -damper assembly. D. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc -plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch -thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. 3. Incl ude elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Meste k, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 6. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 7. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 8. M&I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd. 9. McGill AirFlow LLC. 10. METALAIRE, Inc. 11. Metal F orm Manufacturing, Inc. 12. Nailor Industries Inc. 13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 14. Ruskin Company. 15. Vent Products Company, Inc. 16. Young Regulator Company. B. Frames: 1. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 2. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches . 2. Opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene ed ging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2 -inch -diameter; galvanized steel; blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F .
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -6 E. Bearings: 1. Stainless -steel sleeve. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blad e. 2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add -on or roll -formed, factory -fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requ irements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -s haped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin -bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Van e Construction: Single wall. F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -7 2.7 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, In c. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. McGill AirFlow LLC. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Ventfabrics, Inc. 8. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Duct -Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate a ccess panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2 -10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2 -11, "Access Panels - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill an d thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1 -by -1 -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foa m gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches : Three hinges and two compression latche s. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches : Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. C. Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duc t pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive -pressure ducts and inward for negative -pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 10 -inch wg . 5. Doors close when pressures are within set -po int range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1 -inch -thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANEL AS SEMBLIES A. Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flame Gard, Inc. 3. 3M.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -8 B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528 -inch carbon steel. D. Fasteners: Carbon s teel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease -tight, high -temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F . F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg , positive or negative. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame -retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric str ip 3 -1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2 -3/4 -inch -wide, 0.028 -inch -thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch -thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F . F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch i n the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F . G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and inse rt in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without bi nding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement at start and stop.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -9 2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4 -inch wg positive and 0.5 -inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm . 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F . C. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches , to suit duct size. 2. Non -Clamp Connectors: Adhesive. 2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDW ARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit d uct -insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Stand ards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fi brous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches exten d from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -10 E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fi re and smoke dampers according to UL listing. H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from manual volume d ampers, control dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 4. At each change in direction and at maximum 50 -foot spacing. 5. Upstream of turning vanes. 6. Elsewher e as indicated. I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches . 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches . 3. Head and Hand Access : 18 by 10 inches . 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches . 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches . 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches . K. Label acces s doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch wg and more, cover fle xible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12 -inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low -pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60 -inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive. Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch movement during start an d stop of fans.
AESI 27210 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 -11 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -response device is installed. END OF SECTION 23330 0
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 235216 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, factory -fabricated and -assembled, gas -fired, water -tube condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolatio n bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manu facturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Source quality -control test reports. E. Field quality -control test reports. F. Operation and maintenance data. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -2 C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements." D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial -Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Pulse -Combustion Boilers: a. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Shock: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat -Exchanger Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warr anty Period for Fire -Tube Condensing Boilers: a. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Water -Tube Condensing Boilers: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Water -Jacketed Condensing Boilers: a. Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corro sion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a compara ble product by one of the following: 1. Buderus . 2. AERCO International. 3. Laars Heating Systems; a division of Waterpik Technologies, Inc. 4. Lochinvar Corporation.
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -3 2.2 TRIM A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.1, "Power Piping or ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping" B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3 -1/2 -inch - diameter, combination water -pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating -pressure and -temperature r anges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose -end gate valve. G. Circulation Pump: Non -overloading, in -line pump with split -capacitor motor having thermal -overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures. 2.3 CONTROLS A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features: 1. Control transformer. 2. Set -Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 3. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory -fabricated and field -installed panel to control burner firing rate to maintain space temperature in response to thermostat with heat anticipator located in heat ed space. 4. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory -fabricated and field -installed panel to control burner firing rate to reset supply -water temperature inversely with outside -air temperature. At 0 deg F outside -air temperature, set supply -water temperat ure at 140 deg F ; at [60 deg F outside -air temperature, set supply -water temperature at 140 deg F . a. Include automatic, alternating -firing sequence for multiple boilers to ens ure maximum system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal runtime for boilers. C. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation. 1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner i f operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature. 2. Low -Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be automatic -reset type. 3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual -reset pressure s witch field mounted on boiler combustion -air inlet. 4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions.
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -4 2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER A. Controllers, El ectrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Single -Point Field Power Connection: Factory -installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary sh all provide a single -point field power connection to boiler. 1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Wiring shall be numbered and color -coded to match wiring diagram. 3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. 4. Field power interface sha ll be to fused disconnect switch. 5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or circuit breaker. 6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 2.5 VENTING KITS A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, Type 29 -4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble , indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant. B. Combustion -Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air coupling, and sealant. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTR OL A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: F actory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test. B. Test and inspect factory -assembled boilers, before shipping, acco rding to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Vibration Isola tion: Elastomeric isolation pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch . Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install gas -fir ed boilers according to NFPA 54. D. Assemble and install boiler trim. E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -5 F. Install control wiring to field -mounted electrical devices. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least f ull size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Div ision 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas -train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. F. Connect hot -water piping to supply - and return -boiler tap pings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. H. Boiler Venting: 1. Install flue venting kit and combustion -air intake. 2. Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." J. Connect wirin g according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air -fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high - and low -limit safety set points of fuel supply, wa ter level, and water temperature.
AESI 27210 CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 -6 b. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substant ial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representat ive to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 235216
AESI 27210 FAN COIL UNITS 230700 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 238239 LION SQUARE LODGE EAST BUILDING RENOVATION FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan -coil units and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and access ories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and lab eled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In the Fan -Coil -Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of t he manufacturers specified. 3. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each fan -coil unit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers spec ified.
AESI 27210 FAN COIL UNITS 230700 -2 2.2 DUCTED FAN -COIL UNITS A. Description: Factory -packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995. B. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2 -inch thick foil -faced glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying wit h ASTM C 916. 1. Fire -Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame -spread index of 25 and smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004. C. Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections to co mply with ASHRAE 62.1 -2004. D. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked -enamel finish and removable access panels. E. Cabinets: Steel with baked -enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color. 1. Supply -Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis[ with mill -finish, aluminum, double -deflection grille]. 2. Return -Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished to match the chassis. 3. Dampers: Galvanized steel wit h extruded -vinyl blade seals, flexible -metal jamb seals, and interlocking linkage. F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASH RAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV. G. Hydronic Coils : Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch , rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 220 deg F . Include manual air vent and drain. H. Belt -Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single -speed motor installed o n an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted -steel wheels, and painted -steel or galvanized -steel fan scrolls. I. Control devices and operational sequence are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." J. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control voltage transformer. 2. Wall -mounting thermostat with the following features. a. Heat -cool -off switch. b. Fan on -auto switch. c. Fan -speed switch. d. Automatic changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. 3. Un occupied -period -override push button.
AESI 27210 FAN COIL UNITS 230700 -3 K. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fan -coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Suspend fan -coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. C. Verify mounting height in first paragraph below with authorities having jurisdiction to comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act. D. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room de tails before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor. E. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requ irements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal a gainst the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. F. Connect supply and return ducts to fan -coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctionin g controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 238219
AESI 27210 UNIT HEATERS 238239 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 23 8239 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters wit h hot -water heating coils. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of propeller unit heater indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 2. Equipment schedu les to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Artic le 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sterling. 2. Engineered Air Ltd. 3. McQuay International. 4. Rosemex Products. 5. Trane.
AESI 27210 UNIT HEATERS 238239 -2 2.2 UNIT HEATERS A. Description: An assembly includ ing casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical and horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. B. Comply with UL 2021. 2.3 CASING A. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to contro ls. B. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory -assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping. C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. 2.4 COILS A. Test and rate hot -water propeller unit -heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. B. Hot -Water Coil: Copper tube, minimum 0.025 -inch wall thickness, with mech anically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering -water temperature of 325 deg F , with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig underwater. 2.5 FAN A. Propeller type, alumi num wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. 2.6 FAN MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors." B. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated. 2.7 CONTROLS A. Control Devices: Unit -mounted thermostat, 2 -way zone valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Susp end propeller unit heaters from structure with all -thread hanger rods and spring hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechan ical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
AESI 27210 UNIT HEATERS 238239 -3 C. Install unit mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. D. Install piping a djacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply -water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return -wat er connection of unit heater. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Testing: Perform the following field quality -control te sting and report results in writing: 1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through eac h stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 23823 9
AESI 27210 SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINE ERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 238316 LION SQUARE LODGE EA ST BUILDING RENOVATI ON SNOW MELT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes snow melt pip ing, including pipes, manifolds, fittings, and piping specialties. B. See Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Snow melt piping specialties, including rated capacities and water flow an d pressure drops of selected models. B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds, controls, and support assemblies and their attachments to the building structure. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of snow melt piping with the slabs. B. Coordinate size and location of landscape boxes to allow access to manifolds concealed in the landscaping. C. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect. D. Coordinate the rigid board insulation and expansion joint requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Distribution Manifolds: a. Wirsbo Co. b. Rehau Inc. 2. Controls:
AESI 27210 SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -2 a. Tekmar Control Systems, Ltd . b. Infloor Heating Systems. c. Wirsbo Co. 3. Snowmelt Sensors: a. Tekmar Control Systems Ltd.. b. Rehau Inc. c. Wirsbo Co. 2.2 HEAT -TRANSFER PIPES AND F ITTINGS A. PE Plastic: ASTM D 2239, SIDR -11.5 for service at 30 psig and 140 deg F . 1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper with stainl ess -steel clamps. B. PEX Plastic: ASTM F 876. 1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper or brass compression type. C. Single -Tube Plastic tubing: Braided -fiber -reinforced, EPDM elast omeric with extra carbon steel with high -temperature, oxygen -barrier cover; for service at 100 psig and 210 deg F . 1. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, copper with stainless -steel crimps or clamps. 2.3 SNOWMELT SPECIALTIES A. Distribution Manifolds: Brass modular design with injection pumping, main shutoff and balancing valves with thermometers, zone shutoff and balancing valves with flow meter, and identification plate. 1. Mixing Valves: 125 psig , 230 deg F maximum operating pressure and temperature, brass or cast -bronze body, EPDM seals, and threaded connections. 2. Identification Plate: Valve plate shall identify room served and loop number. 3. If more than one loop serves a room, provide identification plates on manifolds to identify rooms served. 2.4 CONTROLS A. Thermostats: 32 to 160 deg F , standard 24 V, 3 wire. B. Snow Detector: 24 -V, microprocessor -based, pulse -width -modulation type, automatica lly detects snow and maintains set temperature in a snow -melting slab. C. Snow -Melting Control Sequence: Flow -through snow -melting piping is modulated to satisfy snow detector.
AESI 27210 SNOW MELT PIPING 238316 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HEAT -TRANSFER PIPING INST ALLATION A. Install piping downstream from manifolds without joints. B. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to concrete reinforcement using plastic tie straps. 1. Inst all a sleeve of foam -type insulation around tubing and extending for a minimum of 3 e chel ons each side of the slab penetration to protect the tubing passing through expansion joints. C. Install manifolds in accessible locations. D. Fill snow melt system with 50% of propylene glycol -to -water solution. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Test Preparation: 1. Temporarily restrain expansion joints so they are not damaged due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 2. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers. 3. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure. B. Tests: 1. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more than 100 psig . 2. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tighten ing, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. C. Prepare a written report of testing. END OF SECTION 23 8316
AESI 27210 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 260500 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 16. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1: 1. Submittals 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Record Documents 4. Maintenance Manuals 5. Electrical Testing 6. Rough -ins. 7. Electrical installations. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 16 Section "ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT," f or factory -installed motors, controllers, accessories, and connections. 2. Division 16 Section "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS," for materials and methods common to the remainder of Division 16, plus general related specifications including: a. Access t o electrical installations. b. Excavation for electrical installations within the building boundaries and from building to utility connections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section "SUBMITTALS." B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus one copy of each submittal re quired, which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engineer. 1. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue - or black -line prints. 2. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. 3. Samples: 1 addition as set. C. Additional copies may be require d by individual sections of these Specifications. 1.04 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. P repare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT
AESI 27210 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 -2 CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for: 1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements. 2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 3. Approved substitutions, Co ntract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.05 ELECTRICAL TESTING A. When the installation is complete, and before Final Acceptance and Work Close Out, conduct the following tests of the electrical systems. Prepare a written repo rt of values of all test readings and procedures together with together with all additional pertinent information and submit these to the Engineer for acceptance. Furnish all equipment, instruments, and personnel required for these tests. Inform the engi neer of intention 48 hours prior to running any tests. B. Low Voltage Service and Distribution: 1. With all lighting and equipment turned on (insofar as practical), take load measurements at the main service and for all feeders leaving the main distribution ce nter or panelboard. Take readings phase by phase. 2. Make an insulation resistance test on all phase bussing within the main distribution switchboard or panelboard with all fuses in place and switches or circuit breakers open. 3. Make insulation resistance test on all feeders leaving the main distribution center or panelboard. 4. Make insulation resistance test with a megger of minimum 500 volt potential. 5. Test the service ground: Resistance to ground should not exceed 5 ohms. Test method shall be the fall of pote ntial method as outlined in Fink & Carroll’s Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers. Test shall not be conducted within 24 hours of any precipitation. The area of the test shall not have been contaminated with any liquids which might affect the resul ts. 6. Perform a test of the GFI tripping of the main breaker per NEC 230 -95C in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and in the presence of the local electrical inspector. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Tab #1 - Name, address and telephone number of each of the following: a. Electrical Contractor, inclu de 24 hour emergency number b. General Contractor c. Architect d. Electrical Engineer e. Supplier of lamps and fuses. 2. Tab #2 - Warranties and certificates
AESI 27210 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 -3 a. All equipment warranties. b. A letter of certification that the generator and ATS have been properly installed and completely tested. 3. Tab #3 - Test Results. a. Service and feeder load tests. b. Ground test results c. Main breaker GFI test results d. Insulation resistance test results. 4. Tab #4 - Shop Drawings. a. Approved shop drawings. b. A separate listing of lamps used with each f ixture type. 5. Tab #5 - Operating procedures a. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start -up, break -in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winte r operating instructions. b. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. c. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.07 DELIVER Y, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, comp liance labels, and other information needed for identification. 1.08 CERTIFICATION All equipment and equipment control panels will be year 2000 compliant. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 1.1 PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH -IN A. Verify final location s for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough -in requirements.
AESI 27210 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 -4 3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordin ate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. 4. Coordinate the installat ion of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in cast -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the W ork. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinat e connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Ins tall systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and compo nents, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for e ase of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "ACCESS DOORS" and Division 16 Secti on "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS." 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right -of -way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 3.04 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (15 is Mechanical Divi sion --16 is Electrical Division). While it is not the intent of this chart to allocate costs to specific contrac tors, it is common sense to expect the costs of all work to be in some contractors price. Be sure costs are covered. Avoid duplica tion or omission by careful coordination with all subcontrac tors and the G.C. Don't assume! FURNISHED SET IN PLACE WIRED UNDER OR MTD . AND CONNECTED Equipment motors and thermal overloads, resistan ce heate rs (3) 15 15 16
AESI 27210 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 -5 Magnetic starters and overload relays (3) 15 16(1) 16 Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, h.P. Rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, manual operating switches (3) 16(1) 16(1) 16 Thermostats, control relays, control tra ns - formers, solenoid valves (3) 15 15(2) 15(2) Note (1) If furnished as part of factory wired equip ment, then wiring and connec tions only by Division 16. Note (2) If line thermostats, P.E. switches, Time switches, etc., carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connect ed under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equip ment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., They shall be set in place under the Mechani cal Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechani cal Division. Note (3) Th e above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Provide motors and equipment for only those current charac teristics indicated on the drawings. It is the intent o f this division to require complete systems per the contract docu ments. Coordinate all equipment requiring electrical power, regardless of voltage, with other trades, so that all systems are complete and operable. END OF SECTION 26050 0
AESI 27210 GROUNDING 260526 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 260526 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise requir ed by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Cop per tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for application s in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure -type, with at least two bolts.
AESI 27210 GROUNDING 260526 -2 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, size d for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel, 3/4 inch by10 feet in diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Con ductors: Install bare copper conductor. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeder s and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single -phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three -phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal -clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install ins ulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Computer and Rack -Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding con ductor in branch -circuit runs from equipment -area power panels and power -distribution units. B. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat -tracin g cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. C. Signal and Communication Equipment : For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway
AESI 27210 GROUNDING 260526 -3 from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4 -by -2 -by -12 -inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. D. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulat ed equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch -circuit conductors. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid ob structing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with groundi ng electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Stru cture: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermi c -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric m ain water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. C onnect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
AESI 27210 GROUNDING 260526 -4 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for complianc e with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System; 5 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Ar chitect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 26052 6
AESI 27210 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 260529 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for elec trical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, inclu ding comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. D esign equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Welding certific ates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTAC HMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited t o, the following:
AESI 27210 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529 -2 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Bett s Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvani zed after fabrication and applied according to MFMA -4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA -4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA -4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, si ze, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and ga lvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, she ar, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufact urers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanica l -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, ma nufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
AESI 27210 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529 -3 1) Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Coope r Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying wit h MFMA -4 or MSS SP -58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQU IPMENT SUPPORT ASSEM BLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Min imum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other suppo rt system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assem blies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported componen ts plus 200 lb .
AESI 27210 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529 -4 D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Light Steel: She et metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substra te. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABR ICATED METAL SUPPORT S A. Comply with installation requ irements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Weldi ng: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000 -psi 28 -day compressive -st rength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's se tting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's wr itten instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and suppor ts. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils .
AESI 27210 SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529 -5 B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surf aces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26052 9
AESI 27210 RACE WAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS 260533 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 260533 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabine ts for electrical wiring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Ac cessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TU BING A. EMT: ANSI C80.3. B. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings f or Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die -cast, set -screw or compression type. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. ENT: NEMA TC 13. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC -40 -PVC, unless otherwise indicated. C. LFNC: UL 1660. D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
AESI 27210 RACE WAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS 260533 -2 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products tha t may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B -Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold -down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wirewa ys as required for complete system. E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, A ND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. C. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. D. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless ot herwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. G. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standa rd enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
AESI 27210 RACE WAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS 260533 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPL ICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: not permitted. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT from panel to local juncti on box within room, MC cable from local junction box to device. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet L ocations: EMT. 5. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch ] [3/4 -inch trade size. D. Rac eway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicab le to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water a nd steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above th e finished slab. F. Install no more than the eq uivalent of three 90 -degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
AESI 27210 RACE WAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS 260533 -4 H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run con duit larger than 1 -inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC -40 -PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows: 1. 3/4 -Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet . 2. 1 -Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet . 3. Install with a maximum of two 90 -degree bends or equivalent for eac h length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. M. Expansion -Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F , and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet . 1. Install expansion -joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 de g F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temper ature change. 3. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirec essed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
AESI 27210 RACE WAYS, BOXES AND CABINETS 260533 -5 O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDE RGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie -in point, and work toward end o f conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to wit hin 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. 5. Install ma nufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpo se, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated groundin g bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. 3.4 FIRESTOPPIN G A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestop ping." END OF SECTION 26053 3
AESI 27210 ELE CTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 260553 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ide ntification for conductors and communication and control cable. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 1.4 COORDINATIO N A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUN ICATION - AND CONTROL -CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self -adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printe d by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND S IGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or o ther access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fasteners for Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the follow ing legends:
AESI 27210 ELE CTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -2 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT M UST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 mm)." 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICA TION LABELS A. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Auxiliary Electric al Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify field -installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, t erminals, and cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclo sures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self -adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Con trol Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or c over of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. C. Equipment Identification Labels: On e ach unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, contro l stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Sel f -adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2 -inch - high letters on 1 -1/2 -inch - high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches h igh. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw attachment. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
AESI 27210 ELE CTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -3 a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. c. Disconnect switches. d. Enclosed circuit breakers. e. Contactors. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify ide ntity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenan ce of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applica tion, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and s ubstrate. F. Color -Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120 -V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. END OF SECTION 260553
AESI 27210 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 260923 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST LIGHTING CON TROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Time switches. 2. Outdoor photoelectric switches. B. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for w all -box dimmers, wall -switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality -control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, a nd Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compli ance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Square D; Schneider Electric. 7. TORK. 8. Touch -Plate, Inc. 9. Watt Stopper (The).
AESI 27210 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 -2 D. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid -state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complyi ng with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: DPDT. 2. Contact Rating: 30 -A inductive or resistive, 120/240 -V ac. 3. Program: 8 on -off set point s on a 24 -hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 4. Program: 2 on -off set points on a 24 -hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that override s the weekly operation on holidays. 5. Programs: 4 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 8 on -off set points on a 24 -hour schedule. 6. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on -off function of a program on selected channels. 7. Astronomic Time: All channels. 8. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock. 2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRI C SWITCHES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limit ed to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Area Lighting Re search, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Novitas, Inc. 5. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 6. Square D; Schneider Electric. 7. TORK. 8. Touch -Plate, I nc. 9. Watt Stopper (The). D. Description: Solid sta te, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 -VA tungsten or 1000 -VA inductive to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A. 1. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc , with an adjustment for t urn -on and turn -off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn -off. 2. Time Delay: 15 -second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal -oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base -and -stem mounting or stem -and -swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure. 2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLE S A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote -Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No . 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
AESI 27210 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 -3 B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded -copper c onductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded -copper c onductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Pow er Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch . B. Wiring wit hin Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power -limited and nonpower -limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherw ise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according t o Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with require ments. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. END OF SECTION 26092 3
AESI 27210 PANELBOARDS 262416 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 262416 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST PANEL BOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distrib ution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake m otions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 . 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic for ces specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed device s, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short -circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Divisi on 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Field quality -control reports. E. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. F. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
AESI 27210 PANELBOARDS 262416 -2 C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materia ls or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOAR DS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defin ed in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosures: Flush - and surface -mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry a nd Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with con ductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed -Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards wit h one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rat ing: Rated for series -connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable
AESI 27210 PANELBOARDS 262416 -3 upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series -connected short -circuit ratin g by an NRTL. I. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short -circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBO ARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject t o compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electri c Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. D. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. E. Mains: as scheduled F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker F rame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on circuit breakers. G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug -in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical relea se for removal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
AESI 27210 PANELBOARDS 262416 -4 G. Stub three 1 -inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub three 1 -inch empty conduits into raised floor spa ce or below slab not on grade. H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying wit h Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each p anelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify co mpliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboa rds included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 26241 6
AESI 27210 WIRING DEVICES 262726 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 262726 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers. 3. Communications outlets. B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials an d process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device -Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
AESI 27210 WIRING DEVICES 262726 -2 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEP TACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, Decora type: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5 -2 0R, and UL 498. 1. Available Products: S ubject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACL ES A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through, Decora type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indic ator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance wi th requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. P ass & Seymour; 2084. 2.4 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A, Decora type: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compli ance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). c. Leviton; 1221 -2 (single pole), 1222 -2 (two pole), 1223 -2 (three way), 1224 -2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four w ay). 2.5 WALL -BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full -wave, solid -state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
AESI 27210 WIRING DEVICES 262726 -3 B. Control: Continuously adjustable toggle switch with single -pole or three -way switching. Comply with UL 1472. C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square -law dimming curve. On -off switch positions shall bypass dim mer module. 1. Dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. 2.6 WALL PLATES A. Single and c ombination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring -loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover. 2.7 FL OOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush -type, dual -service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Round with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5 -20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keye d, color -coded, RJ -45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable. 2.8 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate dev ice color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades:
AESI 27210 WIRING DEVICES 262726 -4 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding ag ainst outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls s o that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just b efore they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wi ring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are n ot less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 - or 20 -A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fibe r or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and r emount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared ne utral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
AESI 27210 WIRING DEVICES 262726 -5 H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimen sion vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and cir cuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptab le range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15 -A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the tes t plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar pro blems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 26272 6
AESI 27210 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAI C DEVICES – GRID CONNECTED 263500 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 263500 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC DE VICES – GRID CONNECTED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Panels. 2. Inverters. 3. Combiners. 4. Conductors and other Devices. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each all solar panels, inverters, and all oth er related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail current and voltage ratings of all equipm ent. 4. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that solar photovoltaic panels, inverters, disconnects, and other accessories will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Field quality -control reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and appli cation. B. Installation to comply with NFPA 70 Art 690 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warrant y - Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty - Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrant y period.
AESI 27210 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAI C DEVICES – GRID CONNECTED 263500 -1 1. Warranty Period: ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Power Warranty - Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agr ees to repair or replace devices that fail to maintain minimum 80% rated power output within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Twenty five (25) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC P ANELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following : B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or compara ble product by one of the following: 1. Sanyo Solar. 2. Sharp Solar. 3. Mitsubishi Electric Solar. 4. REC Solar. 5. Other. C. General Requirements for Solar Photovoltaic Panels: Co mply with UL 1703, and IEC 61215 or IEC 61646. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70: NEC 2008, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 DC -TO -AC INVERTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, a vailable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following : B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable pro duct by one of the following: 1. SMA America, Inc. 2. Fronius USA. 3. Xantrex. 4. Other. C. General Requirements for Inverters: Comply with UL 1741, and IEEE 1547. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70: NEC 2008, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended locat ion and application.
AESI 27210 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAI C DEVICES – GRID CONNECTED 263500 -1 2.3 AC & DC DISCONNECTS A. AC disconnects and DC disconnects shall comply with Division 26 Section “Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers.” 2.4 COMBINER BOX A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the followin g : B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Xantrex. 2. Blue Oak PV Products. 3. SMA America, Inc 4. Outback. 5. Other. C. General Requirements for Inverters: Comply with UL 1741. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70: NEC 2008, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLE S A. Single Conductor Cable: single copper conductor cable, type USE -2 and other cable listed for use in solar PV applications are acceptable. Minimum cable size of 18 AWG shall be permitted for panel inter -connection. B. Ge neral Conductor Cable: provide Conductor cable that complies with NFPA 70: NEC 2008 Art 310. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install photovoltaic array in orientation and at angle of inclination indicated on drawings. Reference manufacturer’s instructions for fur ther details. B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for wiring of PV module(s), DC combiner box(es), DC disconnect(s), DC/AC inverter(s), and AC disconnects. C. Comply with wiring method requirements of NEC 690 Part IV and Division 26 Section “Low -Voltage Electr ical Power Conductors and Cables.” D. Comply with grounding requirements of NEC 690 Part V and Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.” E. Consult utility to coordinate requirements for electrical metering of the electrical service and back -feeding the electrical power grid.
AESI 27210 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAI C DEVICES – GRID CONNECTED 263500 -1 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. E.C. to engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, asse mblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Perform the following tests and inspections w ith the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After complete installation of photovoltaic system and energizing circuit(s) to photovoltaic equipment, measure voltages and currents at the following equipment: a. Photovol taic module(s) b. DC disconnect(s) c. AC disconnect(s) The results of these measurements shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance manual which is to be provided to the owner. 2. Verify electric meter runs properly when electrical service is utlizing grid -power and when electrical service is back -feeding the grid. 3. Repair or replace any equipment that causes any part of the photovoltaic system to operate outside of design parameters. C. Photovoltaic module(s), inverter(s), and/or other photovoltaic system components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare t est and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 26350 0
AESI 27210 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 265100 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports . B. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps. C. See Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multi pole lighting relays and contactors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes. B. Shop Dr awings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi -level and dimmer -controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality -control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction , and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with r equirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
AESI 27210 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -2 2. Alternate Manufacturers Products: Submit a request to use alternate manufacturers products to the architectural for approval. Submittals for approval must be received by the architect a minimum of seven (7) working days prior to bid opening. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AN D COMPONENTS, GENERA L REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LE R is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools unless otherwise specified. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components fr om falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surf aces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.156 inch minimum un less different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 BALLASTS A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ball asts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi -level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: A 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or as specified. 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
AESI 27210 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -3 B. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid -start type, complying with ANSI C 8 2.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi -level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise i ndicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interfe rence for non -consumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. C. Internal -Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self -contained, modular, batte ry -inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp continuously at 100% lumen output each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Night -Light Connection: Operate on e fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operabi lity. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid -state, constan t -current type with sealed power transfer relay. 2.4 EXI T SIGNS A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING U NITS A. Description: Self -contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, s olid -state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit opera bility.
AESI 27210 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -4 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.6 LAMPS A. Low -Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 Programmed Start High Output Low Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life 30,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. C. T5 Programmed Start Low Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (min imum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4 -Pin, low mercury CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, an d suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUP PORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel - and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: ½ inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, ½ inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel 12 ga ge. E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage. F. Rod Hangers: 3/16 inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod . G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers.
AESI 27210 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 -5 3. Continuous Row s: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and aircraft cable for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. E. Connect wiring according to Divisio n 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. 1. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265 100
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 26 5600 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. B. See Di vision 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on fe atures, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUF ACTURERS A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, t he following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufa cturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with re quirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 -2 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL a cceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IE SNA RP -8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion -resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to preven t warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather - and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light le akage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors s hall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiatio n. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factor y installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specu lar Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat - and aging -resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, m atch finish process and color of pole or support materials. 2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS A. Low -Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. B. Ballast Characteristics: 1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: A 3. See Evaluations for discussion of harmonic distortion in first subparagraph below. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 5. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy -saving, high power fact or, Class P, automatic -reset thermal protection. 6. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
AESI 27210 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 -3 7. Transient -Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better. C. Low -Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low -mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATI ON A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic for ces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010 -inch - thick, pipe -wrapping plastic tape applied with a 5 0 percent overlap. END OF SECTION 26560 0
AESI 27210 Rim Roof Heating System 265 8 00 -1 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 26 5600 LIONSQUARE LODGE EAST EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes heat tape and RIM heating system 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish detail draw ings showing layouts for each RIM Section, cross section drawings, control panel drawings, installation instructions, and operation instructions. B. Furnish Installation Check -Out Forms to be completed after the installation is fi n ished. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. RIM System Equipment, SRH / WFP Heating Cables and Control Panel shall be deli v ered in undamaged condition. The jobsite receiver will inspect the materials when delivered, note any damage on the bill of lading for driver’s signature, and notify the truc king company and man u facturer of the damage within 24 hours of receipt of materials. B. The SRH / WFP Heating Cables shall be warrantied against defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of final acceptance. C. The Control Panel components shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a p e-riod of one (1) year from date of acceptance. D. The manufacturer, at his option, shall either repair or supply replacement materials if that material is d e-fective per the above warranty definitions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Custom engineered RIM System manufactured by Bylin Engin eered Systems, 4800 Golden Foothill Parkway El Dorado Hills, CA, (1 -888 -313 -5666). Alternate pricing for Thermal Technologies as noted per drawings. B. RIM Cover Panels to be 20oz copper or 40 mil aluminum with Kynar -based paint fi n ish and be supplied in 10’ lengths. C. The heating cable shall be UL and CSA listed specifically as electric roof and gutter de -icing and snow -melting equipment and be manufactured in the USA. D. The heating cable shall be of parallel resistance construction capable of being cut to length and term i-nated in the field. E. The heating cable shall consist of two parallel nickel -plated copper bus wires embedded in a radi a-tion cross -linked self -regulating conductive polymer core specifically designed for snow and ice melting. The heati ng cable shall be capable of varying its heat output along its entire length. The
AESI 27210 Rim Roof Heating System 265 8 00 -2 heating cable shall include a polyolefin dielectric jacket rated 300 VAC at 105°C, a tinned -copper braid (14 AWG equivalent wire size), and a UV stabilized polyol e fin overjac ket. F. SRH / WFP Heating Cable supplied by Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA (1 -888 -313 -5666). 2.2 Control Panel A. Custom engineered high efficiency control panel with a UL Listed Label to control the operation of the RIM System and gutter a nd downspout SRH / WFP heating cables. The control panel shall i n-clude circuit breakers with 30ma ground fault protection, temperature controllers, solid state r e-lays, terminal blocks and acce s sories. B. Control Panel supplied by Bylin Engineered Systems, El Dorado Hills, CA (1 -888 -313 -5666). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HEATING CABLE INSTAL LATION A. The heating cable circuits shall be connected to the power wiring in an approved junction box with approved termination components. B. The Contractor shall inspect the materials supplied against the Packing List and Design and Insta l-lation Manual. The Contractor shall note any discrepancies and work with the manufacturer to r e-solve. C. The RIM System, SRH / WFP Gutter / Downspout Heating System and Control Panel shall be i n-stalled in accordance with the manufacturer's Design and Insta l lation Manual. Any deviations shall be reviewed and approved by the manufactu r er. D. Coordinate with the RIM System and SRH / WFP heating cable installers, the gutter and dow n-spout installers and the control panel wiring and section conduit and junction box wiring instal l ers. E. The electrical contractor shall test the SRH / WFP heating cables, complete the test forms and submit them to Bylin Engineered Systems for review and approval. END OF SECTION 2 65 8 00